RMXPRT Onlinehelp

Table of Contents
1. Getting Started with RMxprt

Creating a Project and Inserting a New RMxprt Design . . 1-3
Opening Existing RMxprt Projects and Saving as New . . 1-4
Opening RMxprt Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening Recent RMxprt Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving RMxprt Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving a New RMxprt Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving the Active RMxprt Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving a Copy of an RMxprt Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving RMxprt Project Data Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-5
1-5
Recovering RMxprt Project Data in an Auto-Save File . . 1-6
RMxprt Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Saving Project Notes in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
The RMxprt Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

RMxprt Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Working with the RMxprt Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Working with the RMxprt Shortcut Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Shortcut Menu in the Toolbars Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Shortcut Menus in the Project Manager Window . . . . . . 1-11
Working with the RMxprt Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Undoing RMxprt Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Contents-1
Release 14.5 - SAS IP, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Maxwell Online Help
Redoing RMxprt Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Working with the RMxprt Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Working with the RMxprt Machine Editor Windows . . . . . 1-13
Setting the Window View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Printing in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Working with the RMxprt Project Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Working with the RMxprt Project Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Viewing RMxprt Design Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Working with the RMxprt Properties Window . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Showing and Hiding the RMxprt Properties Window . . . . 1-16
Working with the RMxprt Progress Window . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Working with the RMxprt Message Manager . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Clearing Messages for the RMxprt Project . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Clearing Messages for the RMxprt Model . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Copying Messages in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Quick Start for RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

RMxprt Example Part 1: Create a New Project . . . . . . . . .
RMxprt Example Part 2: Select a Machine . . . . . . . . . . . .
RMxprt Example Part 3: Input Design Data . . . . . . . . . . .
RMxprt Example Part 4: Analyze the Design. . . . . . . . . . .
RMxprt Example Part 5: Create Reports and View Output
RMxprt Example Part 6: Output Design Data . . . . . . . . . .
1-19
1-19
1-20
1-28
1-29
1-34
2. Setting Up RMxprt Projects

Setting Up A Machine Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Changing the Machine Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
SetMachineType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Design Settings in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Setting the Material Threshold in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
RMxprt Export Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Setting User Defined Data File for a Design . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Validating RMxprt Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Setting General Options in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Contents-2
Maxwell Online Help
Setting RMxprt Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

RMxprt Options: General Options Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
RMxprt Options: Solver Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Setting Machine Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Specifying the Material Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Model Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Machine Option for Wire Setting . . . . . . . .
Editing Wire Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-12
2-12
2-12
2-13
Edit AC Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Enable Winding Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Edit Winding Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
View Winding Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Working with the Slot Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

The Slot Editor Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Slot Editor Data Editing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
The New Slot Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Slot Editor Graphical View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Editing Slot Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

The Edit Slot Segment Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Working with Variables in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

Adding a Project Variable in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding a Design Variable in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Add Array of Values for an RMxprt Design Variable . . . . .
Defining Mathematical Functions in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . .
Defining an Expression in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-35
2-37
2-39
2-41
2-41
Using Valid Operators for Expressions in RMxprt . . . . . . 2-42

Using Intrinsic Functions in Expressions in RMxprt . . . . 2-42
Using Piecewise Linear Functions in Expressions in RMxprt 244
Using Dataset Expressions in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Assigning Variables in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Choosing a Variable to Optimize in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Including a Variable in a Sensitivity Analysis in RMxprt . . 2-46
Contents-3
Maxwell Online Help
Choosing a Variable to Tune in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46

Including a Variable in a Statistical Analysis in RMxprt . . 2-47
3. Wire Specification Libraries

Configure Wire Specification Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Specify the Wire Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Edit Wire Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Edit Round Wire Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Edit Rectangular Wire Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Wire Shape Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Recommended Wire Sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Wire Sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Export/Import Wire Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Save Wire Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
4. Working with Materials in RMxprt

Material Library Management for RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Soft-Magnetic Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Adding New Materials to an RMxprt Project . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Relative Permittivity for RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Relative Permeability for a Maxwell or RMxprt Material . . 4-5
Specifying a BH Curve for Nonlinear Relative Permeability 4-5
Bulk Conductivity for an RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Dielectric Loss Tangent for RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Magnetic Loss Tangent for RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Magnetic Coercivity for Maxwell and RMxprt Materials . . 4-10
Core Loss Type for an RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Calculating Properties for Core Loss in RMxprt (BP Curve) 411
Electrical Steel Core Loss from a Single-Frequency Loss Curve
4-12
Electrical Steel Core Loss from Multi-Frequency Loss Curves
4-15
Power Ferrite Core Loss from Multi-Frequency Loss Curves 416
Contents-4
Maxwell Online Help
Mass Density for RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Composition for RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Permanent Magnet Materials in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Nonlinear vs. Linear Permanent Magnets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Compute Remanent Br from B-H curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Calculating the Properties for a Non-Linear Permanent Magnet

in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Calculating the Properties for a Linear Permanent Magnet 4-23
Using Demagnetization Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Hysteresis Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Demagnetization Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Recoil Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Recoil Magnetic Permeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Inflection Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Curve Fitting of Demagnetization Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Three Parameter Curve Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Four Parameter Curve Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Conductor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

Setting the Material Threshold for RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Editing Conductivity Properties in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
5. Specifying RMxprt Solution Settings

Generating a Custom Design Sheet for RMxprt . . . . . . . . 5-3
Key Words in Output Data for RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Creating RMxprt Customized Design Sheet Template . . . 5-5

Design Template of Microsoft Excel Worksheet in Preferred
Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Resort to Key Words in Design Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Set Boundary for Data Imported into Worksheet for RMxprt 5-7
Insert Figures into Template for RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Use Different Languages for RMxprt Design Sheets . . . . 5-9
Post-process Data for RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Contents-5
Maxwell Online Help
6. Running an RMxprt Simulation

Aborting RMxprt Analyses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Re-solving an RMxprt Problem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
7. Post Processing and Generating Reports in

RMxprt
Viewing RMxprt Solution Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Browse Solutions in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Exporting a Simplorer Model or Customized Design Sheet 7-5

Create a Maxwell Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Creating Reports in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Modifying Reports in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening All Reports in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting All Reports in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Display Type in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-7
7-8
7-8
7-8
Creating 2D Rectangular Plots in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Creating 3D Rectangular Plots in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Creating Data Tables in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Working with Traces in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Removing Traces in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Replacing Traces in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Adding Blank Traces in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Sweeping a Variable in a Report in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

Selecting a Function in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Selecting a Parameter, Variable, or Quantity to Plot in RMxprt
7-17
Creating Quick Reports in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

RMxprt Quick Report Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
8. Specifying RMxprt Winding Data

Setting the Winding Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Winding Types Available for Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Enable the Winding Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Edit Winding Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Contents-6
Maxwell Online Help
Setting the Number of Winding Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Connecting and Disconnecting Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Poly-phase Winding Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Windings Basic Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Poly Phase AC Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Whole-coiled Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Half-coiled Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Single-Layer Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Lap-type Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Concentric-type Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Double-Layer Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Fractional-Pitch Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Auto-arrangement of AC Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Phase Spread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Coil Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Coil Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Connection of Double-pole Dual-speed Windings . . . . . . 8-29
DC Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wave Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Frog-leg Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-31
8-32
8-32
8-34
Equipotential Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Pole Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35

Limited Space for Wire Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Round Wire Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Cylinder Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Edgewise Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Pole Winding with Half Turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Exporting Winding Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
9. RMxprt Machine Types

Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Analysis Approach for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . 9-2
Defining a Three-Phase Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Contents-7
Maxwell Online Help
Defining the General Data for a Three Phase Induction Motor

9-4
General Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . 9-5
Defining the Stator Data for a Three-Phase Induction Motor 95
Stator Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . 9-6
Defining the Stator Slots for a Three-Phase Induction Motor 97
Stator Slot Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . 9-7
Defining the Stator Windings for a Three-Phase Induction Motor
9-8
Stator Winding Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . 9-13
Stator Vent Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . 9-16
Defining the Rotor Data for a Three-Phase Induction Motor 916
Rotor Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Defining the Rotor Slots for a Three-Phase Induction Motor 918
Rotor Slot Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . 9-18
Defining the Rotor Winding for a Three-Phase Induction Motor
9-19
Rotor Winding for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . 9-19
Rotor Vent Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . 9-20
Defining the Shaft Data for a Three-Phase Induction Motor 921
Shaft Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Three-Phase Induction

Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Solution Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . 9-22
Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Analysis Approach for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . 9-23
Defining a Single-Phase Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Defining the General Data for a Single-Phase Induction Motor
9-26
Contents-8
Maxwell Online Help
General Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . 9-27
Defining the Stator Data for a Single-Phase Induction Motor 928

Stator Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . 9-29
Defining the Stator Slots for a Single-Phase Induction Motor 929
Stator Slot Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . 9-30

Defining the Stator Windings for a Single-Phase Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Stator Winding Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . 9-38
Defining the Rotor Data for a Single-Phase Induction Motor 941
Rotor Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . 9-42
Defining the Rotor Slots for Single-Phase Induction Motors 942
Rotor Slot Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . 9-42
Defining the Rotor Windings for Single-Phase Induction Motors
9-43
Rotor Winding Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . 9-43
Adding or Removing a Vent from a Single-Phase Induction Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Defining the Shaft Data for a Single-Phase Induction Motor 944
Shaft Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . 9-44
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Single-Phase Induction

Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
Solution Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . 9-45
Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47

Analysis Approach Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-47
Stator Winding Connected to a Sinusoidal AC Source . . 9-48
Stator Winding Fed by a DC to AC Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Defining an Adjustable-Speed Synchronous Machine . . . 9-53

Defining the General Data for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous
Contents-9
Maxwell Online Help
Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
General Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . 9-54
Defining the Stator Windings and Conductors for an AdjustSpeed Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58
Stator Winding Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines

9-68
Defining the Rotor Data for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69
Rotor Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . . . 9-70
Defining the Rotor Pole for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70
Rotor Pole Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines 9-72
Defining the Shaft Data for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72
Shaft Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . . . 9-72
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-72

Solution Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines . 9-73
Permanent-Magnet DC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75

Analysis Approach for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-75
Defining a Permanent-Magnet DC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-76
Defining the General Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . 9-76
General Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-77
Defining the Stator Data for a PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . 9-77
Stator Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78
Defining the Stator Pole for a PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . 9-78
Stator Pole Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-79
Defining the Rotor Data for a PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . 9-80
Rotor Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-80
Defining the Rotor Slots for a PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81
Rotor Slot Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-81

Defining the Rotor Windings and Conductors for a PMDC Motor
9-82
Defining Different Size Wires for a PMDC Motor . . . . . . . 9-86
Contents-10
Maxwell Online Help
Rotor Winding Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-86

Defining the Commutator and Brush for a PMDC Motor . 9-88
Commutator and Brush Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . 9-89

Defining the Shaft Data for a PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90
Shaft Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a PMDC Motor . . . . . 9-90

Solution Data for PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-91
Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-93

Analysis Approach for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines 993
Defining a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . 9-96
Defining the General Data for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-97
General Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . 9-97
Defining the Stator for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine

9-97
Stator Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . . 9-98
Defining Stator Slots for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine
9-99
Stator Slot Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines 9-99

Defining Stator Windings and Insulation for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-100
Stator Winding and Insulation for Three-Phase Synchronous
Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-108
Stator Vent Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines 9111
Defining the Rotor for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine 9112

Rotor, Rotor Pole, and Insulation for Three-Phase Synchronous
Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9113
Defining the Rotor Pole for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-114
Defining the Rotor Winding Data for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-115
Contents-11
Maxwell Online Help
Rotor Winding Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines

9-117
Defining the Rotor Damper Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-117
Damper Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . 9-117
Defining the Shaft Data for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-118
Shaft Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . . . 9-119
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9119

Solution Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines . 9-120
Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9121

Analysis Approach for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . 9121
Defining a Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motor . . . . 9123
Defining the General Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor 9-123
General Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . 9124

Defining the Circuit Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor . . 9-125
Circuit Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-126
Defining the Stator Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor . . 9-126
Stator Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-127
Defining the Stator Slots for a Brushless PMDC Motor . . 9-127
Stator Slot Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . 9128

Defining the Stator Windings and Conductors for a Brushless
PMDC Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-129
Defining Different Size Wires for a Brushless DC Motor . 9-137
Stator Winding Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . 9-138
Defining the Rotor Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor . . 9-139
Rotor Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-140
Defining the Rotor Pole for a Brushless PMDC Motor . . . 9-140
Contents-12
Maxwell Online Help
Rotor Pole Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . 9-142

Defining the Shaft Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor . . . 9-142
Shaft Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-142
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Brushless PMDC Motor

9-142
Analysis Offered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-143
Solution Data for Brushless PMDC Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 9-144
Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145

Analysis Approach for Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . 9145
Defining a Switched Reluctance Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9147
Defining the General Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor 9148
General Data for Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . . . . . 9-149
Defining the Circuit Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor 9149
Circuit Data for Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . . . . . . 9-151
Defining the Stator Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor 9151
Stator Data for Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . . . . . . . 9-152
Defining the Stator Winding Data for a Switched Reluctance
Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-152
Defining Different Size Wires for a Switched Reluctance Motor
9-154
Stator Winding Data for Switched Reluctance Motors . . 9-155
Defining the Rotor Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor 9155
Rotor Data for Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . . . . . . . 9-156
Defining the Shaft Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor 9156
Shaft Data for Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . . . . . . . 9-157
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Switched Reluctance Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Contents-13
Maxwell Online Help
157
Solution Data for Switched Reluctance Motors . . . . . . . . 9-157
Line-Start Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motors . . . . . 9159

Analysis Approach for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors 9159
Defining a Line-Start Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor
9-161
Defining the General Data for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-162
General Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . . . 9-162
Defining the Stator Data for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor
9-162
Stator Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . . . . 9-163
Defining the Stator Slots for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor
9-164
Stator Slot Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . 9-164
Defining the Stator Windings and Conductors for a Line-Start
PM Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-165
Defining Different Size Wires for a Line-Start Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-168
Stator Winding Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors 9169
Optional Vent for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor Stator 9171
Defining the Rotor Data for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor
9-171
Rotor Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . . . . . 9-172
Defining the Rotor Pole for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor
9-172
Rotor Pole Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . 9-173
Optional Rotor Damper for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor
9-173
Defining the Shaft Data for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor
9-174
Contents-14
Maxwell Online Help
Shaft Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . . . . . 9-174
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9174

Solution Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors . . . 9-175
Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9177

Analysis Approach for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9177
Defining a Universal Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9178
Defining the General Data for a Universal Motor . . . . . . . 9-179
General Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-179
Defining the Stator Data for a Universal Motor . . . . . . . . 9-180
Stator Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-180
Defining the Stator Pole for a Universal Motor . . . . . . . . 9-181
Stator Pole Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-183
Defining the Stator Windings and Conductors for a Universal
Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-183
Defining Different Size Wires for a Universal Motor Stator Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-185
Stator Winding Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-186
Defining the Rotor Data for a Universal Motor . . . . . . . . . 9-186
Rotor Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-187
Defining the Rotor Slots for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . 9-188
Rotor Slot Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9188

Defining the Rotor Windings and Conductors for a Universal
Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-189
Defining Different Size Wires for a Universal Motor Rotor Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-193
Rotor Winding Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-193
Defining the Commutator and Brush for a Universal Motor 9195
Contents-15
Maxwell Online Help
Commutator and Brush Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . 9196

Defining the Shaft Data for a Universal Motor . . . . . . . . . 9-197
Shaft Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-197
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Universal Motor . . 9197

Solution Data for Universal Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-198
General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9199

Analysis Approach for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . 9199
DC Machine Operating as a Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-200
DC Machine Operating as a Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-201
Defining a General DC Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9202

Defining the General Data for a General DC Machine . . 9-202
General Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-203
Defining the Stator Data for a General DC Machine . . . . 9-203
Stator Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-204
Defining the Stator Pole for a General DC Machine . . . . 9-205
Stator Pole Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . 9-205
Defining the Stator Field Data for a General DC Machine 9206
Stator Field Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . 9-206
Shunt Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-206
Series Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-207
Compensating Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . 9-208
Commutating Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . 9-209
Winding Data for Commutating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-210
Defining the Rotor Data for a General DC Machine . . . . 9-210
Rotor Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-211
Defining the Rotor Slots for a General DC Machine . . . . 9-212
Rotor Slot Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-212
Defining the Rotor Windings and Conductors for a General DC
Contents-16
Maxwell Online Help
Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-213
Defining Different Size Wires for a General DC Machine Rotor
Winding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-217
Rotor Winding Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . 9-217
Vent Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-219
Defining the Commutator and Brush for a General DC Machine
9-220
Commutator and Brush Data for General DC Machines . 9-221
Defining the Shaft Data for a General DC Machine . . . . . 9-222
Shaft Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-222
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a General DC Machine 9222

Solution Data for General DC Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-223
Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9225

Analysis Approach for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . 9225
Rotor Equipped with an Excitation Winding . . . . . . . . . . . 9-226
Rotor Equipped with a Permanent Magnet Only . . . . . . . 9-226
Power and Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-227
Defining a Claw-Pole Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9228

Defining the General Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator . . . 9-229
General Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-229
Defining the Stator Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator . . . . 9-229
Stator Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-230
Defining the Stator Slot Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator . 9-231
Stator Slot Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . 9-231
Defining the Stator Winding Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator 9232
Stator Winding Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . 9236

Defining the Rotor Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator . . . . . 9-238
Rotor Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-239
Contents-17
Maxwell Online Help
Defining the Rotor Pole for a Claw-Pole Alternator . . . . . 9-239

Rotor Pole Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . 9-239
Defining the Shaft Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator . . . . . 9-240
Shaft Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-240
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Claw-Pole Alternator 9240

Solution Data for Claw-Pole Alternators . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-241
Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines (NSSM) 9242

Analysis Approach for Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous
Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9242
Defining Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines 9246
Defining the General Data for a Three-Phase NSSM . . . 9-246
Defining the Stator for Three-Phase NSSM . . . . . . . . . . . 9-247
Define NSSM Rotor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-251
Define NSSM Shaft Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-254
Analysis Setup for Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9254

Add Solution Setup for NSSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-254
Validate NSSM Solution Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-255
Design Output for Non-Salient Synchronous Machines . . 9255

View Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-255
View Design Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-256
View Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-257
Create Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-261
Transient FEA of the Non-Salient Synchronous Machines 9261

Create Maxwell 2D Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-262
Review Maxwell2D Design Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-262
Generic Rotating Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Contents-18
Maxwell Online Help
270
Analysis Approach for Generic Rotating Machines . . . . . 9270
Generic Rotating Machine Operating as a Generator . . . 9-271
Defining a Generic Rotating Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9274

Defining the General Data for a Generic Rotating Machine 9275
Defining the Stator and Rotor Data for a Generic Rotating Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-276
Defining Stator and Rotor Core Data for a Generic Rotating Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-277
Defining the Stator and Rotor Core Slots for a Generic Rotating
Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-279
Defining AXIAL_PM Type Stator and Rotor Core Poles for a Generic Rotating Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-281
Defining PM_INTERIOR Type Rotor Core Poles for a Generic
Rotating Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-282
Defining the Stator and Rotor Windings for a Generic Rotating
Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-286
Stator and Rotor Winding Data for Generic Rotating Machines
9-291
Stator and Rotor Circuit Data for Generic Rotating Machines 9295
Defining the Axial AC Rotor Brush for a Generic Rotating Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-296
Vent Data for Generic Rotating Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-297
Defining the Shaft Data for a Generic Rotating Machine 9-297
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Generic Rotating Machine

9-298
Solution Data for Generic Rotating Machines . . . . . . . . . 9-299
Stator Vent Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9301

Rotor Vent Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9302
Contents-19
Maxwell Online Help
Contents-20
1
Getting Started with RMxprt
Rotational Machine Expert (RMxprt) is an interactive software package used for designing and
analyzing electrical machines.
Using RMxprt, you can simulate and analyze the following types of machines:
Three-phase and single-phase induction motors.

Three-phase synchronous machines.
Brushless permanent-magnet DC motors.
Adjust-speed synchronous motors and generators.
Permanent-magnet DC motors.
Switched reluctance motors.
Line-start permanent-magnet synchronous motors.
Universal motors.
General DC machines.
Claw-pole alternators.
Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machine
Generic Rotating Machine
When you start a new model in RMxprt, you first select one of the above motor or generator types.
You then enter the parameters associated with that machine type in each RMxprt Properties window. The properties windows are accessed by clicking each of the machine elements (for example,
stator, rotor, shaft) under Machine in the project tree. General options are available directly at the
Machine level of the project tree. Solution and output options (such as the rated output power) are
set when you add a solution setup (by right-clicking Analysis in the project tree).
Related Topics:
The RMxprt Desktop
RMxprt Commands
Getting Started with RMxprt 1-1
Maxwell 3D Online Help
Setting Up A Machine Model

Creating a New RMxprt Project
Specifying RMxprt Machine Data
1-2 Getting Started with RMxprt
Creating a Project and Inserting a New RMxprt Design

To create a new project:
1.
Click File>New.
A new project is listed in the project tree. It is named Projectn by default, where n is the order
in which the project was added to the current session.
Project definitions, such as material assignments, are stored under the project name in the
project tree.
2.
Click Project>Insert RMxprt Design or click the RMxprt icon on the toolbar.
The Select Machine Type window appears.
3.
Select the machine type you want, and click OK.
Specify the name of the project when you save it using the File>Save or File>Save As commands.
Opening Existing RMxprt Projects and Saving as New

You may also create new projects from existing ones, by saving them under new file names.
To create a new project from an existing one:
1.
If you are already in the existing project, click File>Save As. The Save As window appears.
(Otherwise, open the existing project you want to copy first.)
2.
Enter a new name for the new project, and click Save.
The new project is now saved, with the same information as the existing project.
Opening RMxprt Projects

Open a previously saved project using the File>Open command.
1.
Click File>Open.
The Open dialog box appears.
2.
Use the file browser to find the RMxprt version 6 project file.
By default, files that can be opened or translated by RMxprt are displayed.
3.
Select the file you want to open.
4.
Click OK.
The project information appears in the project tree.
Opening Recent RMxprt Projects

To open a project you recently saved:
Click the name of the project file at the bottom of the File menu.
Saving RMxprt Projects

Use the File>Save As command to do the following:
Save a new project.

Save the active project with a different name or in a different location.
Save the active project in another file format for use in another program.
Use the File>Save command to save the active project.

Related Topics
Saving a New Project
Saving the Active Project
Saving a Copy of a Project
Saving a New RMxprt Project

1.
Click File>Save As.

The Save As dialog box appears.
2.
3.
Use the file browser to find the directory where you want to save the file.
Type the name of the file in the File name box.
By default, all files will have the .mxwl extension.
4.
Click Save.
RMxprt saves the project to the location you specified.
Related Topics
Saving the Active RMxprt Project

Click File>Save.
RMxprt saves the project over the existing one.
Warning
Be sure to save machine models periodically. Saving frequently helps prevent the
loss of your work if a problem occurs. Although RMxprt has an "auto-save" feature,
it may not automatically save frequently enough for your needs.
Related Topics
Saving a Copy of an RMxprt Project

To save an existing, active project with a new name, a different file extension, or to a new location:
1.
Click File>Save As.
2.
Use the file browser to find the directory where you want to save the file.
3.
Type the name of the file in the File name box.
4.
Click Save.
RMxprt saves the project with the new name or file extension to the location you specified.
Related Topics
Saving RMxprt Project Data Automatically

RMxprt stores recent actions you performed on the active project in an auto-save file in case a sudden workstation crash or other unexpected problem occurs. The auto-save file is stored in the same
directory as the project file and is named Projectn.rmpt.auto by default, where n is the order in
which the project was added to the current session. RMxprt automatically saves all data for the
project to the auto-save file, except solution data. By default, RMxprt automatically saves project
data after every ten edits. An "edit" is any action you perform that changes data in the project or the
design, including actions associated with project management, model creation, and solution analysis.
With auto-save activated, after a problem occurs, you can choose to re-open the original
project file (Projectn.mxwl) in an effort to recover the solution data or to open the auto-save file.
To modify the auto-save settings:
1.
Click Tools>Options>General Options.

The Options dialog box appears.
2.
Under the Project Options tab, verify that Do Autosave is selected.

This option is selected by default.
3.
In the Autosave interval box, enter the number of edits that you want to occur between
automatic saves. By default, this option is set at 10.
Note
4.
Auto-save always increments forward; therefore, even when you undo a command,
RMxprt counts it as an edit.
Click OK to apply the specified auto-save settings.

Once the specified number of edits is carried out, a "model-only" save occurs. This means that
RMxprt does not save solutions data or clear any undo/redo history.
When RMxprt auto-saves, an ".auto" extension is appended to the original project file name.
For example, Project1.rmpt will automatically be saved as Projectn.mxwl.auto.
Warning
When you close or rename a project, RMxprt deletes the auto-save file. RMxprt
assumes that you have saved any desired changes at this point.
Related Topics
Recovering Project Data in an Auto-Save File
Recovering RMxprt Project Data in an Auto-Save File

Following a sudden workstation crash or other unexpected problem, you can recover the project
data in its auto-save file.
Warning
When you recover a project's auto-save file you cannot recover any solutions data;
recovering an auto-save file means you will lose any solutions data that existed in
the original project file.
To recover project data in an auto-save file, if RMxprt has unexpectedly crashed:

1.
Launch RMxprt from your desktop.
2.
Click File>Open,.
3.
Select the original Projectn.rmpt project file for which you want to recover its Projectn.rmpt.auto auto-save file.
The Crash Recovery window appears, giving you the option to open the original project file
or the auto-save file.

4.
Select Open project using autosave file to recover project data in the auto-save file, and then
click OK. RMxprt replaces the original project file with the data in the auto-save file.
RMxprt immediately overwrites the original project file data with the auto-save file data,
removing the results directory (solutions data) from the original project file as it overwrites to
the auto-save file.
Warning
If you choose to recover the auto-save file, you cannot recover the original project
file that has been overwritten; recovering data in an auto-save file is not reversible.
Related Topics
Saving Project Data Automatically
RMxprt Files
When you create any project in the Maxwell desktop, including an RMxprt project, it is given a
.mxwl file extension and stored in the directory you specify. Any files related to that project are
also stored in that directory.
Some common file and folder types are listed below:
.mxwl
Maxwell or RMxprt project.
project_name.mxwlresults
Folder containing results data for a project.
design_name.results
Folder containing results data for a design. This folder is stored in

the project_name.mxwlresults folder.
design_name.asol
Results data for a design. This file's contents may be empty if a

solution is unavailable. This file is stored in the
project_name.mxwlresults folder.
Saving Project Notes in RMxprt

You can save notes about a project, such as its creation date and a description of the device being
modeled. This is useful for keeping a running log on the project.
To add notes to a project:
1.
Click RMxprt>Edit Notes.

The Design Notes dialog box appears.
2.
Click in the window and type your notes.
3.
Click OK to save the notes with the current project.
To edit existing project notes:

1.
Double-click the Notes icon in the project tree.

The Design Notes window appears, where you can edit the project's notes.
2.
Click OK to save any changes, or click Cancel to exit without saving edits.
The RMxprt Desktop

RMxprt is integrated within the Maxwell desktop. Consistent with the Maxwell desktop, the RMxprt interface consists of 9 desktop components: a title bar, a menu bar, toolbars, a status bar, a project manager window, a properties window, a message manager window, a progress window, and a
machine editor window. If user-defined rotor or stator slots are used in the design, a slot editor window also displays when a rotor or stator slot is selected in the project tree. The project manager
window, the properties window, the message manager window and the progress window are dockable and resizable.
You can open multiple machine editor windows to display different parts at the same time. One can
remain fixed on the winding, one on the diagram, and one on the main desktop window. To open a
new window, click Window>New Window.
To move back and forth between windows, select the Windows menu, and select the window you
want to view.
RMxprt Title Bar

The title bar is located at the top of the application window. It displays the information of the active
design. If a machine editor window is maximized, its title is appended in the title bar within square
brackets. The information of the active design includs the desktop name, the project name, the
design name and the design type. For an RMxprt design, the design type is Machine.
Working with the RMxprt Menu Bar

The menu bar enables you to perform all Maxwell, ePhysics, and/or RMxprt tasks, depending on
the software you purchased. Such tasks include managing project files, customizing the desktop,
drawing objects, and setting and modifying all project parameters.
RMxprt contains the following menus, which appear at the top of the desktop:
File menu
Use the File menu commands to manage RMxprt project files and printing
options.
Edit menu
Use the Edit menu commands to modify properties in the active design,
manage designs in one or more projects, delete projects, and undo and redo
actions.
View menu
Use the View menu commands to display or hide desktop components, and
change the machine editor window view.
Project menu
Use the Project menu commands to add a Maxwell 3D, Maxwell2D, or

RMxprt design to the active project, analyze all designs of the active project,
and define project variables and datasets.
Machine menu
Use the Machine menu to work with the machine data, such as edit winding
layout, edit wire size, and set dimension unit for the active editor window.
RMxprt menu
Use the RMxprt menu commands to validate design input data, analyze
designs, set up parameters, add analysis setups, set up Optimetrics, post
process solutions, and other design tasks.
Tools menu
Use the Tools menu to modify the active project's material library, arrange the
material libraries, run and record scripts, update project definitions from
libraries, display options, customize the desktop's toolbars, and modify many
of the software's default settings.
Window menu
Use the Window menu commands to rearrange the application windows and
toolbar icons.
Help menu
Use the Help menu commands to access the online help system and view the
current software version information.
Related Topics
Getting Help
Working with the RMxprt Shortcut Menus

A variety of shortcut menus menus that appear when you right-click a selection are available
in the toolbars area of the desktop, in the Machine Editor window, in the Project Manager window, in the Properties window, and in the Message Manager window.
In the toolbars area
Use the shortcut menu in the toolbars area of the desktop to show or
hide windows or toolbars, and customize the toolbars.
In Machine Editor
window
Use the shortcut menu in the Machine Editor window to edit

winding layout, display or hidden coil connection, change the view,
and copy to Clipboard.
In the Slot Editor window Use the shortcut menu in the Slot Editor window to insert, append,
modify, and remove slot segments.
In the Project Manager
window
Use the shortcut menus in the Project Manager window (or the
project tree) to manage project files and design properties; these
commands duplicate menu commands at the top of the screen.
In Properties window
Use the shortcut menus in the Properties window to edit (cut, copy,
paste or delete) property values.
In Message Manager
window
Use the shortcut menus in the Message Manager window to clear,

copy message, or see message details.
Note
Most of the commands on the shortcut menus are also available on the menu bar.
Shortcut Menu in the Toolbars Area

Use the shortcut menu in the toolbars area of the desktop to show or hide windows or toolbars, and
customize the toolbars.
To access the shortcut menu in the toolbars area:
Right-click in the toolbars area at the top of the desktop.
A check box appears next to a command if the item is visible. For example, if a check box appears
next to the Project Manager command, then the Project Manager window is currently visible on
the desktop.
Click Customize to open the Customize dialog box, which enables you to modify the toolbar settings on the desktop.
Shortcut Menus in the Project Manager Window

Each node, or item, in the project tree has a shortcut menu.
To access the shortcut menu in the Project Manager window, for a particular node:
Select a node or item.

Right-click in the Project Manager window.
Working with the RMxprt Toolbars

The toolbar buttons and shortcut pull-down lists act as shortcuts for executing various commands.
You can rearrange the position of the various toolbars.
To execute a command, click a toolbar button or click a selection on the shortcut pull-down
list.
To display a brief description of the toolbar button, move the pointer over the button.
To relocate a toolbar, click on the left edge of a toolbar and drag it to new location..
Hint
To modify the toolbars on the desktop, click Tools>Customize. To display all toolbar
buttons, click the Reset All button in the Customize window.
Undoing RMxprt Commands

Use the Undo command on the Edit menu to cancel, or undo, the last action you performed on the
active project or design.
1.
In the Project Manager window, do one of the following:
To undo the last action you performed on the active project, such as inserting a design,
click the project icon.
To undo the last action you performed on the active design, click the design icon.
Note
2.
You cannot undo an analysis that you have performed on a model, that is, the
RMxprt>Analyze command.
Click Edit>Undo.
Your last action is now undone.
Note
When you save a project, RMxprt always clears the entire undo/redo history for the
project and its designs.
Related Topics
Redoing Commands
Redoing RMxprt Commands

Use the Redo command on the Edit menu to reapply, or redo, the last action that was canceled, or
undone. You can redo a canceled action related to project management, model creation, and postprocessing.
1.
2.
In the Project Manager window, do one of the following:
To redo the last action you canceled on the active project, such as inserting a design or
adding project variables, click the project icon.
To redo the last action you canceled on the active design, such as drawing an object or
deleting a field overlay plot, click the design icon.
Click Edit>Redo.
Your last canceled action is now reapplied.

Note
When you save a project, RMxprt always clears the entire undo/redo history for the
project and its designs.
Related Topics
Undoing Commands
Working with the RMxprt Status Bar

The status bar is located at the bottom of the application window. It displays information about the
where mouse is pointed.
To display or hide the status bar:
Click View>Status Bar.
A check box appears next to this command if the status bar is visible.
Working with the RMxprt Machine Editor Windows

You can open multiple machine editor windows in RMxprt. One can remain fixed on the Winding
Editor, one on the Diagram tab, and one on the Main tab. To open a new window, click Window>New Window. To move back and forth between windows, select the Windows menu, and
select the window you want to view.
You can cascade all Machine Editor windows, tile them horizontally or vertically. You can maximize, minimize or close a Machine Editor window by clicking the relevant button on the right-top
corner of the window. If no Machine Editor window is displayed, you can use RMxprt>Machine
Editor to bring one window up. When only one Machine Editor window is maximized, the window title is displayed within square brackets in the Title Bar of the main application window.
As you enter appropriate property values, the Machine Editor window dynamically updates the
rotor, stator, slots, and windings in the Main, Diagram and Winding Editor tabs. As you provide
winding information, the Winding Editor tab displays a table of values.
Related Topics
Setting the Window View
Printing in RMxprt
Setting the Window View

To fit the entire diagram in the window:
Click View>Fit All.
To zoom into the diagram in the window:
Click View>Zoom In.
To zoom out of the diagram in the window:
Click View>Zoom Out.
Printing in RMxprt
The printing commands enable you to print the display in the active window.
To print the project:
1.
Click File>Print.
The Print dialog box appears.
2.
You can change the print quality (a higher dpi produces a higher quality print but takes more
time and printer memory), or you can send the output to a .prn file.
3.
Do one of the following:
Click OK to print the project.

Click Cancel to dismiss the window without printing.
Click Properties to define printer settings.
Working with the RMxprt Project Manager

The Project Manager window displays the open project's structure, which is referred to as the
project tree. The Project Manager window displays details about all projects open in the Maxwell
Desktop, regardless of type.
To show or hide the Project Manager window, do one of the following:
Click View>Project Manager.

A check box appears next to this command if the Project Manager window is visible.
Right-click in the toolbars area on the desktop, and then click Project Manager on the shortcut menu.
A check box appears next to this command if the Project Manager window is visible.
Related Topics
Working with the RMxprt Project Tree
Shortcut Menus in the Project Manager Window
Working with the RMxprt Project Tree

The project tree is located in the Project Manager window and contains details about all open
projects. The top node listed in the project tree is the project name. It is named Projectn by default,
where n is the order in which the project was added to the current session of the Maxwell Desktop.
Expand the project icon to view all designs and material definitions belonging to the project. For
RMxprt projects, the project tree shows where you can select each portion of the machine to open
the corresponding tab sheet in the Properties window. The project tree lists options for the general
motor characteristics, the stator, the rotor, and other options such as winding data or commutating
data. The specific options depend on the machine type you have selected.
Related Topics
Viewing RMxprt Design Details
Automatically Expand the Project Tree
Setting the RMxprt Project Tree to Expand Automatically

You can set the project tree to automatically expand when an item is added to a project.
1.

The Options dialog box appears.
2.
Click the Project Options tab.
3.
Under Additional Options, select Expand Project Tree on Insert.
4.
Click OK.
Viewing RMxprt Design Details

Once you insert an RMxprt design into a project, it is listed as the second-level node in the project
tree. It is named RMxprtDesignn by default, where n is the order in which the design was added to
the project. Expand the design icon in the project tree to view specific data about the model.
Getting Started witn RMxprt 1-15
The RMxprtDesignn node contains the following project details:

Machine
Allows you to specify parameters for various aspects of the machine. A

whole or part geometry will be drawn in the Main tab of the Machine
Editor window (based on the values you enter).
Analysis
Displays the solution setups for an RMxprt design. A solution setup

specifies how RMxprt computes the solution.
Optimetrics
Displays any Optimetrics setups added to an RMxprt design.
Results
Displays any post-processing reports that have been generated.
Note
To edit a project's design details:
In the project tree, double-click the design setup icon that you want to edit.
A dialog box appears with that setup's parameters, which you can then edit.
Working with the RMxprt Properties Window

The Properties window displays the attributes, or properties, of an item selected in the project treeand enables you to edit an item's properties. The properties, and the ability to edit them in the Properties window vary depending on the type of item selected. The tabs available in the Properties
window also vary depending the selection.
Single clicking on an item in the Machine section of the project tree displays a docked Properties
window located under the project tree. A horizontal scroll bar lets you adjust the view of the properties if necessary. Changes to values in the docked properties window apply immediately to the
selected object.
Double-clicking on an item in the Machine section of the project tree opens a floating Properties
window. The floating window can be moved for convenience in viewing the RMxprt Machine
Editor window. Some objects have tabs on the window to control the properties displayed.
Changes to values in the floating window are not applied until you click the OK button.
Related Topics
Showing and Hiding the Properties Window
Setting the Properties Window to Open Automatically
Showing and Hiding the RMxprt Properties Window

To show or hide the Properties window on the desktop, do one of the following:
Click View>Property Window.

A check box appears next to this command if the Properties window is visible.
Right-click in the toolbars area at the top of the desktop, and then click Properties on the
shortcut menu.
A check box appears next to this command if the Properties window is visible.
Working with the RMxprt Progress Window

The Progress window monitors a simulation while it is running.
To display or hide the Progress window on the desktop, do one of the following:
Click View>Progress Window.

A check box appears next to this command if the Progress window is visible.
Right-click in the toolbars area at the top of the desktop, and then click Progress on the shortcut menu.
A check box appears next to this command if the Progress window is visible.
Working with the RMxprt Message Manager

The Message Manager displays messages associated with a project's development, such as error
messages about the design's setup or informational messages about the progress of an analysis.
To display or hide the Message Manager window on the desktop, do one of the following:
Click View>Message Manager.

Right-click in the toolbars area at the top of the desktop, and then click Message Manager on
the shortcut menu.
A check box appears next to this command if the Message Manager is visible.
Related Topics
Clearing Messages for the RMxprt Project
Clearing Messages for the RMxprt Model
Copying Messages in RMxprt
Clearing Messages for the RMxprt Project

You can clear all the messages for a particular project.
To clear messages:
1.
Right-click the project# in the Message Manager.

A pop-up appears.
2.
Click Clear messages for Project#.
Clearing Messages for the RMxprt Model

You can clear all the messages for a particular model.
To clear messages:
1.
Right-click the RMxprtDesign# in the Message Manager.

A pop-up appears.
2.
Click Clear messages for RMxprtDesign#.
Copying Messages in RMxprt

You can copy all the messages for a particular project.
Getting Started witn RMxprt 1-17
To copy messages:
1.
Right-click in the Message Manager.

A pop-up appears.
2.
Click Copy messages to clipboard.
Quick Start for RMxprt

This section briefly introduces how to enter the environment of the software RMxprt and quick
mastering its main functions by providing a simple example.
The basic process flow chart is shown below.
Create a new Project
Select the machine type.
Input design data.
Analyze the design.

Create Reports and View output
characteristics curves.
Create a Maxwell 2D
Project for electromagnetic
field analyses
Create an electric machine

model for Simplorer System
Simulation
RMxprt Example Part 1: Create a New Project

To create a new project:
1.
Start Maxwell from the desktop.
2.
Click File>New from the menu bar.

This creates a new project folder in the project window with the default name of Projectn.
RMxprt Example Part 2: Select a Machine

To select a machine to insert into the new project:
1.
Click Project>Insert RMxprt Design or click the RMxprt icon in the tool bar.
This displays the Select Machine Type window.
2.
From the list of machine types, for this example, select Brushless Permanent Magnet DC
Motor and click OK.
This closes the window and inserts the Brushless Permanent Magnet DC Motor design in the
project.
Continue to Part 3 of the example to Input Design Data.
RMxprt Example Part 3: Input Design Data

In this part of the example, you provide values for the design and for various parts.
1.
Click the + symbol by the RMxprt:Designn icon in the project tree to view the design hierarchy.
This displays the Machine Icon.
2.
Double-click the icon to view the Machine Properties window.
Set the values as indicated below.

Machine Type
Number of Poles
Rotor Position
Frictional Loss
Wind Loss
Reference Speed
Control Type
Circuit Type
Brushless Permanent Magnet DC Motor

Set this to 4
Set to Inner
Set this to 11 (Frictional and wind loss is typically within the range of
1%~3% of the rated output power, in this example, 2% is estimated.) This
value is referred to the given Reference Speed. The frictional loss at the
computed rated speed will be modified if the computed rated speed is
different from the given rated speed.
0
Set this to 1500
DC
Set this to C2.
Click the button to display the Select Circuit Type window.
Select the C2 button, and OK to close the window.

3.
Click OK to close the Machine properties window.
4.
Click the + symbol by the Machine icon to view the design hierarchy of the motor.
5.
Double-click the Circuit icon to view the Circuit properties window.
Set the values as indicated below.
6.
7.
Lead Angle of
Trigger
Set this to 0 to obtain the maximum average emf for the following phase in
the trig_on period.
Trigger Pulse
Width
Transistor Drop
Diode Drop
Set this to 90
Set this to 2
Set this to 2
Click OK to close the circuit properties window.

Double-click the Stator icon to view the Stator properties window.
Set the values as shown below.
Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Stacking Factor
Steel Type
Set this to 120.

Set this to 75.
Set this 65 for the length of the Stator iron core.
0.95
Click on the button to display the Materials window. Select RMxprt
library in the Libraries box in the upper right corner of the Materials
window: then select M19-24G.
Note: If RMxprt is not listed in the libraries box in the upper right corner of
the Materials window, quit the Materials window, click Tools>Configure
Libraries, add RMxprt (under materials) and click the Save as Default
check box. Then click OK.
Number of Slots
Slot Type
Skew Width
8.
Set this to 24.

Select 2 as the Slot type. Click the button on the row cell to display the
Select Slot Type window.
Click the 2 button and OK to close the window.

Set this to 1. (To skew one slot pitch.)
Click OK to close the Stator Properties window.

Take a moment to look at the Maxwell Design window. If you click the Main tab, you will see
two concentric rings that represent the inner and outer diameters you specified. If you click the
Winding Editor tab, you see a table of the coils, with columns for Phase, turns, the in slots,
and the out slots. There is also a drawing showing the placement of the 24 slots of the type that
you defined here.
9.
Click the + symbol by the Stator icon to view the hierarchy under the stator.
10. Double-click the slot icon to view the Slot Properties window.
Set the values as shown below. Some of the properties will not appear until you disable the
Auto Design property in the first row.
Auto Design
Uncheck the box to disable auto design. Close the properties window and
open it again. Then set the given values for the slot shapes.
Parallel Tooth Uncheck this box. The Tooth Width property becomes invisible.
Tooth Width
Hs0
Set to 0.5
Hs1
Set to 1.0
Hs2
Set to 8.2
Bs0
Set to 2.5
Bs1
Set to 5.6
Bs2
Set to 7.6
11. Click OK to close the Slot Properties window.

12. Double-click the stator Winding icon to view the Winding Properties window.
Winding tab
Winding Layers
Winding Type
Set this to 2, "Whole Coiled."
Parallel Branches Select 1 for the number of parallel-connected branches, i.e. the
coils in all the slots per phase are in series-connected.
Conductors per
Set this to 60 for the number of conductors per slot, i.e. the
Slot
number of turns per coil is equal to 30 for double-layer
winding.
Coil Pitch
Set this to 5. For this example, full pitch = 24 slots /
4 poles = 6. This example uses short coil pitch, 5, i.e. a coil
spans from slot 1 to slot 6.
Number of Strands Select 1 for the number of strands (or number of wires per
conductor).
Wire Wrap
Select 0. This is the total thickness of double side wire
insulation. The input value 0 means that RMxprt will
automatically check into the wire gauge library for the wrap
thickness relevant to the wire gauge. Different manufacturers
produce different Wire Wrap Thickness for electromagnetic
wire. Typically, Wire Wrap Thickness for electromagnetic
wire is 7~10% of Wire Diameter.
Wire Size
Click on the Properties field to display the Wire Size window
and select AUTO for automatic design of wire gauge. Wire
Size will be set to 0 in the Wire Size window. This example
relies on RMxprt to automatically select the optimum
diameter and the gauge code for electromagnetic wire.
End/Insulation Input Half-turn
Uncheck this box.
tab
Length
Half Turn Length This item is not shown if Input Half Turn Length is unchecked.
End Adjustment
Set this to 0 for the linear overhang of the end part of the coil
out of the iron core as shown below. In this example, the coil
turns immediately at the slot opening, therefore input 0.
Base Inner Radius 0

Tip Inner Diameter 0
End Clearance
0
Slot Liner
Set this to 0.3 for the single side thickness of slot insulation.
Wedge Thickness 0
Layer Insulation 0
Limited Fill Factor 0.75
13. Click OK to close the stator Winding Properties window.
14. Click Machine>Wiiding>Connect All Coils.
The Winding tab in the main window shows all coils connected.
15. Double-click the Rotor Icon to view the Rotor Properties window.
Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Set this to 74.0. This is the Stator inner diameter - 2* AirGap.

Input 26 for the inner diameter of the rotor core. This is also the diameter to
match the shaft
Input 65 for the length of the rotor core. In this example, the lengths of the
iron cores of the stator and the rotor are the same.
Steel Type
Stacking Factor
Pole Type
Select M19-24 for the brand of the silicon-steel sheet for the rotor. In this
example, the laminations are punched together on the same sheet; therefore,
the brands of the silicon-steel sheet and the stacking factors are the same for
the stator and the rotor.
Input 0.95.
Select 1. Click on the button on the Pole Type field to display the Select
Pole Type window.
Click the 1 button and OK to close the window.

16. Click OK to close the Rotor Properties window.
17. Click the + symbol by the Rotor icon to open the project hierarchy under the rotor.
18. Double-click the Pole icon to view the Pole Properties window.
Embrace
Input 0.7. Embrace of the rotor represents the ratio of the rotor central angle
corresponding to the arc length along the rotor surface of an arched
permanent-magnetic piece to the rotor central angle corresponding to a rotor
pole. In a four pole machine with Embrace, 1, each arched permanentmagnetic piece covers 90 mechanical degrees along the rotor surface.
Similarly, Embrace 0.667 means 60 mechanical degrees of the coverage of
the magnet as shown in the figure.
Offset
Input 0. The arched permanent-magnetic pieces to form the magnets of the

rotor might not be concentric with the rotor as shown in the figure. In the
electric machines with non-uniform air-gap, there exists an offset between
the two centers. RMxprt terms it as Pole Arc Offset. This example uses
uniform air-gap; therefore, the offset is set to 0.
Select XG196/96. This permanent-magnetic steel possesses residual flux

density 0.96 Tesla, coercive force 690 kA/m, maximum magnetic energy
product 183 kJ/m3, and relative recoil magnetic permeability 1.0.
Magnet Thickness Input 3.5 for the thickness of the permanent-magnetic steel.
Magnet Type
19. Click OK to close the Pole Properties window.

To continue to Part 4 of the example, go to Analyze the Design.
RMxprt Example Part 4: Analyze the Design.

Before analyzing a design project, a few options should be decided by the following procedures:
1.
Click Tools>Options>Machine Options.

The Machine Options window appears. The Wire setting should be set to American.
2.
Click OK to close the window.
3.
Click RMxprt>Analysis Setup>Add Setup.

This displays the Solution Setup window. Add the following values.
4.
Close the dialog to save the Setup.
Load Type
Const Power
Rated Output
Power
0.55 kW
Rated Voltage
220
Rated Speed
1500
Operating
Temperature
75c
5.
Click RMxprt>Validation Check to ensure that all values have been set.
If any items do not pass validation, use the diagnostic information in the Message Window to
resolve any issues.
6.
When the design has been validated, click RMxprt>Analyze All.

The progress of the analysis is shown in the Progress window.
To continue to Part 5 of the example, go to Create Reports and View Output.
RMxprt Example Part 5: Create Reports and View Output

After you have run an analysis, you can view the solution data.
1.
Click RMxprt>Results>Solution Data.

This opens the Solutions window with the Solutions tab selected, and the Full Load Operation
Data displayed. The Solutions window contains tabs for the following:
2.
Solution Data - the Data field in the Solutions window is a drop down menu from which
you can select the following:
Full Load Operation

Material Consumption
No Load Operation
Permanent Magnet
Rotor Data
Stator Slot
Stator Winding
Steady State Parameters
Parameter
Design Sheet
Curves - Selecting the Curves tab lets you view pre-defined graphs.
With the Solution tab selected, select Stator Winding as the Data selected.
Except for a few data corresponding to the wire gauge, this part of data should be the same as
the data input in the Stator Winding Properties window. Since automatic design function for
the wire gauge is selected in the input, RMxprt calculates the following data:
Wire Diameter
(mm):
0.8118 for the diameter of the electromagnetic wire.
Wire Wrap
0 for the insulation thickness of the electromagnetic wire. Because input
Thickness (mm): wire wrap is 0, RMxprt picks it up from the selected wire library
(American wire), but it still 0 based on the wire wrap data in the library.
Stator Slot Fill
Factor (%):
61.4557.
The electromagnetic wire with Wire Diameter of 0.8118 is equivalent to AWG 20. Stator
Slot Fill Factor represents the percentage of occupation of the slot area, i.e. the ratio of the
total square sectional area of wires (including Wire Wrap Thickness) in a slot to the total slot
area less the slot insulation.
a.
Now that Wire Diameter of the electromagnetic wire is calculated by RMxprt, you can
open the Winding Properties window and specify the value.
b.
For Wire Size, open the Wire Size selection window, select 0.8118 for the electromagnetic wire diameter, which corresponds to 20 for the wire gauge.
c.
In the slot Wire Wrap field, input 0.08 for the insulation thickness of the electromagnetic
wire.
d.
Click OK to close the properties window.
e.
Click RMxprt>Analyze All.
After the second analysis is completed, click RMxprt>Results>Solution Data to view the
effect of Wire Wrap Thickness of the electromagnetic wire on Stator Slot Fill Factor.
Wire Diameter
(mm):
0.8118.
Wire Wrap
0.08.
Thickness (mm):
Stator Slot Fill
Factor (%):
3.
74.165.
In the Solutions window, change the Data selection to Rotor Data.

The Rotor data is displayed.
Here most of the data is the same as input in the Rotor Pole properties window. The only difference is that the Pole Arc radius replaces Pole Arc Offset and, in addition to Mechanical
Pole Embrace which is input based on the physical geometry, Electrical Pole Embrace is
also given. Electrical Pole Embrace is calculated by the ratio of the average magnetic flux
density to the maximum magnetic flux density according to the magnetic flux density distribution along the air-gap.
4.
In the Solutions window, change the Data selection to Permanent Magnet.
This part displays the characteristic data of the permanent magnets as well as the Demagnetization Flux density, the Recoil Residual Flux density and Recoil Coercive Force of the recoil line
based on the demagnetization flux density, which are used for finite element analysis when a
linear PM characteristics must be specified.
5.
In the Solutions window, change the Data selection to Steady State Parameters.
This part displays the stator winding factor, direct- and the quadratic-axis inductances, the
leakage inductance, the resistance of the phase winding, the direct- and the quadratic-axis time
constants, the ideal torque constant KT and the ideal back emf constant KE.
6.
In the Solutions window, change the Data selection to No-Load Operation.

This part displays the magnetic flux densities in the teeth and the yoke of the stator, and the
yoke of the rotor. The maximum value among the three magnetic flux densities is 1.52 Tesla,
which locates at the knee part of the B-H curve, below the saturation situation.
The mmfs of the teeth and the yoke of the stator, the air-gap, the yoke and the permanent magnet of the rotor are given respectively for half magnetic reluctance path.
The armature reaction mmf due to the armature current is referred to the demagnetization mmf.
The magnetic flux leakage coefficient takes into account the part of the magnetic flux in the
rotor not linking with the stator. The correction factors for the yoke lengths of the stator and
the rotor to calculate the yoke mmfs of the stator and the rotor are also given here.
The no-load revolution speed of this machine is equal to 2001 rpm.
7.
In the Solutions window, change the Data selection to Full Load Operation.
At Rated Output Power (kW): 0.550, the following characteristic parameters of the machine
are calculated as:
Parameters
Calculated Values
Units
Average Input Current
2.93
2.45
70.88
A2/mm3
(of input current waveform in one voltage period)

RMS Armature Current
(of phase current waveform in one voltage
period)
Armature Thermal Load
(product of Specific Electric Loading and
Armature Current Density
Specific Electric Load
)
14.97
A/mm
4.73
A/mm2
(stator current distribution per circumferential

length along air-gap)
Armature Current Density
(through cross-sectional area of stator wire)
Frictional and Wind Loss
11.46
20.24
53.87
9.32
0.69
95.6
550
645.6
85.2
1562
rpm
3.36
Nm
32.3
Nm
47.6
(at computed Rated Speed)

Iron-Core Loss
(due to loss curves of stator and rotor iron-core
materials)
Armature Copper Loss
(stator winding ohmic loss)
Transistor Loss
(transistor switching loss)
Diode Loss
(diode power consumption)
Total Loss
(sum of above losses)
Output Power
(the rated operating point is derived based on
Output Power)
Input Power
(product of Rated Voltage and Average Input
Current)
Efficiency
(ratio of Output Power to Input Power)
Rated Speed
(at Rated Output Power)
Rated Torque
(at Rated Output Power)
Locked-Rotor Torque
(starting torque at zero revolution speed)
Locked-Rotor Current
(starting current at zero revolution speed)
8.
In the Solutions window, select the Design Sheet tab, and scroll down to Winding Arrangement.
This is the layout and the arrangement of the whole two-phase winding of phases A and B, and
the short coil pitch factor 5 is taken into account.
The 2-phase, 2-layer winding can be arranged in 6 slots as below:

AAABBB
9.
In the Solutions window with the Design Sheet table selected, scroll down to Transient FEA
Angle per slot (elec. degrees):
30
Phase-A axis (elec. degrees):
105
First slot center (elec. degrees):
Input Data. (This is at the very bottom.)

The following data of the armature winding corresponds to one phase armature winding.
360
Number of Turns
(total number of turns viewed into output terminals)
Parallel Branches
Terminal Resistance
4.5
Ohm
1.7
mH
(stator winding dc resistance under given operating

temperature, 75oC)
End Leakage Inductance
(of stator winding)
The following data is the equivalent values used to 2D electromagnetic field analyses.
Equivalent Model Depth
65
Equivalent Stator Stacking Factor
0.95
Equivalent Rotor Stacking Factor
0.95
mm
Equivalent Br (residual flux density) 0.87
Tesla
690
kA/m
Equivalent Hc (coercive force)
Estimated Rotor Moment of Inertia 0.0015 kg.m2

10. In the Solutions window, click the Curves tab.
This displays the Input DC Current Versus Speed graph. If the text is too small to read, you can
resize the window. You can view other predefined graphs by selecting from the drop down
menu in the Name field.
Selecting the Curves tab lets you view pre-defined graphs for the following relations:
Inut DC Current Versus Speed

Efficiency Versus Speed
Output Power Versus Speed
Output Torque Versus Speed
Cogging Torque in Two Teeth

Induced Coil Voltages at Rated Speed
Air-Gap Flux Density
Induced Winding Phase Voltage at Rated Speed
Winding Currents Under Load
Phase Voltage Under Load
You can also create additional plots with multiple curves.

11. For example, click RMxprt>Results>Create Report.
This displays the Create Report dialog box. Click OK to display the Traces window.
12. In the Traces window, select Input DC Current and Efficiency vs Speed, and click the Add
Trace button. Then select Output Torque.
13. These traces appear in the Traces field. Click Done to close the Traces window and display
the combined graph.
To continue to part Six of the example, go to Output Design Data.
RMxprt Example Part 6: Output Design Data

To export the model for Maxwell 2D Analysis:
1.
Click RMxprt>Set Export Options.

This opens the Export Options window.
Periodic
According to the geometric symmetry, the structure of electric machine

can be divided into several periods. The four pole electric machine in this
example has a whole slot number per pole per phase, therefore, it can be
divided into four periods. Choose the smaller period to shorten the runtime for 2D Maxwell analyses.
Difference
The angular displacement from the rotor to the stator in electric degrees.
Band Arc
The air-gap is divided uniformly along the circumference. Band Arc is

the central angle corresponding to each division. The effective range of its
value is between 1o to 5o, the default value is 3o. In 2D electromagnetic
field analysis to the torque with 2D Maxwell, the value of Band Arc is
sensitive. The lower the value, the finer the air-gap meshes, the more
accurate the torque calculation, but longer the computation time in order.
Teeth to Teeth
If you select this box, the central lines of the rotor teeth or the rotor
magnet poles coincide with the periodic dividing lines, otherwise, the
central lines of the rotor slots or the interpole lines of the rotor magnet
poles coincide with the periodic dividing line. Nevertheless, the central
lines of the stator teeth always coincide with the periodic dividing lines.
Design Sheet
This lets you specify an Excel Spreadsheet template for a customized

design sheet.
2.
Click RMxprt>Analysis Setup>Export>Maxwell 2D.

This displays the Export Maxwell 2D window.
3.
Specify a ProjectName.
4.
Click OK.
5.
The Progress window shows activity.
6.
To export a Simplorer model, click RMxprt>Analysis Setup>Export>Simplorer Model.

This displays the Export Simplorer window.
7.
Provide a project name and a location.
8.
Click OK.
2
Setting Up RMxprt Projects
An RMxprt project is a folder that includes one or more models, or designs. Each design ultimately
includes a geometric model, material assignments, and field solution and post-processing information.
A new project called Projectn is automatically created when the software is launched, where n is a
number. You can also open a new project by clicking File>New. In general, use the File menu commands to manage projects. If you move or change the names of files without using these commands, the software may not be able to find information necessary to solve the model.
Setting Up RMxprt Projects 2-1
Setting Up A Machine Model

To set up an RMxprt model, follow this general procedure:
1.
Insert an RMxprt design. (Click Project>Insert RMxprt Design., and specify the machine
type from the Select Machine Type window.)
2.
Use the Tools menu commands to specify general options (such as post-processing and autosave settings), solver options (such as the default process priority), and specific RMxprt
options. Also specify the Machine options (such as the units and the wire setting such as the
wire shape and gauge).
3.
Double-click the Machine items in the project tree, to specify the settings for the various parts
of the selected machine parameters.
4.
Under Definitions in the project tree, assign any Materials to the machine parts, setting values
such as:
Permanent magnet definition, including the coercivity, energy density, and relative recovery permeability.
BH-curve parameters.
5.
Use the Setup commands (either on the RMxprt menu or on the Analysis or Optimetrics submenus via the project tree) to specify variable, parametric, and optimization settings.
6.
Use the Validate command to validate the design.
7.
Use the Analyze commands to generate a solution, run a parametric analysis, or run an optimization.
8.
Use the Results post-processing commands to display the lamination and plot the solutions.
Related Topics:
Specifying RMxprt Winding Data
Quick Start for RMxprt
2-2 Setting Up RMxprt Projects
Changing the Machine Type

RMxprt allows you to change the machine type for an existing design. The original machine data
which applies to the new machine type is not retained. Instead, the initial default data for the new
machine type is used.
To change the machine type for an existing model:
1.
Right-click on the design tree machine item, or pull down the RMxprt main menu, and click on
Machine Type to open the Machine Type <project_name> - <design_name> dialog box.
2.
Choose the desired new machine type and click the OK button.
Note
The designs machine type label is changed to that of the new machine type. For example,
if the original design name and type was 3hp (Single Phase Induction Motor), and you
change the machine type to a Switched Reluctance Motor, the design name would be 3hp
(Switched Reluctance Motor).
The design tree items (such as the Machine Rotor, Stator, and Shaft data) under the design
type will be updated with the default machine data applicable to the new machine type.
You can Undo/Redo the machine type change if you wish to revert to the original
machine type and vice-versa.
The SetMachineType script command provides for this functionality in scripts.
Related Topics
RMxprt Machine Types
SetMachineType
Use:
Modifies an existing machine type.
Command:
RMxprt>Machine Type or right-click on a machine model in the Project

Manager and select Machine Type on the context menu.
Syntax:
SetMachineType <MachineType>
Return Value:
None
Parameters:
<MachineType>
Type: <string>
The desired machine type.
Possible values are: ASSM, BLDC, CPSM, DCM,
GRM, LSSM, PMDC, SPIM, SRM, TPIM, NSSM,
TPSM, UNIM.
representing respectively:
Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine, Brushless PermanentMagnet DC Motor, Claw-pole Synchronous Machine, DC
Machine, Generic Rotating Machine, Line-Start Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motor, Permanent-Magnet SynSetting Up RMxprt Projects 2-3
chronous Generator, Single-Phase Induction Motor,

Switched Reluctance Motor, Three-Phase Induction
Motor", Non-Salient Synchronous Machine, Three-Phase
Synchronous Machine, Universal Motor
Example:
SetMachineType ASSM
Design Settings in RMxprt

The Design Settings dialog allows you to specify how the simulator will deal with some aspects of
the design.
Set the Material Threshold for treating materials as conductors/insulators.

Set Export Options .
Specify User Defined Data.
Setting the Material Threshold in RMxprt

1.
Click RMxprt>Design Settings.

The Design Settings dialog box appears with the Set Material Threshold tab selected.
2.
Type a value in the Conductivity Threshold text box (Default=10,000).
3.
Type a value in the Permeability text box (Default=100).
Note
RMxprt will treat materials with conductivity greater than 10,000 as conductors, and
materials with Permeability greater than 100 as steels.
4.
If you want these values to be the default, change the values by clicking the
Tools>Options>RMxprt Options menu and setting the material thresholds in the RMxprt
Options dialog.
5.
Click OK.
Related Topics
Setting RMxprt Options
RMxprt Export Options

To set export options for the project:
1.

The Design Settings dialog box appears.
2.
On the Export Options tab, select or clear the following Field check boxes:
Periodic
According to the geometric symmetry, the structure of electric machine can be

divided into several periods. The four pole electric machine in this example
has a whole slot number per pole per phase, therefore, it can be divided into
four periods. Choose the smaller period to shorten the run-time for 2D
Maxwell analyses.
Difference
The angular displacement from the rotor to the stator in electric degrees.
Band Arc
The air-gap is divided uniformly along the circumference. Band Arc is the
central angle corresponding to each division. The effective range of its value is
between 1o to 5o, the default value is 3o. In 2D electromagnetic field analysis
to the torque with 2D Maxwell, The value of Band Arc is sensitive. Less the
value, finer the air-gap meshes, more accurate the torque calculation, but
longer the computation time in order.
Teeth to Teeth
When selected, the central lines of the rotor teeth or the rotor magnet poles
coincide with the periodic dividing lines, otherwise, the central lines of the
rotor slots or the interpole lines of the rotor magnet poles coincide with the
periodic dividing line. Nevertheless, the central lines of the stator teeth always
coincide with the periodic dividing lines.
Segmented Arc
Note
3.
4.
For the selected field, enter values in any enabled text boxes.
For the Design Sheet, type a file name in the Excel Template text box.
5.
These options may also be set on the Export Options tab of the RMxprt Options dialog
box. Using the Tools>Options>RMxprt Options command changes the default for the
current design and all future designs.
You can also click the ... button to find and select a file.
Click OK.
Related Topics
Generating a Custom Design Sheet for RMxprt
Setting User Defined Data File for a Design

RMxprt allows a user to define some design data in a text file which can be created by a text editor,
instead of by RMxprt UI, for the following special circumstances:
Some special requests from a user which are not necessary to be added to RMxprt UI;
Some common requests from users which have been implemented in RMxprt solver, but have
not been added in RMxprt UI.
When a user's requests have been implemented in an RMxprt solver but have not been added in
RMxprt UI, the updated solver and the required file format for user defined data will be sent to the
user. To use the feature of user defined data, the user must first edit the data file using a text editor
according to the format provided. Then, select RMxprt>Design Settings to display the Design Settings dialog.
1.
Select the User Defined Data tab.
2.
Click the Enable checkbox to enable the use of User Defined Data.
3.
User Defined Data may be entered directly into the text box. Click in the box and enter the data
entries desired.
4.
Alternatively, click Import File to import user defined data from an external file.
5.
Browse to the directory containing the file.
6.
Select the user defined data file which will be displayed in File name box.
7.
Click Open to confirm the selection.
8.
The file contents will be imported into the text box. Click OK to complete the setup.
User Defined Data is save in the design file. Changes to User Defined Data will cause existing
solutions to become invalid.
Validating RMxprt Projects

Before you run an analysis on a model, it is very important that you first perform a validation check
on the project. When you perform a validation check on a project, RMxprt runs a check on all setup
details of the active project to verify that the necessary steps have been completed and their parameters are reasonable.
To perform a validation check on the active project:
1.
Click RMxprt>Validation Check.

RMxprt checks the project setup, and then the Validation Check window appears.
2.
View the results of the validation check in the Validation Check window.
The following icons can appear next to an item:
Indicates the step is complete.
Indicates the step is incomplete.
Indicates the step may require your attention.
3.
View any messages in the Message Manager window.
4.
If the validation check indicates that a step in your project is incomplete or incorrect, carefully
review the setup details for that particular step and revise them as necessary.
5.
Click RMxprt>Validation Check to run a validation check after you have revised any setup
details for an incomplete or incorrect project step.
6.
Click Close.
Setting General Options in RMxprt

Default settings for many of the options in RMxprt may be set through the Tools>Options menu.
To set general options for RMxprt:
1.

The General Options window appears, displaying six available tabs:
Project Options
Miscellaneous Options
Default Units
Analysis Options
WebUpdate Options
2.
Click each tab, and make the desired selections.
3.
Click OK.
Related Topics:

To specify default settings for RMxprt options:
1.
Click Tools>Options>RMxprt Options.

The RMxprt Options window appears, displaying two available tabs:
General Options
Solver
2.
Click each tab, and make the desired selections.
3.
Click OK.
RMxprt Options: General Options Tab

These options are set on the General Options tab of the RMxprt Options dialog box.
1.
To change the default machine type when you initially insert a project, select one of the following from the Default machine type pull-down list:
2.
Single Phase Induction Motor

Three Phase Synchronous Machine
Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motor
Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine
Permanent-Magnet DC Motor
Switched Reluctance Motor
Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor
Universal Motor
DC Machine
Claw-Pole Synchronous Machine
Three Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machine
Generic Rotating Machines
In the Threshold Options section, enter the Default conductivity and Default permeability
values in siemens/m.
Note
3.
Three Phase Induction Motor
Setting the material thresholds under Tools>Options impacts the default setting for the
current and all future projects/designs. To change the material threshold for the current
design only, use the RMxprt>Design Settings command and change the material
thresholds on the Set Material Thresholds tab.
Select or clear the following check boxes:
Note
4.
Save before solving

When you enable the Save before solving setting, the project is only saved if it has been
modified since its last save.
Apply variation deletions immediately
Click OK to close the dialog box.
Related Topics:
Setting the Material Threshold
RMxprt Options: Solver Tab

These options are set on the Solver tab of the RMxprt Options dialog box.
1.
To set the solver options for RMxprt, select one of the following from the Default Process
Priority pull-down list:
2.
Critical (highest) Priority (Not recommended)

Above Normal Priority (Not recommended)
Normal Priority
Below Normal Priority
Idle (lowest) Priority
Setting Machine Options

In RMxprt, you can set the following project options:
Material threshold
Model units
Wire setting
Some of these and other options are available via the Tools>Options>Machine Options command.
Specifying the Material Threshold

The material threshold classifies the material type. For example, if the Conductivity threshold is set
to be 106, then for any material with conductivity greater than or equal to 106 is treated as a conductor. Otherwise, the material is treated as a non-conductor.
To set the material threshold for the model:
1.

The Set Material Threshold dialog box appears.
2.
On the Material Threshold tab, type a value in the Conductivity Threshold box.
3.
Type a value in the Permeability box.
4.
Click OK.
Setting Model Units

1.
Click Machine>Units.
The Set Model Units dialog box appears.
2.
Select the desired units from the pull-down list.
3.
Select or clear the Rescale to new units check box.
4.
Click OK.
Specifying the Machine Option for Wire Setting

Before you input data for your electric machine design project, please select the data file for wire
gauge. RMxprt has numerous wire gauge specifications according to the various national Standards for bare copper wire gauges (including both round and rectangular wires). Nevertheless, there
exist no national standards for thickness for insulation, therefore different manufacturers produce
electromagnetic wire with different thickness of insulation.The data file American.wir does not
provide the data for thickness of insulation; the data file Chinese.wir does provide the data for
thickness of insulation, but only for the purpose of reference to users. All wire files are stored in the
file folder syslib.
To specify the wire setting:
1.

The Machine Editor Options dialog box appears.
2.
Select a one of the System Libraries such as American or Chinese from the Wire Setting
pull-down list.
3.
Click OK.
The corresponding data for wire gauge appear automatically in the pop-up window for
Machine>Wire.
Related Topic
Editing Wire Data
Editing Wire Data

Users must create their own data files for wire gauges according to the data for wire gauge and
thickness of insulation provided by manufacturers. There are no national standards for thickness for
insulation, therefore different manufacturers produce electromagnetic wire with different thickness
of insulation.The data file American.wir does not provide the data for thickness of insulation; the
data file Chinese.wir does provide the data for thickness of insulation, but only for the purpose of
reference to users. These files are stored in the file folder syslib.
To define or edit wire data:
1.
Click Machine>Wire
The Edit Wire Data dialog box appears.
2.
Select the units from the Unit System pull-down list.

English Unit System stands for British unit system, Metric Unit System stands for the metric
unit system. When changing the unit system, the message box Note pops up to inform changing in unit system is only for specifying input data unit, but not for transferring data between
two unit systems
3.
Click the Round or Rectangle tab for the wire shape you want to edit.
For Round:
Specify the desired values for Gauge No., Diameter, and/or Wrap.
Gauge No.
wire gauge index number.
Diameter
diameter of bare copper wire, in mm or inch.
Wrap
thickness of insulation wrap, in mm or inch.
For Rectangle:
a.
Specify the desired values to limit ratios of the two sides.
Wire Shape Limit (B/A) max the maximum ratio between the wide and the narrow sides.
Wire Shape Limit (B/A) min
b.
the minimum ratio between the wide and the narrow sides.
Use the radio buttons specify whether to consider priority factors.

All Size for No Consideration of Priority Factors
Select the radio button All Size on the right to Type of Wire-Data Table and then click
the command button Calculate in the window Wire Data, all the sectional areas of wire
gauge with the ratio B/A between the wide and the narrow sides satisfying the condition
(B/A) max > B / A > (B/A) min appear in the table Rectangular Wire Data.
Skip One for Consideration of Priority Factors
Select the radio button Skip One on the right to Type of Wire-Data Table and then click
the command button Calculate in the window Wire Data, all the sectional areas of wire
gauge with the ratio B/A between the wide and the narrow sides satisfying the condition
(B/A) max > B / A > (B/A) min appear in three different modes in the table Rectangular
Wire Data.
At the cross of the odd columns and the odd rows, the sectional areas appear in black
numbers (recommended to use).
At the cross of the odd columns and the even rows or the even columns and the odd
rows, the sectional areas appear in blue numbers (rarely used).
At the cross of the even columns and the even rows, the sectional areas do not show
(generally not used).
This is convenient for users to use recommended wire gauge according to R20 Priority
Number Series.
4.
Optionally, to add new rows or columns for the wire, click Add Row or Add Column.
5.
Optionally, click Import to import wire data from a file.
6.
Optionally, click Export to export the data you entered to a file.
7.
When you are finished, click Save to save the data, and click Close to close the window.
Related Topic
Specifying the Machine Option for Wire Setting
Edit AC Windings
RMxprt can automatically arrange almost all commonly used single- or double-layer poly-phase ac
windings provided all coils have the same number of turns. Users do not need to define coils one by
one. For a double-layer winding, RMxprt can also handle the coils with half turns which are
arranged in the order of even, odd, even, odd, , as long as it is physically possible.
RMxprt also provides a very flexible tool, the Winding Editor, to allow users to design a variety of
special winding types according to their own needs, such as compound single- and double-layer
winding, big- and small-phase-spread variable-pole multiple-speed winding, sine-wave three-phase
winding, and so forth. The Winding Editor is available to the following types of electric machines:
1.Three-phase induction motors
2.Single-phase induction motors
3.Three-phase synchronous motors and generators
4.Line-start permanent-magnet synchronous motors
5.Claw-pole alternators
6.Adjustable-speed permanent-magnet synchronous motors and generators
7.Brushless permanent-magnet DC motors
When you edit the AC winding of a new design for the first time, RMxprt creates a default winding
arrangement based on the basic winding specifications: Number of Phases, Number of Poles,
Number of Slots, Winding Layers, Conductors per Slot, and Coil Pitch. Then you can edit the
winding configuration based on the default arrangement.
Enable Winding Editor

Setting the Winding Type property to Editor enables the command Machine>Edit Layout on the
menu bar.
To display the dialog box Winding Editor:
1.
Select Winding in the Project Tree. In the Properties window, set the Winding Type Value to
Editor. To do this, click on the button Winding Type Value to display the WINDING Type
selection window, as shown:
2.
Select Editor as the Winding Type and click OK.

This closes the WINDING Type selection window and sets the Winding Type Value to Editor.
It also enables the command Machine>Winding>Edit Layout on the menu bar. Now the
Machine Editor window displays the default winding arrangement, as shown:
3.
Click Machine>Winding>Edit Layout.

This displays the Winding Editor dialog as shown. The Winding Editor dialog box includes
functions that do not appear in the Winding Editor tab sheet in the RMxprt Machine Editor
window.
In addition, right-clicking in the data table section of the Winding Editor tab in the Machine
Editor displays a shortcut menu where you may also select Edit Layout.
Edit Winding Configuration

Each row of the winding data table in the Winding Editor dialog box is identified with the coil
index in the column Coil. This information is displayed in the tab sheet Winding Editor in the
RMxprt Machine Editor window as well, but it is editable in the dialog box Winding Editor.
The winding data table contains four columns:

Phase
is for the phase to which the coil belongs.
Turns
is for the number of turns of the coil.
In Slots
is for the slot number with the coil side current flowing in ('flow-in-side'
for short). If 2 Layers are specified in the Winding Properties window,
the slot number ends with a "T" to show the top layer.
Out Slots
is for the slot number with the coil side current flowing out ("flow-outside" for short). If 2 Layers are specified in the Winding Properties
window, the slot number ends with a "B" to show the bottom layer.
By changing the properties in the columns of the table, it is possible to arrange the distribution
of coils of single and double layer winding of any type required.
The Periodic Multiplier pull-down list box displays the numbers of unit machines for selection. Selecting 1 means the whole slots are considered as one unit machine, and all the coils are
listed in the table of the editing window. Selecting 2 lists half of the total coils in the table, and
the whole slots are divided into two unit machines, etc.
The Winding Editor also includes two check boxes:
Constant Turns
Checking the check box (multiple choices) Constant Turns indicates that
the number of turns keeps constant and the column Turns in the table is
grayed (disabled). If the check box Constant Turns is unchecked, the
column Turns in the table is brightened allowing for editing and
modifying the number of turns.
Constant Pitch
Checking this box grays the column Out Slots to the values cannot be
edited. It means that the coil pitch is constant. For the two-layer windings,
all the flow-in-side slots are defined as top layer, and all the flow-out-side
slots as bottom layer. The flow-out-side slot number is automatically
computed based on the input in the edit box Coil Pitch in the tab sheet
Winding in the project tree in the RMxprt Machine Editor window, and
the column Out Slot is disabled. When the check box Constant Pitch is
unchecked, the column Out Slot is enabled to allow arbitrarily changing
the slot pitch for each coil.
The Winding Editor dialog box includes three command buttons.

Default
all the data in the table resumes to the situation of data from the automatic
arrangement by RMxprt.
Reset
all the data in the table resumes to the situation of data when the dialog
box Winding Editor was first opened, or resumes to the data that you have
saved.
OK
to accept the current values and close the dialog box Winding Editor.
View Winding Connections

When you have specified the winding data, you can execute the following commands to display or
hide the winding connections.
1.
Click the menu command Machine>Winding>Connect All Coils.

Upon executing, the graphical display in the Machine Editor window shows the connections
as shown:
2.
To remove the connections in the graphical display in the Machine Editor window, select
Machine>Winding>Disconnect All Coils.
3.
Winding connections may also be viewed by shortcut menu. Right-click on the winding layout section of the Machine Editor window, a shortcut menu pops up. Select Connect All Coils
or Disconnect All Coils to toggle the coils display on or off.
If you right-click on a slot layer, commands related to that slot layer will be enabled, and you
will be able to view or hide only one coil or one phase connection related to the slot layer. You
may copy the connection drawing to clipboard from the shortcut menu as well.
Working with the Slot Editor

RMxprt provides a flexible tool, the Slot Editor, to enable users to edit user-defined slots easily.
Standard slot types in a project can be converted to equivalent user-defined versions that can be
edited in the RMxprt Slot Editor tool as follows:
1.
In the Project tree, select the Rotor or Stator whose slot is to be converted.
2.
In the Rotor or Stator Properties Window, click the Slot Type Value button to open the Select
Slot Type dialog box.
3.
Check User Defined Slot, and click OK.

The slot label in the Project tree changes to one of the following:
UserDefSymmetricSlot (user-defined symmetric slot), UserDefUnsymmetricSlot (userdefined unsymmetric slot), or UserDefHalfSlot (user-defined half slot), depending on the
standard Slot Type on which it is based.
Type 1 Slot
Type 2 Slot
Type 5 Slot
Type 3 Slot
Type 6 Slot
Type 4 Slot
Standard Slot Types 1, 2, 3, 4, and 6 are symmetric. Standard slot Type 5 is unsymmetric. Half
slots are present if the machines Rotor or Stator Properties Window includes a Half Slot property that has been enabled.
Related Topics
The Slot Editor Window
Slot Editor Data Editing View
Slot Editor Graphical View
The New Slot Dialog Box
Editing Slot Segments
Editing Unsymmetric Slots
Editing Half Slots
The Edit Slot Segments Dialog Box

When you select a user-editable slot in the Project tree, the Slot Editor window appears on the desktop. The slot editor window is split into two frames. The left frame is the data editing view, which
contains an expandable tree view of the slot and its constituent segments. The right frame shows a
graphical view of the slot geometry formed by its segments.
Slot geometry types that can be edited are: symmetric, unsymmetric, and half-slot. A symmetric slot
is shown in the figure below.
Data Editing View
Graphical View
Related Topics
Editing Half Slots

In the tree view, the Slot root tree item is pre-defined and cannot be modified. The top segment in
the tree, Segment1, cannot be deleted. In the slot data edit view, the slot segment tree items always
follow in order from top to bottom of the slot. Segment names also follow this top-to-bottom order,
Segment1, Segment2, Segment3, etc., regardless of any operations that are made. Adjacent segments viewed in the tree are geometrically connected to each other as viewed on the slot graph. The
data of neighboring segments are tightly coupled due to this geometry connection.
Selecting a segment in the tree highlights the corresponding segment (and its mirror image for symmetric slots) in the Slot Editor Graphic view indicated by small open circles at the endpoints of
the segments.
The Properties Window is also updated to show the selected segments properties. Changing segment values in the slot editor updates the Properties Window, and vice-versa.
Related Topics
Editing Half Slots
Editing Symmetric Slots

For a symmetric slot, right-clicking the Slot tree item pops up a context menu displaying the
following choices:
New Slot - opens the New Slot dialog box in which the user can select a new standard slot.
Split to Half-Half - splits the slot into a Left Side and a Right Side transforming it into
an unsymmetric slot. Each side then can be edited independently.
Remove Left (or Right) Half, Remove Right Half - removes the segments for the left (or
right) half of the symmetric slot, transforming the slot into a half-slot.
Related Topics
Editing Half Slots

For an unsymmetric (i.e., split) slot type, two additional expandable sub-branches, Left Side
and Right Side, are present in the slot tree. The segments in each side can be edited independently.
Right-clicking the Slot tree item pops up a context menu with the following choices:
Merge Left (or Right) to Symmetric - the left (or right) side segments are mirrored and
merged to form a symmetric slot.
Left Right Flip - the left side and right side segments are flipped (reflected and interchanged). The slot remains unsymmetric.
Remove Left Half, Remove Right Half - removes the segments for the left (or right) half
of the symmetric slot, transforming the slot into a half-slot.
Right-clicking either the Right Side or Left Side sub-branch tree item opens a context menu
on which you can choose either: Merge to Symmetric, which mirrors the selected sides segments and merges the segments into a symmetric slot; or Remove, which removes the selected
side and all of its segments, resulting in a right or left half-slot.
Related Topics
Editing Half Slots
Editing Half Slots

For a half slot, only the segments on one side of the slot can be edited.
Right-clicking the Slot tree item pops up a context menu displaying the following choices:
Merge to Symmetric - the left (or right) half-slot segments are mirrored and merged to
form a symmetric slot.
Left Right Flip - the left (or right) half-slot segments are flipped (reflected). The slot
remains unsymmetric.
Mirror - the left (or right) half-slot segments are mirrored (reflected and copied), transforming the slot into an unsymmetric slot.
Related Topics

Selecting New Slot in any of the Slot tree item context menus opens the New Slot dialog box.
Radio buttons allow the user to select a Symmetric Slot, Unsymmetrical Slot, Left Half Slot, or
Right Half Slot as the type to be added. Clicking OK confirms the choice and replaces the existing
slot type in the editor with a slot of the selected type. The new slot has only Segment1 present. The
user must then edit the slot segments to form the desired slot geometry.

The slot editor graphic view allows users either to View One Slot of the type currently being
edited, or to View the Geometry of the machine stator or rotor with all of the slots in place.
View One Slot
View Geometry
Right-clicking anywhere in the graphic view pops up a context menu. In addition to changing the
view, the menu provides commands to Zoom In and Zoom Out, to Fit All the view in the frame, as
well as commands to Insert, Append, Modify, and Remove slot segments. These commands are
discussed more fully in the section on Editing Slot Segments.
Related Topics
Editing Half Slots

The RMxprt Slot Editor allows users to edit the segments that form the geometry of slots. In the
slot data edit view, selecting a slot segment item on the tree, then right-clicking on it displays a context menu with commands that allow users to Insert, Append, Modify, and Remove segments.
Alternatively, users can select a slot segment directly in the graphic view, then right-click to bring
up a context menu containing the same segment editing commands.
When a slot segment is selected, users can also modify the segment data directly in the desktop
property window. Each edit triggers immediate validation. If edited values are improper, warning
message windows are displayed describing the problem. Editing operations support Undo/Redo.
Scripting functions are also available.
Insert Segment -adds a segment before the currently selected segment. The added segment is defined by the user in the Edit Slot Segment dialog box.
NOTE: You cannot insert a segment before Segment1.
Append Segment - adds a segment after (i.e., below) the currently selected segment. The
appended segment is defined by the user in the Edit Slot Segment dialog box.
Modify Segment - modifies the currently selected segment. The segment is modified by
the user in the Edit Slot Segment dialog box.
Remove Segment - removes the currently selected segment. The ends of the segments on
either side of the removed segment are joined when the segment is removed.
NOTE: Segment1 cannot be removed.
The Edit Slot Segment Dialog Box

In the Edit Slot Segment dialog, user can define the shape and dimension(s) of the segment to be
added, inserted, or appended relative to the currently selected segment in the slot data edit view. As
shown below, eight basic geometric shapes are provided for defining the slot segment. The
Selected Shape panel shows dimensional parameters that affect the segment shape such as: height,
starting and ending width, and radius. Parameters that determine the shape of the segment can be
edited in the Segment Data panel.
Start width - sets the starting width and unit of measure. The
value shown depends on the ending width of the previous segment
and thus is not editable.
End width - sets the ending width and unit of measure.
A drop-down box provides three additional options for controling the

segment shape:
Line edge (the default) - makes the segment a straight line.

Arc offset on slot center - makes the segment an arc whose
radius is determined by a user-specified offset from the rotor/
stator center with respect to the slot center.
Arc offset on tooth center - makes the segment an arc whose
radius is determined by a user-specified offset from the rotor/
stator center with respect to the tooth center.
Slot Center
Tooth Center
Offset
Offset
Height -sets the height and unit of measure for the segment.
A drop-down box provides three options for controling the segment

shape:
End width (the default)- sets the ending width and unit of
measure.
Parallel slot - effectively sets
the segment end width to the
same value as the start width
resulting in the slot sides being
parallel to each other.
Parallel tooth - sets the segment

end width to a value such that the
slot side is parallel to the
adjacent slot side of the tooth
formed between them.
End width - sets the ending width and unit of measure.
Radius - sets the radius and unit of measure for the segment.
Validation of the entered data is done when either the OK or Preview is clicked. If edited values
are improper, warning message windows are displayed describing the problem. The Preview button allows users to preview the current changes in the slot graph window without confirming the
changes.
Clicking the OK button confirms the changes and closes the dialog box.
Clicking the Cancel button cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.
Related Topics
Editing Half Slots
Working with Variables in RMxprt

A variable is a numerical value, mathematical expression, or mathematical function that can be
assigned to a design parameter in RMxprt. Variables are useful in the following situations:
When you expect to change a parameter often.

When you expect to use the same parameter value often.
When you intend to run a parametric analysis in which you specify a series of variable values
within a range to solve.
When you intend to optimize a parameter value by running an optimization analysis.
There are two types of variables in RMxprt:

Project Variables A project variable can be assigned to any parameter value in the project in
which it was created. RMxprt differentiates project variables from other types
of variables by prefixing the variable name with the $ symbol. You can
manually include the $ symbol in the project variable's name, or RMxprt can
automatically append the $ after you define the variable.
Design Variables A design variable can be assigned to any parameter value in the RMxprt
design in which it was created.
Related Topics
Setting up an Optimetrics Analysis
Adding a Project Variable in RMxprt

A project variable can be assigned to a parameter value in the RMxprt project in which it was created. RMxprt differentiates project variables from other types of variables by prefixing the variable
name with the following symbol: $. You can manually include the symbol $ in the project variable's name when you create it, or RMxprt will automatically append the project variable's name
with the symbol after you define the variable. Project variables can be used in any design within the
project.
1.
Click Project>Project Variables.
Alternatively, right-click the project name in the project tree, and then click Project Variables on the shortcut menu.
The Properties dialog box appears.

2.
Under the Project Variables tab, click Add.

The Add Property dialog box appears.
3.
In the Name box, type the name of the variable.

Project variable names must start with the symbol $ followed by a letter. Variable names may
include alphanumeric characters and underscores ( _ ). The names of intrinsic functions and
the pre-defined constant pi () cannot be used as variable names.
You can sort the project variables by clicking on the Name column header. By default, variSetting up RMxprt Projects 2-35
ables are sorted in original order. Clicking once sorts them in ascending order, noted by a triangle pointing up. Clicking against sorts in descending order, noted by a triangle pointing down.
Clicking a third time sorts in original order, with no triangle.
4.
Select a radio button for the variable use:

Selected Use
Setable Properties
Variable
Unit Type, Units, Value.
Separator
Value
Array Index Variable
Associate Array variable, Value
Each selection affects the settable options.

5.
For Project Variables in the Unit Type text box you can use the drop down menu to select
from the list of available unit types. None is the default.
When you select a Unit Type, the choices in drop down menu for the Units text box adapt to
that unit type. For example, selecting Length as the Unit Type causes the Unit menu to show a
range of metric and english units for length. Similarly, if you select the Unit Type as Resistance, the Units drop down lists a range of standard Ohm units.
6.
In the Value box, type the quantity that the variable represents. Optionally, include the units of
measurement.
Warning
If you include the variable's units in its definition (in the Value box), do not include
the variable's units when you enter the variable name for a parameter value.
The quantity can be a numerical value, a mathematical expression, or a mathematical function.

The quantity entered will be the current, or default, value for the variable.
7.
Click OK.
You return to the Properties dialog box. The new variable and its value are listed in the table.
If the value is an expression, the evaluated value is shown. Updating the expression also
changes the evaluated value display. The evaluated values of any dependent variables also are
changed.
8.
Optionally, type a description of the variable in the Description box.
9.
Optionally, select Read-Only. The variable's name, value, unit, and description cannot be
modified when Read-only is selected.
10. Optionally, select Hidden. If you clear the Show Hidden option, the hidden variable will not
appear in the Properties dialog box.
11. You can also designate a variable as Sweep. You may need to use the scroll bar or resize the
2-36 Setting up RMxprt Projects
dialog to view the check boxes.
The Sweep checkbox lets you designate variables to include in solution indexing as a way to
permit faster post processing. Variables with Sweep unchecked are not used in solution indexing. If a solution exists, checking or unchecking a variables Sweep setting produces a warning
that the change will invalidate existing solutions. To continue, click OK to dismiss the warning
dialog.
If a variable has dependent variables, the Sweep checkbox is disabled and cannot be changed.
12. Click OK.

The new variable can now be assigned to a parameter value in the project in which it was created.
Adding a Design Variable in RMxprt

A design variable is associated with an RMxprt design. A design variable can be assigned to a
parameter value in the RMxprt design in which it was created.
1.
Click RMxprt>Design Properties.
Alternatively, right-click the design name in the project tree, and then click Design Properties on the shortcut menu.
The Properties dialog box appears opened on the Local Variables tab. From the Properties
dialog you can Add, Add Array, Edit, or Remove variables.
Any existing Design variables are listed in the Properties dialog with the name followed by
cells for Value, Unit, Evaluated Value, Type, Description, and Read-only and Hidden check
boxes. A Show Hidden checkbox on the lower right of the Properties dialog controls the
appearance of any Hidden variables .
Initially, leave the radio button with Value selected until you have defined a variable. The
other radio buttons let you enable defined variables for Optimization, Tuning, Sensitivity or
Statistics. Selecting one of these radio buttons adds a new column to the Variable definition
Setting up RMxprt Projects 2-37
row for which you can check or uncheck Include for regular variables for that kind of Optimetrics simulation.
2.
Click Add.
The Add Property dialog box appears.
3.
In the Name box, type the name of the variable.

Variable names must start with a letter, and may include alphanumeric characters and underscores ( _ ). The names of intrinsic functions and the pre-defined constant pi () cannot be
used as variable names.
You can sort the variables by clicking on the Name column header. By default, variables are
sorted in original order. Clicking once sorts them in ascending order, noted by a triangle pointing up. Clicking against sorts in descending order, noted by a triangle pointing down. Clicking
a third time sorts in original order, with no triangle.
4.
Select a radio button for the variable use:

Selected Use
Setable Properties
Variable
Unit Type, Units, Value
Array Index Variable
Associate Array variable, Value
Separator
Value
Post Processing Variable
Unit Type, Units, Value
Each selection affects the settable options.

5.
In the Unit Type text box you can use the drop down menu to select from the list of available
unit types. None is the default.
When you select a Unit Type, the choices in drop down menu for the Units text box adapt to
that unit type. For example, selecting Length as the Unit Type causes the Unit menu to show a
range of metric and english units for length. Similarly, if you select the Unit Type as Resistance, the Units drop down lists a range of standard Ohm units.
6.
In the Value box, type the quantity that the variable represents. Optionally, include the units of
measurement.
Note
If you include the variable's units in its definition (in the Value box), do not include the
variable's units when you enter the variable name for a parameter value.
The quantity can be a numerical value, a mathematical expression, or a mathematical function.

The quantity entered will be the current (or default value) for the variable. If the mathematical
expression includes a reference to an existing variable, this variable is treated as a dependent
variable. The units for a dependent variable will automatically change to those of the independent variable on which the value depends. Additionally, dependent variables, though useful in
many situations, cannot be the direct subject of optimization, sensitivity analysis, tuning, or
statistical analysis.
Note
7.
Complex numbers are not allowed for variables to be used in an Optimetrics sweep, or
for optimization, statistical, sensitivity or tuning setups.
Click OK.
You return to the Properties dialog box. The new variable and its value are listed in the table.
If the value is an expression, the evaluated value is shown. Updating the expression also
changes the evaluated value display. The evaluated values of any dependent variables also are
changed.
8.
Optionally, type a description of the variable in the Description box.
9.
You can designate a variable as Read-only, Hidden, or Sweep. You may need to use the scroll
bar or resize the dialog to view the check boxes.
The Sweep checkbox lets you designate variables to include in solution indexing as a way to
permit faster post processing. Variables with Sweep unchecked are not used in solution indexing. If a solution exists, checking or unchecking a variables Sweep setting produces a warning
that the change will invalidate existing solutions. To continue, click OK to dismiss the warning
dialog.
If a variable has dependent variables, the Sweep checkbox is disabled and cannot be changed.
10. Click OK.

The new variable can now be assigned to a parameter value in the design in which it was created.
Add Array of Values for an RMxprt Design Variable

A design variable is associated with an RMxprt design. You can also add a variable defined with an
array of values.
1.
Click RMxprt>Design Properties.
Alternatively, right-click the design name in the project tree, and then click Design Properties on the shortcut menu.
The Local Variables Properties dialog box appears. From the Properties dialog you can Add,
Add Array, Edit... or Remove variables.
Any existing Design variables are listed in the Properties dialog with the name followed by
cells for Value, Unit, Evaluated Value, Type, Description, and Read-only and Hidden check
boxes. A Show Hidden checkbox on the lower right of the Properties dialog controls the
appearance of any Hidden variables.
Initially, leave the radio button with Value selected until you have defined a variable. The
other radio buttons let you enable regular variables for Optimization, Tuning, Sensitivity or
Statistics. Array variables cannot be enabled for Optimetrics use.
2.
Click the Add Array.... button.

The Add Array dialog displays.
3.
Specify a variable Name in the text field.
4.
Select a Unit Type and Units from the drop down menus.
5.
To specify the array with Edit in Grid Selected, you can begin by clicking the Append Rows...
button to display the Number of Rows dialog. (For Edit in plain text field, see below.)
6.
Specify a value and click OK.

This displays a list of indexed data rows in the Add Array dialog. You can type any data value
in the cells. If you enter alphanumeric text in a cell it must be delimited by double quotes. You
can edit the rows relative a row selection by clicking buttons to Add Row Above, Add Row
Below, or Remove Row. All cells must contain a value.
7.
When you have completed the array, click OK to close the dialog,
The Array variable is listed in the Design Properties dialog as a Local Variable. The array
variable value field includes the array contents in brackets with the unindexed data values
delimited by commas.
If you elected to edit the array Edit in plain text field in the Add Array dialog, the bracketed
and comma delimited format is used.
Defining Mathematical Functions in RMxprt

A mathematical function is an expression that references another defined variable. A function's definition can include both expressions and variables.
The following mathematical functions may be used to define expressions:
Basic
functions
/, +, -, *, mod (modulus), ** (exponentiation), - (Unary minus), ==

(equals), ! (not), != (not equals), > (greater than), < (less than), >= (greater
than equals), <= (less than equals), && (logical and), || (logical or)
Intrinsic
functions
if, sqn, abs, exp, pow, ln (natural log), sqrt
Trigonometric
expressions
sin, cos, tan, asin, acos, atan, sinh, cosh, tanh
The predefined variables X, Y, Z, Phi, Theta, R, and Rho must be entered as such. X, Y, and Z are
the rectangular coordinates. Phi, Theta, and Rho are the spherical coordinates. R is the cylindrical
radius, and Rho is the spherical radius.
If you do not specify units, all trigonometric expressions expect their arguments to be in radians,
and the inverse trigonometric functions return values are in radians. If you want to use degrees,
you must supply the unit name deg. When the argument to a trigonometric expression is a variable,
the units are assumed to be radians. These function names are reserved and may not be used as
vari-able names.
Defining an Expression in RMxprt

Expressions are mathematical descriptions that typically contain intrinsic functions, such as sin(x),
and arithmetic operators, such as +, -, *, and /, as well as defined variables. For example, you could
define: x_size = 1mm, y_size = x_size + sin(x_size).
The symbol, pi ( ), is the only available pre-defined constant. It may not be reassigned a new
value.
Numerical values may be entered in Ansoft's shorthand for scientific notation. For example, 5x107
could be entered as 5e7.
Using Valid Operators for Expressions in RMxprt

The operators that can be used to define an expression or function have a sequence in which they
are performed. The following list shows both the valid operators and the sequence in which they are
accepted (listed in decreasing precedence):
()
parenthesis
not
^ (or **) exponentiation
(If you use "**" for

exponentiation, as in previous
software versions, it is
automatically changed to "^".)
-
unary minus
multiplication
division
addition
subtraction
==
equals
!=
not equals
>
greater than
<
less than
>=
greater than or equal to
<=
less than or equal to
&&
logic and
||
logic or
Using Intrinsic Functions in Expressions in RMxprt

RMxprt recognizes a set of intrinsic trigonometric and mathematical functions that can be used to
define expressions. Intrinsic function names are reserved and may not be used as variable names.
The following intrinsic functions may be used to define expressions:

Function
Description
Syntax
abs
Absolute value (|x|)
abs(x)
sin
Sine
sin(x)
cos
Cosine
cos(x)
tan
Tangent
tan(x)
asin
Arcsine
asin(x)
acos
Arccosine
acos(x)
atan
Arctangent (in range atan(x)

of -/4 to /4 degrees)
atan2
Arctangent (in range atan2(y,x)

of -/2 to /2 degrees)
asinh
Hyperbolic Arcsine
atanh
Hyperbolic Arctangent atanh(x)
sinh
Hyperbolic Sine
sinh(x)
cosh
Hyperbolic Cosine
cosh(x)
tanh
Hyperbolic Tangent
tanh(x)
even
Returns 1 if integer
part of the number is
even; returns 0
otherwise.
even(x)
odd
Returns 1 if integer
part of the number is
odd; returns 0
otherwise.
odd(x)
sgn
Sign extraction
sgn(x)
exp
Exponential (e )
asinh(x)
exp(x)
y
pow
Raise to power (x )
pow(x,y)
if
If
if(cond_exp,true_exp, false_exp)
pwl
Piecewise Linear with pwl(dataset_exp, variable)

linear extrapolation on
x
pwlx
Piecewise Linear x
with linear
extrapolation on x
pwlx(dataset_exp, variable)
pwl_periodic Piecewise Linear with pwl_periodic(dataset_exp, variable)

periodic extrapolation
on x
sqrt
Square Root
sqrt(x)
ln
Natural Logarithm
ln(x)
(The "log" function has

been discontinued. If
you use "log(x)" in an
expression, the
software automatically
changes it to "ln(x)".)
log10
Logarithm base 10
log10(x)
int
Truncated integer
function
int(x)
nint
Nearest integer
nint(x)
max
Maximum value of two max(x,y)

parameters
min
Minimum value of two min(x,y)

parameters
mod
Modulus
mod(x,y)
rem
Fractional part
(remainder)
rem(x.y)
Note
If you do not specify units, all trigonometric functions interpret their arguments as
radians. Likewise, inverse trigonometric functions' return values are in given in radians.
When the argument to a trigonometric expression is a variable, the units are assumed to
be radians. If you want values interpreted in degrees, supply the argument with the unit
name deg.
Using Piecewise Linear Functions in Expressions in RMxprt

The following piecewise linear intrinsic functions are accepted in expressions:
pwl (dataset_expression, variable)
pwlx (dataset_expression, variable)
pwl_periodic (dataset_expression, variable)
The pwl and pwlx functions interpolate along the x-axis and returns a corresponding y value. The
pwl_periodic function also interpolates along the x-axis but periodically.
Using Dataset Expressions in RMxprt

Dataset expressions take the following form:
dset((x0,y0), ..., (xn,yn))
These expressions may be used as the first parameter to piecewise linear (pwl, pwlx and
pwl_periodic) functions, and may also be assigned to variables, in which case the variable may be
used as the second parameter to pwl, pwlx and pwl_periodic functions.
Dataset expressions are derived from a series of points in a plot created in the Datasets dialog box.
Each plot consists of straight line segments whose vertices represent their end points. A curve is fitted to the segments of the plot, and an expression is derived from the curve that best fits the segmented plot. The created expression is then used in the piecewise linear intrinsic functions.
Assigning Variables in RMxprt

To assign a variable to a parameter in RMxprt:
Type the variable name or mathematical expression in place of a parameter value in a Value
box.
If you typed a variable name that has not been defined, the Add Variable dialog box appears,
enabling you to define the design variable.
If you typed a variable name that included the $ prefix, but that has not been defined, the Add
Variable dialog box appears, enabling you to define the project variable.
You can assign a variable to nearly any design parameter assigned a numeric value in RMxprt.
Choosing a Variable to Optimize in RMxprt

Before a variable can be optimized, you must specify that you intend for it to be used during an
optimization analysis in the Properties dialog box.
1.
If the variable is a design variable, click RMxprt>Design Properties.

If the variable is a project variable, click Project>Project Variables.
2.
Click the tab that lists the variable you want to optimize.
3.
Click the row containing the variable you want to optimize.
Note
Dependent variables cannot be optimized.
4.
Select the Optimization option.
5.
For the variable you want to optimize, select Include.

The selected variable is now available for optimization in an optimetrics setup defined in the
current design or project.
6.
Optionally, override the default minimum and maximum values that Optimetrics will use for
the variable in every optimization analysis. During optimization, the optimizer does not conSetting up RMxprt Projects 2-45
sider variable values that lie outside of this range.

7.
Click OK.
Related Topics
Setting up an Optimization Analysis
Including a Variable in a Sensitivity Analysis in RMxprt

Before a variable can be included in a sensitivity analysis, you must specify that you intend for it to
be used during a sensitivity analysis in the Properties dialog box.
1.

2.
Click the tab that lists the variable you want to include in the sensitivity analysis.
3.
Click the row containing the variable you want to include in the sensitivity analysis.
Note
Dependent variables cannot be included in a sensitivity analysis.
4.
Select the Sensitivity option.
5.
For the variable you want to include in the sensitivity analysis, select Include.
The selected variable is now available for sensitivity analysis in a sensitivity setup defined in
the current design or project.
6.
Optionally, override the default minimum and maximum values that Optimetrics will use for
the variable in every sensitivity analysis. During sensitivity analysis, Optimetrics will not consider variable values that lie outside of this range.
7.
Optionally, override the default initial displacement value that Optimetrics will use for the
variable in every sensitivity analysis. During sensitivity analysis, Optimetrics will not consider
a variable value for the first design variation that is greater than this step size away from the
starting variable value.
8.
Click OK.
Related Topics
Setting up a Sensitivity Analysis
Choosing a Variable to Tune in RMxprt

Before a variable can be tuned, you must specify that you intend for it to be tuned in the Properties
dialog box.
1.

2.
Click the tab that lists the variable you want to tune.
3.
Click the row containing the variable you want to tune.
Note
Dependent variables cannot be tuned.
4.
Select the Tuning option.
5.
For the variable you want to tune, select Include.
6.
Click OK.
The selected variable is now available for tuning in the Tune dialog box.
Related Topics
Tuning a Variable
Including a Variable in a Statistical Analysis in RMxprt

Before a variable can be included in a statistical analysis, you must specify that you intend for it to
be used during a statistical analysis in the Properties dialog box.
1.

2.
Click the tab that lists the variable you want to include in the statistical analysis.
3.
Click the row containing the variable you want to include in the statistical analysis.
Note
Dependent variables cannot be included in a statistical analysis.
4.
Select the Statistics option.
5.
For the variable you want to include in the statistical analysis, select Include.
The selected variable is now available for statistical analysis in a statistical setup defined in the
current design or project.
6.
Optionally, override the distribution criteria that Optimetrics will use for the variable in every
statistical analysis.
7.
Click OK.
Related Topics
Setting up a Statistical Analysis
3
Wire Specification Libraries
RMxprt contains a library of standard wire sizes for use in machine designs. These wire gauge
specifications are based on widely used standards currently available in industry.
Wire Specification Libraries 3-1
Configure Wire Specification Library

In order to be able to select wire size for your design specifications, your need to configure wire
specification library before you insert a new design in your project. RMxprt provides following
wire gauge specifications based on the current widely used standards for bare copper wire gauges
(including both round and rectangular wires):
American.wir
ANSI_SingleFilm.wir
ANSI_HeavyFilm.wir
ANSI_TripleFilm.wir
File American.wir provides dimensions for all ANSI

bare wires.
Files ANSI*.wir provide dimensions for bare and
film insulated copper wires with single, heavy, triple
and quad builds of integer and half AWG numbers.
ANSI_QuadFilm.wir
AWG_Int_SingleFilm.wir
AWG_Int_HeavyFilm.wir
Files AWG_Int*.wir provide dimensions of integer

AWG numbers.
AWG_Int_TripleFilm.wir
AWG_Int_QuadFilm.wir
Chinese.wir
IEC_R20Grade1.wir
IEC_R20Grade2.wir
IEC_R20Grade3.wir
IEC_R40Grade1.wir
IEC_R40Grade2.wir
Files IEC_R20*.wir provide dimensions of enameled

copper wires with Grade-1, 2, and 3 insulations of
R20 series. Files IEC_R40*.wir provide dimensions
of R40 series. In files IEC*.wir, the gauge numbers
are equivalent to the AWG numbers according to the
nominal diameters.
IEC_R40Grade3.wir
These files are stored in the file folder <Library Directory>/syslib, where <Library Directory>
is set via Tools>Options>General Options>Project Options.
3-2 Wire Specification Libraries
Specify the Wire Setting

To specify the wire setting:
1.

The Machine Editor Options dialog box appears, as shown.
2.
Select one of the following library locations:
System Libraries - libraries installed with Maxwell, located at <Library Directory>/syslib

User Libraries - user created public libraries, located at <Library Directory>/userlib
Personal Libraries - user created private libraries, located at <Project Directory>/PersonalLib
where <Library Directory> and <Project Directory> are set via Tools>Options>General Options>Project Options.
3.
Select one specification library from the pull-down list in Wire Setting area.
4.
Note
The new wire setting does not affect all existing designs, but affects all designs inserted
later. The selected wire specification library is saved with each design.
Hint
To modify the wire specification library saved in an existing design, double click the
design to active its Machine Editor window, click Machine>Wire, modify wire data or
Import a wire specification library file, and Save wire data to the design.
Edit Wire Data

Users can modify wire data for the active design and export to create their own data files for the
wire gauges according to the data for the wire gauge and thickness of insulation provided by the
manufacturers.
To define or edit wire data:
1.
Click Machine>Wire.
The dialog box Edit Wire Data appears, as shown.
2.
Select the units from the pull-down list Unit System:.
Note
in: English Unit System stands for British unit system.

mm: Metric Unit System stands for the metric unit system.
Changing the unit system is only for specifying input data unit, not for transferring data
between two unit systems.
There are two tabs, Round and Rectangle, in the dialog box for editing wire shapes.
Edit Round Wire Data

Click the tab Round for editing the round wire shape. In the Round tab sheet, you specify the
desired values for Gauge No., Diameter, and/or Wrap.
Gauge No.: wire gauge index number.

Diameter: diameter of bare copper wire, in mm or inch.
Wrap: thickness of insulation wrap, in mm or inch as shown.
You can edit the wire data in the spreadsheet by doing the following:
1.
Directly modify the wire data.
2.
Add new rows for the wire by clicking Add Row.
3.
Delete rows for the wire by clicking Delete Row.
Edit Rectangular Wire Data

Click the tab Rectangle for editing the rectangular wire shape. In the Rectangle tab sheet, as shown
below, specify the desired values for Wire Shape Limit, Table Type, and Sides.
Wire Shape Limit

Specify the desired values to limit ratios of the two sides.
Wire Shape Limit (B/A) max: the maximum ratio between the wide and the narrow
sides.
Wire Shape Limit (B/A) min: the minimum ratio between the wide and the narrow sides.
Recommended Wire Sides

Use the radio buttons to specify whether to consider priority factors.
All Size:
For No Consideration of Priority Factors. Click the command button Calculate in the dialog box Edit Wire Data, all the sectional areas of wire gauge with the ratio B/A between
the wide and the narrow sides satisfying the condition (B/A)max > B / A > (B/A) min
appear in the spread sheet table.
Skip One:
For Consideration of Priority Factors. Click the command button Calculate in the dialog
box Edit Wire Data, all the sectional areas of wire gauge with the ratio B/A between the
wide and the narrow sides satisfying the condition (B/A) max > B / A > (B/A) min appear
in three different modes in the spread sheet.
1.
At the cross of the odd columns and the odd rows, the sectional areas appear in black
numbers (recommended to use).
2.
At the cross of the odd columns and the even rows or the even columns and the odd
rows, the sectional areas appear in blue numbers (rarely used).
3.
At the cross of the even columns and the even rows, the sectional areas do not show
(generally not used).
This is convenient for users to use recommended wire gauge according to R20 Priority Number
Series.
Wire Sides
You can edit the wire data in the spread sheet:
1.
Directly modify the wire data.
2.
Add new rows or columns for the wire, click Add Row or Add Column.
3.
Delete rows or columns for the wire, click Delete Row or Delete Column.
Export/Import Wire Data

After editing, you can export the wire data to a file:
1.
Click Export, the Export File dialog box appears.

The default directory for an exported wire data file is userlib.
2.
Provide the file name to export in the File name: edit box and use the default file type
Wire Size File (*.wir).
3.
Click OK to return to the Edit Wire Data dialog box.
Before editing, you can import the wire data from a file:
1.
Click Import, the Import File dialog box appears.
2.
Provide the file name to import in the File name: edit box (or by browsing) and use the
default file type Wire Size File (*.wir).
3.
Click OK to return to the Edit Wire Data dialog box.
Save Wire Data

1.
During editing, you can save the wire data you entered by clicking Save.
2.
When you finish editing, click Close to close the Edit Wire Data dialog box.
Note
Save wire data only updates the wire data in the active design.
4
Working with Materials in RMxprt
RMxprt shares many common functions related to materials and material handling with
Maxwell3D and Maxwell2D. For general topics such as, Assigning Materials, Searching for Materials, Adding New Materials, and Viewing and Modifying Material Attributes, see the topics in
Maxwell help under Assigning Materials.
RMxprt includes a material library containing common materials used in motor design. However,
this library needs to be configured so that it is automatically loaded for any new RMxprt design.
Once the library is configured, you can add, remove, and edit RMxprt materials in two main ways:
Using the Tools>Edit Configured Libraries>Materials menu command.

Right-clicking Materials in the project tree and selecting Edit All Libraries.
Editing definitions from the project window does not modify the configured libraries for any particular design. To consider the current design, use the Tools>Edit Configured Libraries option.
Doing so ensures that new libraries are added to the configured list for the current design. If you
edit materials from this command for the current and then export them, they will also be available
to assign to objects in other designs.
Related Topics:
Configuring Design Libraries
Material Library Management for RMxprt
Working with Materials in RMxprt 4-1
Material Library Management for RMxprt

The three most crucial electromagnetic materials in the electric machine are soft-magnetic material
(silicon steel sheet), hard-magnetic material (permanent magnet) and electromagnetic wire. It is
convenient to create a data file library for them for quick selection while inputting design data.
4-2 Working with Materials in RMxprt
Soft-Magnetic Materials
The stator and the rotor iron cores in the electric machine are generally laminated with punched
sheets of nonlinear soft-magnetic silicon steel. Some special types of electric machines, such as
moment motor, turbo-generator etc., use integrated solid rotor iron core of soft-magnetic material.
For magnetic field analysis and core loss analysis of the electric machine, the magnetization characteristics (B-H Curve) and the loss characteristics (B-P Curve) of the iron-core material must be
defined. The dialogue boxes to do so are accessed from the View/Edit Material window, which, in
turn is accessed from the Edit Libraries window. Access to the window for editing the B-H curve
is enabled when you set the Magnetic Permeability value to nonlinear (rather than simple or Anisotropic). When you set the value to nonlinear, the value field changes to a B-H Curve button. Click
the B-H curve button to open the window.
For the loss characteristics (B-P Curve), you first set the Core Loss Type of the material to Electrical Steel (rather than None or Power Ferrite) as a material property in the View/Edit Material
window. When you do so, this enables the Calculate Properties selection for drop down at the bottom of the window. Select Core Loss Coefficient from the drop down menu to open the B-P Curve
window.
Related Topics:
Adding New Materials to an RMxprt Project
Setting the Material Threshold for RMxprt
Assigning Materials
Removing Materials
Validating Materials
Sorting Materials
Viewing and Modifying Material Attributes
Copying Materials
Exporting Materials to a Library
Calculating Properties for Core Loss in RMxprt (BP Curve)
Adding New Materials to an RMxprt Project

You can add a new material to a project or to the global user-defined material library. To make the
new project material available to all projects, you must export the material to a global user-defined
material library.
To assign a material to an object:
1.
Click Tools>Edit Configured Libraries>Materials.
In the project tree, you can also right-click Materials, and select Edit All Libraries.
The Edit Libraries dialog box appears.

2.
Click Add Material.

The View/Edit Material dialog box appears.

3.
Type a name for the new material in the Material Name text box.
4.
In the View/Edit Material for section, select whether this material should be available for the
Active Design only, for This Product only or for All Products. The selection makes a difference in the properties displayed.
Note
5.
When you select certain Type or Value options, additional parameters appear beneath
some properties in the same way that Magnitude appears beneath Magnetic Coercivity.
As necessary, specify values for any additional parameters that appear.
In the Properties of the Material table, specify the Type and the Value for the following
material properties, displayed when Active Design is selected:
Relative Permeability.
Bulk Conductivity
Magnetic Coercivity (including the Magnitude of the vector)
Core Loss Type - type selections for this property may enable access to coefficient calculation windows, and enable additional properties.
Mass Density
If you select This Product, additional fields are displayed.
Relative Permittivity
Dielectric Loss Tangent
Magnetic Loss Tangent
Composition
6.
Optionally, change the Units for any of the properties.
7.
Click Validate Material to verify the settings you have specified are valid for the existing
properties.
If the material setup is valid, a green check mark appears below the Validate Material button.
Click OK to save the new material.
The Edit Libraries dialog box reappears, with the new material added to the list of materials.
Click OK to close the Edit Libraries dialog box.
8.
9.
Relative Permittivity for RMxprt Material

Specify the following for Relative Permittivity. and specify the units.
Type
Value
Simple
Type a value for the Relative Permittivity.
Anisotropic
The following two parameters appear:
T(1,1)
T(2,2)
Type a simple value for each.

Note
This property is not used in RMxprt design analysis, but it will be transferred to Maxwell
3D Design automatically when the design is created by RMxprt.
Relative Permeability for a Maxwell or RMxprt Material

Select one the following for relative permeability and specify the units:
Type
Simple
Anisotropic
Value
Type a value for the Relative Permeability.
The following parameters appear:
T(1,1)
T(2,2)
T(3,3)
Select either a Simple or Nonlinear Type for each of these

parameters.
Nonlinear
Click BH Curve, and specify the coordinates for the BH-curve in the
BH Curve dialog box.
Also enables X, Y, and Z Component unit vector fields for Magnetic
Coercivity.
Note
The Anisotropic type is not used in RMxprt design.
Specifying a BH Curve for Nonlinear Relative Permeability

When you define a new material or edit an existing material in the View /Edit Materials window
with a nonlinear relative permeability, you need to specify the magnetization characteristics (B-H
Curve).
1.
Open the View / Edit Materials dialog from the Edit Materials window either by:
Selecting an existing material that you need to edit, and click View / Edit Material.
Clicking Add Material.
Any of these actions open the View/ Edit Materials dialog box.
2.
For the Relative Permeability property do one of the following (depending on the type of
material you are defining):
a.
Select Nonlinear as the Type. A B-H Curve button appears in the Value column.
b.
Select Anisotropic as the Type to display the additional parameters: T(1,1), T(2,2),
T(3,3).
Selecting Nonlinear for any of these additional parameters also causes a B-H Curve button to appear in the Value column.
Input the BH curve by clicking the B-H Curve button opens the BH Curve dialog box.
3.
Set the Units for H and B by selecting from the drop down menus.
4.
Choose the type of curve you want to define by selecting either Normal or Intrinsic.
For a material property without an existing BH curve definition, the dialog opens with an
empty list of coordinates and the default type will be Normal. For a property with existing BH
curve definition, the selected radio button corresponds to the existing B type.
Note
The Intrinsic BH curve is supported only in Maxwell 2D/3D magnetostatic and

transient design types. A material property defined using an Intrinsic BH curve will
fail validation check in all the other product/design types.
When an Intrinsic BH curve is added, the Relative Permeability Value button
label in the View/Edit Material dialog box changes to Bi-H Curve as visual
indication of the type of curve currently defined for the materail.
You can change the type at any time. For an existing curve, v alidation checks are performed
on the coordinate list when you attempt to change the type. If the data is not valid, an error
message will be displayed and the type of B will not be changed. If data is valid, a query dialog
box displays asking if the coordinates should be converted.
Pressing No can be used, fer example, when users have specified the BH coordinates and then
realize they haven't select the desired type.
Note
5.
Changing the type of the BH curve invalidates all solution data
Enter B and H values in each row of the Coordinates table. Placing the cursor in a table cell
enables the Add Row Above, Add Row Below, and Delete Rows buttons.
Note the following requirements for creating a valid curve:
For a Normal BH curve, the slope of the curve can not be less than that of free space anywhere along the curve.
For an Intrinsic BH curve, the slope of the curve can not be less than 0.
The value of B must increase along the curve.
The initial value of B must be 0 (zero).
As you enter values, the graph is updated.

To Add or Edit rows, you can click the following buttons:
Add Row Above

Add Row Below
Append Rows (to specify the number of rows to append to the table)
Delete Rows
Optionally, click Import Dataset to import BH curve data from a file, and if they are in the
wrong columns, click Swap X-Y Data to switch the B values and H values in the graphics display. You can also use the SheetScan tool to extract curve data from sources such as manufacturer datasheets to a dataset, which can then be exported to a tab-delimited file, and imported
via Import Dataset. (Refer to Adding Datasets and Exporting Datasets for related information
on working with datasets. Refer to Using SheetScan for working with the SheetScan tool.)
Normal BH curves with a positive B value at the first point will be extrapolated. Intrinsic
curves are not extrapolated.
6.
When finished entering data, click OK to close the window.

When you OK the dialog, an error message displays if a slope is out of tolerance, identifying
the data points between which the slope is less than that of free space. Out of tolerance data
points must be correctred before you can successfully exit the dialog.
The BH curve you have defined is associated with the Relative Permeability property of the
material.
Note
When an Intrinsic BH curve is added, the Relative Permeability Value button label
changes to Bi-H Curve as visual indication of the type of curve currently defined for the
materail.
Bulk Conductivity for an RMxprt Material

Specify the following for bulk conductivity and specify the units:
Type
Value
Simple
Type a value for the Bulk Conductivity.
Anisotropic
T(1,1)
T(2,2)
You can specify a Simple or Nonlinear type for each of these

parameters.
Note
The Anisotropic type is not used in RMxprt designs.
Dielectric Loss Tangent for RMxprt Material

Specify the following for dielectric loss tangent.
Type
Value
Simple
Anisotropic
T(1,1)
T(2,2)
Note
Magnetic Loss Tangent for RMxprt Material

Type
Value
Simple
Anisotropic
T(1,1)
T(2,2)
Note
Magnetic Coercivity for Maxwell and RMxprt Materials

Specify the following for magnetic coercivity and specify the units:
Type
Vector
Value
Appears by default.
If the Relative Permeability Type is either Simple or

Anisotropic,enter a Value for the Magnitude.
If the Relative Permeability Type is Nonlinear, Magnitude
becomes uneditable, and three additional fields of Type Unit
Vector: X Component, Y Component, and Z Component
appear in which you can enter values or specify functions.
Core Loss Type for an RMxprt Material

Specify the following for core loss type and specify the units:
Name
Value
None
No core loss is to be calculated for this material.
Electrical Steel
Kh: Hysteresis
Kc: Classical Eddy
Ke: Excess
Selecting Electrical Steel also enables the Calculate Properties for

Core Loss Coefficient the pull-down list at the bottom of the dialog
box. Selecting the Core Loss Coefficient opens the BP Curve
window.
Power Ferrite
Cm
X
Y
Selecting Power Ferrite also enables the Calculate Properties for

Core Loss versus Frequency pull-down list at the bottom of the
dialog box. Selecting the Core Loss versus Frequency opens the BP
Curve window.
Calculating Properties for Core Loss in RMxprt (BP Curve)

To be able to extract parameters from the loss characteristics (B-P Curve), you first set the Core
Loss Type of the material to Electrical Steel (rather than None or Power Ferrite) as a material property in the View / Edit Material window.
To calculate core loss properties for an electrical steel material:
1.
Click Tools>Edit Configured Libraries>Materials.
Or in the project tree, you can also right-click Materials, and select Edit All Libraries.
The Edit Libraries window appears.

2.
Click Add Material.

The View/Edit Material window appears.
3.
In the Core Loss Type row, select Electrical Steel from the Value pull-down list.
This enables the Calculate Properties for pull-down menu at the bottom of the dialogue box
with the following two choices:
Calculate Properties for: Core Loss at One Frequency

Calculate Properties for: Core Loss versus Frequency
It also displays parameters associated with Electrical Steel materials.
Electrical Steel Core Loss from a Single-Frequency Loss Curve

With the Core Loss Type set to Electrical Steel:
1.
Select Core Loss at One Frequency from the Calculate Properties for: pull-down menu.
The BP Curve window appears.
2.
Do one of the following to specify a BP curve:
Import the curve from a saved file.

Enter the coordinates manually.
Note
3.
4.
The accuracy in inputting the data for B-P Curve for the electrical steel material has
significant effect on the correctness of the analyses to the electromagnetic characteristics
of the electric machine. You should input the data for B-P Curve according to the
accurate data provided by the manufacturers of materials.
Select the units in which the B-P curve is measured from the Core Loss Unit pull-down list.
Type values and select units for the following:
Mass Density
Frequency
Thickness
Conductivity
The following parameters are dynamically updated with both the specified unit and the standard unit (w/m^3) as the input data changes.
5.
Kh -Hysteresis
Kc - Classical Eddy
Ke - Excess
Click OK.
The View/Edit Material dialog box reappears. The property values fro Kh, Kc, and Ke are
updated as new default values.
Computation of Core Loss from a Single-Frequency Loss Curve

The principles of the computation algorithm are summarized as follows.
The iron-core loss is expressed as:
pv = ph + pc + pe
2
1.5
= K1 Bm + K2 Bm
where the eddy-current loss is
p c = k c ( fB m )
the hysteresis loss is
2
p h = k n fB m
and the excessive loss is
p e = k e ( fB m )
1.5
Therefore
K1 = kh f + Kc f
K2 = ke f
1.5
The classical eddy-current loss coefficient is calculated directly as
2
2 d
k c = -----
where is the conductivity and d is the thickness of one lamination sheets.
Minimize the quadratic form to obtain K1 and K2.
2
1.5
err ( K 1, K 2 ) = p vi K 1 B mi + K 2 B mi
= min
where Pvi , Bmi the i-th point of the data on the loss characteristics curve.
The other two loss coefficients are obtained as
2
K1 kc f 0
k h = --------------------------f
0
K2
k e = -----------1.5
f 0
where f0 is the testing frequency for B-H Curve.
Related Topics:
Calculating Properties for Core Loss (BP Curve) for Maxwell
Core Loss Coefficients for Electrical Steel
Core Loss Coefficient Extraction
Core Loss Type for a Maxwell Material
Electrical Steel Core Loss from Multi-Frequency Loss Curves

With the Core Loss Type set to Electrical Steel:
1.
Select Core Loss versus Frequency from the Calculate Properties for: pull-down menu.
The Core Loss versus Frequency window appears as shown:
2.
Using the Edit area, Add frequency points at which a dataset is available for the Core Loss.
3.
For each Dataset added, click the Edit Dataset button to launch the Edit Dataset dialog.
4.
Add Dataset information for the frequency by manually entering the data or importing the data
from a table. Click OK to accept the dataset and return to the Core Loss versus Frequency
dialog. Continue adding dataset information until all frequencies have datasets defined.
5.
Click OK when all frequencies have valid data to complete the core loss calculation and return
to the View/Edit Material dialog.
Computation of Core Loss from Multi-Frequency Loss Curves

pv = ph + pc + pe
2
2
1.5
= k h fB m + k c ( fB m ) + k e ( fB m )
Minimize the quadratic form to obtain kh , kc and ke directly.
err ( k h, k c, k e ) =
ni
i = 1j = 1
2
2
2 2
1.5 1.5
p vij k h f i B mij + k c f i B mij + k e f i B mij
= min
where m - the number of loss curves, ni - the number of points of the i-th loss curve, and
Pvij = f(fi , Bmij) - two dimensional lookup table for multi-frequency loss curves.
Power Ferrite Core Loss from Multi-Frequency Loss Curves

With the Core Loss Type set to Power Ferrite:
1.
Select Core Loss versus Frequency from the Calculate Properties for: pull-down menu.
The Core Loss versus Frequency window appears as shown:
2.
Using the Edit area, Add frequency points at which a dataset is available for the Core Loss.
3.
For each Dataset added, click the Edit Dataset button to launch the Edit Dataset dialog.
4.
Add Dataset information for the frequency by manually entering the data or importing the data
from a table. Click OK to accept the dataset and return to the Core Loss versus Frequency
dialog. Continue adding dataset information until all frequencies have datasets defined.
5.
Click OK when all frequencies have valid data to complete the core loss calculation and return
to the View/Edit Material dialog.
Computation of Power Ferrite Core Loss from Loss Curves

x y
p v = Cm f B m
or
log ( p v ) = c + x log ( f ) + y log ( B m )

where
c = log ( C m )
Minimize the quadratic form to obtain c, x and y.
err ( c, x, y ) =
ni
[ log ( p vij ) ( c + x log ( f i ) + y log ( B mij ) ) ] = min
i = 1j = 1
where m - the number of loss curves, ni - the number of points of the i-th loss curve, and
Pvij = f(fi , Bmij) - two dimensional lookup table for multi-frequency loss curves. Then Cm is calculated from the equation above.
Mass Density for RMxprt Material

Provide a Simple value for Mass density in kg/m^3.
Composition for RMxprt Material

Specify whether the composition is Solid or Lamination.
If Lamination, specify the:
Stacking Factor - takes a simple value

Stacking Direction - a drop down menu lets you select V(1), V(2), or V(3).
Note
Permanent Magnet Materials in RMxprt

A permanent magnet is defined as a material that generates a magnetic flux due to permanent magnetic dipoles in that material.
Nonlinear vs. Linear Permanent Magnets

In general, permanent magnets are nonlinear and should be modeled via a B-H curve as shown
below. The magnetic coercivity, Hc, is defined as the B-H curve's H-axis intercept, and the magnetic remanence, Br, as its B-axis intercept.
B
Linear Permanent Magnet
Nonlinear Permanent Magnet
Br
Hc
In many applications, however, the permanent magnet's behavior can be approximated using a linear relationship between B and H. In these cases, there is no need to create a nonlinear material.
Simply enter the appropriate values of Br or Hc for the material when defining its properties.
Compute Remanent Br from B-H curve

The value of the remanent Br of the individual element after the magnetization field is computed is
determined in such a way: after having located the operating point on the original non-remanent BH curve, draw a line which is parallel to the original recoil curve with the slope of 0 r and
passes the operating point, the intersection of this line with B-axis is the remanent Br as the result
of the applied magnetization field.
Steel_1010
Ansoft LLC
2.00
ANSOFT
1.80
1.60
1.40
B [T]
1.20
1.00
0.80
0.60
0.40
0.20
0.00
0.0
2000.0
4000.0
6000.0
8000.0
10000.0
H [A/m]
Calculating the Properties for a Non-Linear Permanent Magnet in RMxprt

Non-linear permanent magnet properties may be specified in one of two ways.
First, a BH curve may be input directly as follows:
1.
Click the View/Edit Materials button in the Edit Libraries dialog box.
The View/Edit Material dialog box appears.
2.
The nonlinear BH curve is defined by setting the Relative Permeability Type either to Non-
linear or Anisotropic.
If you select Anisotropic, each of its components can be selected Nonlinear and can be specified by a BH Curve.
A B-H Curve button appears in the nonlinear propertys Value column

3.
Input the BH curve by clicking the B-H Curve button in the property Value column.
This opens the BH Curve dialog box in which you can input (or modify) curve data. (Refer to
Adding Datasets for general information on working with datasets.
Note
For a Normal BH curve, the slope of the curve can not be less than that of free space anywhere along the curve.
For an Intrinsic BH curve, the slope of the curve can not be less than 0.
The Intrinsic BH curve is supported only in Maxwell 2D/3D magnetostatic and

transient design types. A material property defined using an Intrinsic BH curve will
fail validation check in all the other product/design types.
When an Intrinsic BH curve is added, the Relative Permeability Value button
label changes to Bi-H Curve as visual indication of the type of curve currently
defined for the materail.
When you OK the dialog, an error message displays if a slope is out of tolerance, identifying
the data points between which the slope is less than that of free space.
The operations to input a nonlinear demagnetization curve are the same as entering a BH curve
for Steel material. When a BH curve goes through the second quadrant or third quadrant, the
curve is treated as a demagnetization curve.
4.
To model temperature dependency for a nonlinear permanent magnet you must:
Use an Intrinsic BH curve to model the Relative Permeability

Specify a Thermal Modifier for both Relative Permeability and the Magnitude of Magnetic Coercivity. Apply a thermal Modifier by selecting the Thermal Modifier checkbox. Checking this box causes the Thermal Modifier column to display at the right side
of the Properties of the Material table. Selecting Edit rather than None causes display of
the Edit Thermal Modifier dialog.
Alternatively, a non-linear BH curve can be modeled by the following four parameters:
residual flux density Br

coercive field force Hc
maximum energy product (BH)max
relative recoil permeability r
From the View/Edit Materials window:

1.
Set the Relative Permeability to Nonlinear.

This enables the Calculate Properties for... drop down menu at the bottom of the window.
2.
Click Non-Linear Permanent Magnet from the drop down menu.

This displays the Properties for Non-Linear Permanent Magnet dialog box, which contains
the following fields into which you enter the appropriate values.
Mur
Provide a value for relative permeability.
Hc
Coercive field force Hc in the units specified. Provide a value

and select units from the drop down menu.
Br
Residual flux density Br, in Tesla.

If enabled, provide a value and select units from the drop down
menu.
BHmax
Maximum magnetic energy product (BH)max

If enabled, provide a value and select units form the drop down
menu.
3.
Click OK to close the dialogue and return to the View/Edit Materials window.
The values for Relative Permeability and Magnitude under Magnetic Coercivity are
updated as new default values. Maxwell will create a lookup table based on the Four-Parameter
Curve Fitting algorithm, and update the coordinates of the BH curve automatically as long as
the input data of four parameters pass the validation check.
Related Topics
Non-Linear vs. Linear Permanent Magnets
Calculating the Properties for a Linear Permanent Magnet
Temperature Dependent Nonlinear Permanent Magnets
Calculating the Properties for a Linear Permanent Magnet

Edit a linear demagnetization curve is simple. From the View/Edit Materials window:
1.
Set the Relative Permeability to Simple.

This enables the Calculate Properties for Permanent Magnet drop down menu at the bottom
of the window.
2.
Click Permanent Magnet from the drop down menu.

This displays the Properties for Permanent Magnet window. This contains the following
fields.
Mu (enabled by default)
Provide a value.
Hc (enabled by default)
Coercive field force Hc in the units specified. Provide a value

and select units from the drop down menu.
Br/Mp (disabled by default) Checking this enables the radio buttons that let you specify
either Br or Mp.
Residual flux density Br, in Tesla.
Br
If enabled, provide a value and select units from the drop down
menu.
Mp
3.
If enabled, provide a value and select units form the drop down
menu.
Click OK to close the dialogue and return to the View/Edit Materials window.
The values for Relative Permeability and Magnitude under Magnetic Coercivity are updated as
new default values.
Note
The accuracy in inputting the characteristic parameters for the permanent-magnetic

material has significant effect on the correctness of the analyses to the electromagnetic
characteristics of the electric machine. It is suggested that users should input the
characteristic parameters of the permanent-magnetic material according to the accurate
data provided by the manufacturers of materials. RMxprt provides a few characteristic
parameters of permanent-magnetic materials for reference.
Using Demagnetization Curves

Many permanent magnet manufactures directly provide demagnetization curves for their products,
but in most cases, manufactures provide some main parameters, such as residual flux density Br,
coercive field force Hc and maximum magnetic energy product (BH)max, and relative recoil magnetic permeability r. This section and the next section describe the basic parameters for the
demagnetization curve of permanent magnets and the curve fitting based on these parameters.
Hysteresis Loop
The permanent-magnetic material belongs to hard-magnetic material. It is characterized with "fat"
hysteresis loop, which encloses large area as shown in the figure. When magnetized, it keeps high
magnetic property with the external magnetic field removed, therefore is used in the permanentmagnet electric machine to produce magnetic field. The characteristics of the permanent-magnetic
material are represented with its main parameters: residual flux density Br, coercive field force Hc
and maximum magnetic energy product (BH)max.
Demagnetization Curve
The part of the maximum hysteresis loop of the permanent-magnetic material in the second quadrant is called the demagnetization curve as shown in the next figure. It is the basic characteristics
curve of the permanent-magnetic material. On the demagnetization curve, the magnetic flux density has positive values, but the magnetic field intensity has negative values. It means that the permanent-magnetic material is applied with demagnetization magnetic field intensity. Since Hm and
Bm are in opposite directions, when the magnetic flux goes through the permanent-magnetic material, the magnetic potential difference along the direction of the magnetic flux does not drop, but
rises. Therefore, the permanent-magnetic material is a magnetic source, similar to the electric
source in the electric circuit.
The two extreme positions on the demagnetization curve are the two significant parameters to represent the magnetic characteristics of the permanent-magnetic material. On the demagnetization
curve, the value of the magnetic flux density corresponding to zero magnetic field intensity H is
termed residual flux density Br, on the other hand, the value of the magnetic field intensity corresponding to zero magnetic flux density B is termed coercive field force Hc. The produce of the
magnetic flux density and the magnetic field intensity at any point on the demagnetization curve is
termed magnetic energy product (BH), which is proportional to the magnetic energy density possessed by the permanent magnet at the given operating situation. At the two extreme positions
(B = Br, H = 0) and (B = 0, H = Hc), the magnetic energy product is equal to zero. Somewhere at an
intermediate position, the magnetic energy reaches its maximum value and is termed maximum
magnetic energy product (BH)max, which is another significant parameter to represent the magnetic
characteristics of the permanent-magnetic material. To some permanent-magnetic materials with
linear demagnetization curve, it is obvious that at (B = Br / 2, H = Hc / 2), the magnetic energy
product reaches its maximum value, i.e. (BH)max = Br Hc / 4.
Recoil Lines
The relationship between the magnetic flux density and the magnetic field intensity represented by
the demagnetization curve only exists when the magnetic field intensity varies in the same direction. In fact, when the permanent magnet electric machine is working, the demagnetization field
intensity varies repeatedly in both directions. When demagnetization field is applied to the magne-
tized permanent magnet, the magnetic flux density decreases along the curly segment BrP on the
demagnetization curve as shown in the figure
If the external demagnetization field intensity Hp is removed when the magnetic flux density
reaches the point P, the magnetic flux density will increase not along the original demagnetization
curve, but along another curve PVR. If the external demagnetization field intensity is reapplied, the
magnetic flux density will decrease along the new curve RUP. By repeatedly applying the demagnetization field intensity, a localized loop is formed and is termed local hysteresis loop. On the local
hysteresis loop, the rising segment and the dropping segment are quite close to each other, therefore
can be approximated by the straight line PR, which is termed recoil line with P as the starting point.
If demagnetization field with intensity Hq not exceeding the original value Hp is applied thereafter,
the magnetic flux density will vary reversibly along the recoil line PR. If Hq > Hp, the magnetic
flux density drops to a new starting point Q. It will vary along the new recoil line QS, but not the
previous one PR. This sort of irreversible variation in magnetic flux density causes instability in the
characteristics of electric machines and complicates the design computation of permanent magnet
electric machines, therefore should be avoided as possible.
Recoil Magnetic Permeability

The ratio of the average slope of the recoil line to the magnetic permeability in vacuum 0
(0= 4 x 10-7 H/m) is termed relative recoil magnetic permeability or recoil magnetic permeability
for short, r:
r =
1 B
0 H
If the demagnetization curve is curly, the value of r depends on the location of the starting point
and is a variable, but typically varies within a small range. Therefore, it is approximated as a constant and is taken as the slop of the tangent to the point (Br, 0) on the demagnetization curve. In
other words, the recoil lines at different starting points are approximated as a family of parallel
lines, which are all parallel to the tangent to the point (Br, 0) on the demagnetization curve.
Inflection Point
Some permanent-magnetic materials, such as some ferrite permanent-magnetic materials, show
straight upper segment on the demagnetization curve. When the demagnetization field intensity
drops to a given value, the demagnetization curve turns to decrease rapidly. The turning point is
termed inflection point. If the demagnetization field intensity does not exceed the inflection point k,
the recoil line coincides with the straight segment on the demagnetization curve. If the demagnetization field intensity exceeds the inflection point k, the new recoil line RP no longer coincides with
the straight segment on the demagnetization curve.
Some permanent-magnetic materials, such as most of the rare-earth permanent-magnetic materials,

show straight demagnetization curve in the whole range. In those cases, the recoil line coincides
with the demagnetization curve. This makes the magnetic property keep stable while the permanent-magnet electric machine is working. This is the best ideal demagnetization curve for electric
machine applications.
Curve Fitting of Demagnetization Curves

RMxprt fits the demagnetization curve according to the given characteristic parameters Br, Hc,
(BH)max and r.
Three Parameter Curve Fitting

Given the three characteristic parameters Br, Hc and (BH)max, the principles of the three-parameter
curve fitting algorithm are summarized as follows.Using the following figure as a reference:
Hc
H a = ------a
and
Br
B a = -----a
where a<1.
Any magnetic flux density B in the interval
0 B Br
corresponds to the magnetic field intensity H:
Ha Hc
Hc ( 1 a )
Br B
H = H c + -------------------- B = H c + ------------------------ B = H c ------------------Ba B
B r aB
B r aB
The tangent at any point is given by:
B 2
1 a ----
1
dH
r Br
dB
------------ =
= ----------------------------- ------ dB
1a
Hc
dH
The magnetic flux density Bm and the magnetic field intensity Hm corresponding to the maximum
magnetic energy product satisfy the following relationship:
dB
------dH
B = Bm
Br
= ------Hc
Solving yields:
Br
B m = ------------------------1+ 1a
and
Hc
H m = ------------------------1+ 1a
Let the magnetic energy product at the point equal to (BH)max be:
Br Hc
B m H m = --------------------------------- = ( BH ) max
2
(1 + 1 a)
Solving yields:
a = 2
Br Hc
Br Hc
----------------------------------------------( BH ) max
( BH ) max
The relative recoil magnetic permeability r is calculated as:
Br
1 dB
= ( 1 a ) ------------- r = ------ ------0 Hc
0 dH
B = Br
Four Parameter Curve Fitting
The three-parameter curve fitting technique fits the demagnetization curve well. For the nonlinear
permanent-magnetic material, the real operating point lies often not on the demagnetization curve,
but on the recoil line. The relative recoil magnetic permeability calculated with the three-parameter
curve fitting technique will cause deviation, therefore RMxprt employs a more accurate fitting
technique: four-parameter curve fitting technique, as introduced below.
Given the four characteristic parameters Br, Hc, (BH)max and r, the principles of the four-parameter curve fitting algorithm are summarized as follows:
1.
Draw a line through the point (0, Br) with the slope equal to -ro as shown in the Figure. The
segment of this line in the second quadrant is termed the ideal recoil line.
2.
Find the virtual magnetic flux density Br0.
3.
With Br0, Hc, and (BH)max, draw the demagnetization curve with the three-parameter curve fitting technique. The curve should touch the ideal recoil line at the tangent point (Ht, Bt).
4.
Any magnetic flux density B in the interval
0 B Br
corresponds to the magnetic field intensity H:
B r0 B
------------------------ Hc B a B
r0
o
H =
B Bt
H
+
t -------------
r o
B Bt
B Bt
The virtual magnetic flux density Br0 is found by iteration:

1.
Start from the initial guess for the lower and the upper bounds for the virtual magnetic flux
density Br0:
( BH ) max
B 0 = max r o H c, ------------------------
Hc
B1 = Br
2.
Let:
B0 + B1
B r0 = -------------------2
3.
With Br0, Hc, and (BH)max, draw the demagnetization curve with the three-parameter curve fitting technique.
a0 = 2
B r0 H c
B r0 H c
------------------------ -----------------------( BH ) max
( BH ) max
4.
The curve should touch a line parallel to the ideal recoil line at the tangent point (Ht, Bt).
B r0
a0 = 0
B t = B r0 r 0 H c ( 1 a 0 )B r0
a0 > 0
---------------------------------------------------------------------a0
and
B r0 B t
H t = H c --------------------------B r0 a 0 B t
5.
For any magnetic flux density B in the interval
0 B Br
the corresponding magnetic field intensity H will be calculated by:
B r0 B
------------------------ Hc B a B
r0
o
H =
B Bt
+
H
t -------------
r o
6.
B Bt
B Bt
Calculate the value of Hr corresponding to Br using:
Br Bt
H r = H t + ----------------r 0
7.
If Hr>0, the assumed virtual Br0 is too small, the lower bound of the interval needs to be
increased, so let B0=Br0. If, however, Hr<0, the assumed Br0 is too big, the upper bound of the
interval needs to be decreased, so let B1=Br0.
8.
Repeat steps (2) through (7) until Hr converges to 0 within satisfactory precision.
Conductor Data
When a material is assigned to a machine part, RMxprt checks that the material is appropriate for
the machine part based upon whether it is a conductor or other material type. RMxprt distinguishes
conductors based on material threshold settings. RMxprts treatment of conductors may be set by
the used by adjusting the Material Threshold.
Setting the Material Threshold for RMxprt

1.

The Design Settings dialog box appears with the Material Threshold tab selected.
2.
Type a value in the Conductivity Threshold text box (Default=100,000).
3.
Type a value in the Permeability text box (Default=100).
Note
RMxprt will treat materials with conductivity greater than 100,000 as conductors, and
materials with Permeability greater than 100 as steels.
4.
If you want these values to be the default, change the values by clicking the
Tools>Options>RMxprt Options menu and setting the material thresholds in the RMxprt
Options dialog.
5.
Click OK.
Editing Conductivity Properties in RMxprt

1.
Click Tools>Edit Configured Libraries>Materials to open the Edit Libraries dialog box.
2.
Select the material in the list whose conductivity properties you wish to edit and click the
View/Edit Materials button.
3.
In the View/Edit Materials dialog, Bulk Conductivity has two property types in the Type
pull-down list.
Note
4.
Simple: For this type, you must enter a simple value for the property value.
Anisotropic: For this type, you must specify material properties for three principal directions:
a.
T(1,1)
b.
T(2,2)
c.
T(3,3)
The Anisotropic type is not used in RMxprt design analysis, but it will be transferred to
Maxwell 3D Design automatically when the design is created by RMxprt.
Mass Density is a Simple parameter.
5
Specifying RMxprt Solution Settings
Specify how RMxprt computes a solution by adding a solution setup to the design. You can define
more than one solution setup per design.
To add a solution setup to a design:
1.
Select a design in the project tree.
2.
Click RMxprt>Analysis Setup>Add Solution Setup.
Alternatively, right-click Analysis in the project tree, and then click Add Solution Setup
on the shortcut menu.
The Solution Setup dialog box appears. It is divided among the following tabs:
General
Includes general solution settings, including rated output power, speed,

operating temperature, etc.
<machine type> Includes settings specific to the selected machine type.

Defaults
3.
4.
Includes settings to save and clear user-defined default values.
Click the General tab.

If available for the machine you are using, select an Operation Type from the pull-down list.
This may be Motor or Generator.
Note
To enable selection of Generator for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines, the machine

Control Type must be set to AC in its Properties window.
When you make the selection, this makes a difference in the Load Type available.
5.
Select a Load Type from the pull-down list. For Motor operation, the options are:
Const Speed
Const Power
Specifying RMxprt Solution Settings 5-1
Const Torque
Linear Torque
Fan Load
If the model has an Operation Type, and you select Generator, the Load Type options are:
Infinite Bus
Independent Generator
6.
Type the Rated Output Power, and select the units.
7.
Type the Rated Voltage, and select the units.
8.
Type the Rated Speed, and select the units.
9.
Type the Operating Temperature, and select the units.
10. Click the <machine type> tab (if any for this machine).
The options vary depending on the machine. For example, the 3 Phase Induction Motor
includes options for:
Frequency and Units

Winding Connection (Wye or Delta).
The 3 Phase Synchronous Machine includes options for:
Rated Power Factor

Winding Connection (Wye or Delta)
Exciter Efficiency
Input Exciting current and units
The Brushless DC Motor does not use the <machine type> tab.
11. Specify the desired settings, based on the machine type you have selected.
12. Click OK.
Note
To edit a setup after it has been created, right-click the specific setup (for example,
Setup1), under Analysis in the project tree, and then click Properties on the shortcut
menu.
5-2 Specifying RMxprt Solution Settings

RMxprt allows users to import all the data items of Design Output into a Microsoft Excel worksheet in order for users to design Design Sheet of their own styles according to their own requirements using Microsoft Excel.
Before you can specify a design sheet, you first need to customize a template in Microsoft Excel
and set the export options.
To set the export options:
1.

The Design Settings dialog box appears. Select the Export Options tab.
2.
In the Design Sheet section, specify an Excel Template by clicking the ... button, selecting the
template you want to use, and clicking Save.
3.
Click OK.
To create a design sheet based on a previously-customized template after the design has been analyzed:
1.
Click RMxprt>Analysis Setup>Export.

The Export dialog box appears.
2.
Select Customized Design Sheet from the Type pull-down menu.
3.
Choose the Solution Setup from the pull-down menu.
4.
In the Path field, enter the location to export the files to, or use the ellipsis (...) button to
browse to the desired location.
5.
Click OK.
RMxprt will connect to Microsoft Excel according to the set path and automatically import the
relevant data from Design Output into a copy of the customized Design Sheet Template. Specific
data not available in Design Output is shown as N/A, for instance, RS in Slot Sizes is N/A (mm)
when stop type is 1. The post-processing of data is automatically performed, for instance, Winding
Weight is 0.947 (kg).
Note
Several Design Sheet examples are shipped with RMxprt in the examples subdirectory
of your installation.
Related Topics:
Exporting a Maxwell or Simplorer Model
Key Words in Output Data for RMxprt

In Design Output of RMxprt, the literal expressions for various parameters are termed key words
of output data. For example, the Design Output for Line-start Permanent-magnet Synchronous
Motor (lssm) is shown below.
In the Design Output, "Rated Output Power", "Rated Voltage", "Number of Poles", "Frequency",
"Frictional Loss", etc. are all key words of output data. To resort to those key words into Microsoft
Excel worksheet, the corresponding data in the Design Output should be import into the worksheet.
Creating RMxprt Customized Design Sheet Template

As a sample example, the Line-start Permanent-magnet Synchronous Motor (lssm) is used to demonstrate the process for creating a Customized Design Sheet template.
Start Microsoft Excel, rename the blank worksheet file as "lssm" and save it under the path
ansoft\rmxprt5 as shown below.
Design Template of Microsoft Excel Worksheet in Preferred Styles

According to special requirements and preferences, select relevant parameters, arrange the page
formats of worksheet. Taking as example a part of the parameters of the Design Sheet of the Linestart Permanent-magnet Synchronous Motor (lssm), the designed worksheet template is shown
below.
In the template, the yellow-colored areas are reserved for importing data.
Resort to Key Words in Design Output

In the spaces for importing data in the template (shown in yellow), key in = "xxxxx". Within the
double quotation marks, xxxxx stands for the relevant key words as shown below.
Set Boundary for Data Imported into Worksheet for RMxprt

Rmxprt automatically searches for matching key words while importing data into the Microsoft
Excel worksheet. To reduce the searching space, and therefore the searching time, it is possible to
set the searching boundary. RMxprt defines = "" as identification of boundary. In the figure below,
for instance, the cells in the green-colored area are all keyed in with = "" to form boundary. While
importing data, RMxprt will not search below or to the right of the boundary for matching key
words.
Insert Figures into Template for RMxprt

With resort to function Paste, it is possible to insert desired figures into the worksheet template. In
the following example, for instance, four figures of slot types are inserted.
Use Different Languages for RMxprt Design Sheets

It is possible to use a preferred language other than English in the Microsoft Excel worksheet template. In the following example, for instance, Simplified Chinese is used.
Note
Key words are not allowed to be expressed in other languages.
Post-process Data for RMxprt

Using the relevant functions of Microsoft Excel, it is possible to post-process data in the worksheet
template. For example, calculate the weight of a winding using the following formula:
winding weight = number of slots number of conductors per slot

number of parallel wires length of half turns of coil
sectional area of wire specific weight of wire
In the following figure, the formula is entered into the relevant cell as:
=H7*D30*D31*D36*3.14*D32*D32*0.0078/4
6
Running an RMxprt Simulation
After you specify how RMxprt will compute the solution, begin the solution process.
1.
Select a solution setup in the project tree.
2.
Click RMxprt>Analyze.
To run more than one analysis at a time, follow the same procedure while a simulation is running.
The next solution setup will be solved when the previous solution is complete.
To solve every solution setup in a design:
1.
2.
In the project tree, under the design you want to solve, select Analysis.
Click RMxprt>Analyze All.
Each solution setup is solved in the order it appears in the project tree.
Running an RMxprt Simulation 6-1
Aborting RMxprt Analyses

To end the solution process before it is complete:
Right-click in the Progress window, and select Abort from the shortcut menu.
The analysis stops immediately.
If you aborted the solution in the middle of an adaptive pass, the data for that pass or current frequency point is deleted. Any solutions that were completed prior to the one that was aborted are
still available.
6-2 Running an RMxprt Simulation
Re-solving an RMxprt Problem

If you modify a design after generating a solution, the solution in memory will no longer match the
design. The solution setup with the invalid solution is marked with an X in the project tree and in
the Results window.
To generate a new solution after modifying a design, follow the procedure for running a simulation:
1.
Select a solution setup in the project tree.
2.
Click RMxprt>Analyze.
Running an RMxprt Simulation6-3
6-4 Running an RMxprt Simulation
7
Post Processing and Generating
Reports in RMxprt
When RMxprt has completed a solution, you can display and analyze the results in the following
ways:
View solution data.

Specify output variables.
Export a model to be used in Maxwell2D, Maxwell 3D, or Simplorer.
Create a Customized Design Sheet
Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt 7-1
Viewing RMxprt Solution Data

To access the Solutions dialog box, do one of the following:
Click RMxprt>Results>Solution Data.

Right-click Results in the project tree, and then click Solution Data on the shortcut menu.
Right-click Setup1 in the Project tree, and then click Performance on the shortcut menu.
Click the Solution Data button on the toolbar.
The Solutions dialog contains three tabs:
Performance - this contains a Data field with a drop-down menu that allows you to view many
different data tables, which vary with the machine type. Some examples are:
Aux Winding
Full Load Operation
No Load Operation
Permanent Magnet
Rotor Data
Rated Parameters
Stator Slot
Stator Winding
Design Sheet - this displays the contexts of the .res file for the current setup. The file contains
tables with information for such things as (depending on the machine type):
General Data
Stator Data
Rotor Data
Permanent Magnet Data
Rated Operation
No-Load Operation
No Load Magnetic Data
Full Load Data
Winding Arrangement
Transient FEA Input Data
To print the design sheet:

1.
Right-click the design sheet to display the context menu.
7-2 Post Processing and Generating Reports in RMxprt
2.
Select Print from the shortcut menu.

The Print dialog box appears.
3.
Select the printer, and click OK to print.
Curves - this displays the plots that were automatically generated by the solver. You can select
these from a drop-down menu (menu contents vary with the machine type):
Note
Input DC Current vs Speed

Efficiency vs Speed
Output Power vs Speed
Output Torque vs Speed
Induced Coil Voltage at Rated Speed
Air Gap Flux Density
Induced Winding Phase Voltage at Rated Speed
Winding Currents Under Load
Phase Voltage Under Load
You can also open the Solution Data dialog box directly on the Curves tab by clicking
the Curves toolbar button.
To print plots from the Curve tab:

1.
Right-click on the desired plot to display the context menu.
2.
Click Print on the menu to display the Print dialog.
3.
Select the printer, and click OK to print.
Note
The context menu also provides commands that allow the user to change various plot
characteristics such as: trace type and properties such as color; add/edit data markers and
labels; edit axis, legend,a nd title properties. The plot image can also be copied to the
clipboard for pasting in another application. Plot data can also be exported to various
formatted text files that can then be imported into spreadsheets, etc. Refer to Modifying
the Background Properties of a Report for additional information.
Browse Solutions in RMxprt

If you have run different solutions on a design, you can use the RMxprt>Results>Browse Solutions to look through and manage them.
1.
Click RMxprt>Results>Browse Solutions

This displays the Solutions dialog with the Browse tab selected.
From here you can select a design, and view the Setup, Solution and State tables.
2.
Click the Properties button to view the Solution Browser properties dialog.
This contains radio buttons for you to select the tree view. It can be organized as:
Variation / Setup / Solution

Setup / Solution / Variation
Setup /Variation / Solution
Click OK to accept your selection and close the dialog.

3.
From the Solutions dialog, you can also select and delete solutions.
Exporting a Simplorer Model or Customized Design Sheet

To export the model to a Simplorer model, or Customized Design Sheet:
1.
First, solve the design for the specific solution setup from which the export is desired.
Note
2.
Attempting to export without the requisite files present automatically launches

simulation to generate them.
Click RMxprt>Analysis Setup>Export to open the Export dialog box.

You can also right-click on Analysis or Analysis>Setup in the Project Manager and select
Export.
3.
Select one of the following from the Type drop-down list:
Simplorer Model
Customized Design Sheet
4.
Select the setup you want to export from the Solution Setup drop-down list.
5.
Optionally, click the Variation ellipsis [... ] button to specify a design Variation to use during
export.
6.
Specify the Path to store the exported files in by clicking the Path ellipsis [...] button and
browsing to the desired directory. You can also create a new directory, if desired.
7.
Click OK.
For Customized Design Sheets, a <design_sheet_name>.xls file will be generated.
For Simplorer models, three files will be exported:
<project name>_<design name>_<setup name>.sml

<project name>_<design name>_<setup name>_signals.sml
<project name>_<design name>_<setup name>_SimCkt.vbs
You can now use the Simplorer Tools>Run Script command to run the .vbs script to generate the components on the Simplorer schematic. (Refer to the Simplorer online help for
detailed information on running scripts.)
You can now work with the model in the product to which you exported it, and perform other kinds
of analyses.
Related Topics:
Create a Maxwell Design

RMxprt provides a way to export solved models as either a Maxwell 2D or Maxwell 3D design.
Note
All the RMxprt machine types are supported.

Setups for boundaries, excitations, parameters, etc. are automatically created.
Variable definitions and assignments are automatically mapped from the solved RMxprt
design to the Maxwell design.
Creating a Maxwell2D/3D design from an old version (version 15 or older) of a solved
RMxprt design results in the Maxwell2D/3D design being created without any variables
even if the original RMxprt design uses variables. In such cases, the Message Manager
displays a warning message informing the user that the Maxwell design being created
does not contain any variable assignments from the RMxprt design; and recommends resolving the setup to get the variable assignments.
To export the model to a Maxwell 2D Design or Maxwell 3D Design:

1.
Click RMxprt>Analysis Setup>Create Maxwell Design

The Create Maxwell Design dialog box appears.
2.
Select one of the following from the Type drop-down list:
Maxwell 2D Design
Maxwell 3D Design
3.
Select the setup you want to export from the Solution Setup drop-down list.
4.
Optionally, click the [...] button to specify a Variation in the Set Design Variation dialog
box. This allows the user to choose the default variable values to be used in the Maxwell
design being created with variables.
5.
Click OK to create the Maxwell design.
You can now work with the model in the Maxwell2D or Maxwell3D design, add boundaries and
excitations, perform analyses, and analyze results.
Note
For Maxwell 2D/3D designs for motor applications, the computed output mechanical
power at a given constant speed may not reach the desired rated power. Therefore, it is
useful to apply constant power as the mechanical load. In Maxwell 14.0 2D/3D designs
created by RMxprt, the mechanical transient is setup according to the rated mechanical
output power, and equivalent damping is added to accelerate the process approaching to
the rated output power. This setup is visible when Consider Mechanical Transient on
the Mechanical tab of the Motion Setup dialog box is checked.
Creating Reports in RMxprt

After RMxprt has generated a solution, all of the results for that solution are available for analysis.
One of the ways you can analyze your solution data is to create a report, or graphical representation, that displays the relationship between a design's values and the corresponding analysis results.
Reports are created using the Traces dialog box. The available options in the Traces dialog box
depend on the report type you create and the available solution data.
Following is the general procedure for creating a report:
1.
Click RMxprt>Results>Create Report.

The Create Report dialog box appears.
2.
In the Target Design pull-down list, click the design containing the solution data you want to
plot.
3.
In the Report Type pull-down list, click RMxprt.
4.
In the Display Type pull-down list, select the type of report you want to create.
5.
Click OK.
The Traces dialog box appears.
6.
In the Solution pull-down list, click the solution containing the data you want to plot.
7.
To create a new mathematical expression to plot, do the following:

a.
Click Output Variables.

The Output Variables dialog box appears.
b.
Add the expression you want to plot, and then click Done.
8.
Add one or more traces to include in the report.
9.
Click Done.
The report appears in the view window and is listed in the project tree. Once you have created
a report, addition options become available on the Results submenu.
Modifying Reports in RMxprt

To modify the data that is plotted in a report:
1.
In the project tree, right-click the report you want to modify.

A shortcut menu appears
2.
Select Modify Report from the shortcut menu.

The Traces dialog box appears.
3.
Modify the selections in the Traces dialog box as needed.
4.
Click Done when you are finished modifying the report.

The updated report appears in the view window.
To update all modified reports:

Click RMxprt>Results>Update Reports.
Opening All Reports in RMxprt

To open all reports for a project:
Click RMxprt>Results>Open All Reports.
This opens all reports.
To simplify viewing and comparisons, it may be helpful to use Window>Cascade or Window>Tile Horizontally or Window>Tile Vertically commands.
To close all open reports:
Click Window>Close All.
Deleting All Reports in RMxprt

To delete all reports for a project:
Click RMxprt>Results>Delete All Reports.
This deletes all reports for the project.
Selecting the Display Type in RMxprt

The information in a report can be displayed in several formats. Select from the following Display
Type formats in the Create Report dialog box:
Rectangular Plot
A 2D rectangular (x-y) graph.
3D Rectangular Plot A 3D rectangular (x-y-z) graph.

Data Table
A spreadsheet with rows and columns that displays, in numeric form,

selected quantities against a swept variable or another quantity.
Creating 2D Rectangular Plots in RMxprt

A rectangular plot is a 2D, x-y graph of results.
1.

The Create Report window appears.
2.
In the Target Design list, click the design containing the solution data you want to plot.
3.
In the Report Type list, click the data type you want to plot.
4.
In the Display Type list, click Rectangular Plot.
5.
Click OK.
The Traces dialog box appears. The Y tab is selected by default.
6.
7.
Under the Y tab, specify the information to plot along the y-axis:
a.
In the Category list, click the type of information to plot.
b.
In the Quantity list, click the value to plot.
c.
In the Function list, click the mathematical function of the quantity to plot.
Under the X tab, specify the quantity to plot along the x-axis in one of the following ways:
Select Use Primary Sweep.
The first (primary) sweep variable listed under the Sweeps tab will be plotted along the xaxis.
Clear the Use Primary Sweep option, and then select the Category, Quantity, and Function of the quantity to plot on the x-axis. The quantity will be plotted against the primary
sweep variable listed under the Sweeps tab.
8.
Under the Sweeps tab, confirm or modify the sweep variables that will be plotted.
9.
Click Add Trace.

A trace represents one or more lines connecting data points on the graph. The trace is added to
the traces list at the top of the Traces dialog box. Each column lists an axis on the report and
the information that will be plotted on that axis.
10. Optionally, add another trace by following the procedure above.

11. Click Done.
The function of the selected quantity is plotted against the swept variable values or quantities
you specified on an x-y graph. The plot is listed under Results in the project tree.
Related Topics
Sweeping a Variable
Working with Traces
Creating 3D Rectangular Plots in RMxprt

A rectangular plot is a 3D, x-y-z graph of results.
1.

2.
3.
4.
In the Display Type list, click 3D Rectangular Plot.
5.
Click OK.
The Traces dialog box appears. The Z tab is selected by default.
6.
7.
Under the Z tab, specify the information to plot along the z-axis:
a.
In the Category list, click the type of information to plot.
b.
In the Quantity list, click the value to plot.
c.
In the Function list, click the mathematical function of the quantity to plot.
Under the Y tab, specify the information to plot along the y-axis in one of the following ways:
Select Use Secondary Sweep.

The second (secondary) sweep variable listed under the Sweeps tab will be plotted along
the y-axis.
Clear the Use Secondary Sweep option, and then select the Category, Quantity, and
Function of the quantity to plot on the y-axis. The quantity you select will be plotted
against the secondary sweep variable listed under the Sweeps tab.
8.
Under the X tab, specify the information to plot along the x-axis in one of the following ways:

The first (primary) sweep variable listed under the Sweeps tab will be plotted along the xaxis.
9.
Clear the Use Primary Sweep option, and then select the Category, Quantity, and Function of the quantity to plot on the x-axis. The quantity you select will be plotted against the
primary sweep variable listed under the Sweeps tab.
Under the Sweeps tab, confirm or modify the swept variables that will be plotted.
10. Click Add Trace.

A trace represents one or more lines connecting data points on the graph. The trace is added to
the traces list at the top of the Traces dialog box. Each column lists an axis on the report and
the information that will be plotted on that axis.
12. Click Done.
The function of the selected quantity or quantities is plotted against the values you specified on
an x-y-z graph. The plot is listed under Results in the project tree.
Related Topics
Sweeping a Variable
Working with Traces
Creating Data Tables in RMxprt

A data table is a spreadsheet with rows and columns that displays, in numeric form, selected quantities against a swept variable or other quantities.
1.

2.
3.
4.
In the Display Type list, click Data Table.
5.
Click OK.
The Traces dialog box appears. The Y tab is selected by default.
6.
7.
Under the Y tab, select the quantity you are interested in and its associated function:
a.
In the Category list, click the type of information to display.
b.
In the Quantity list, click the value to display.
c.
In the Function list, click the mathematical function to use for the quantity.
Under the X tab, select the values you want to plot the quantity against in one of the following
ways:
The quantity you selected in step 5 will be displayed against the first (primary) sweep
variable listed under the Sweeps tab.
Clear the Use Primary Sweep option, and then select the Category, Quantity, and Function of the quantity to plot against the quantity you selected in step 5. This quantity will be
plotted against the primary swept variable listed under the Sweeps tab.
8.
Under the Sweeps tab, confirm or modify the swept variables that will be plotted.
9.
Click Add Trace.

In the context of a data table, a trace represents a quantity's value at another quantity's value or
at selected swept variable values. The trace is added to the traces list at the top of the Traces
dialog box.

11. Click Done.
The quantity you selected in step 5 is listed at each variable value or additional quantity value
you specified. The data table is listed under Results in the project tree.
Related Topics
Sweeping a Variable
Working with Traces
Working with Traces in RMxprt

A trace in a 2D or 3D report defines one or more curves on a graph. A trace in a data table defines
part of the displayed matrix of text values.
The values used for a plot's axes can be variables in the design or functions and expressions based
on the design's solutions. If you have solved one or more variables at several values, you can
"sweep" over some or all of those values, resulting in a curve in 2D or 3D space.
A report can include any number of traces and, for rectangular graphs, up to four independent yaxes.
In general, to add a trace to a report:
1.
In the Traces dialog box, specify the information you want to plot along the appropriate axes.
2.
Click Add Trace.

A trace is added to the traces list at the top of the Traces dialog box. The trace represents the
function of the quantity you selected and will be plotted against other quantities or swept variable values. Each column lists an axis on the report and the information that will be plotted on
that axis.
You can modify the information to be plotted by typing the name of the quantity or sweep variable to plot along an axis directly in the boxes.
The trace will be visible in the report when you click Done.
Note
The Traces dialog box can be accessed via the Create Report dialog box.
Removing Traces in RMxprt

You can traces from the traces list in the following ways:
To remove one trace from the report:
Select the trace you want to remove from the traces list, and then click Remove Trace.
To remove all traces from the report:
Click Remove All Traces.
Related Topics
Working with Traces
Replacing Traces in RMxprt

To replace a trace in the traces list with a different trace definition:
1.
Select the trace you want to remove from the traces list.
2.
In the Traces dialog box, specify the information you want to plot along the appropriate axes.
3.
Click Replace Trace.

The trace you selected is removed, and the new trace information you specified replaces it in
the traces list.
4.
Click Done.
Related Topics
Working with Traces
Adding Blank Traces in RMxprt

To add a blank trace to the traces list:
Click Add Blank Trace.
You can now type the quantities to plot in the appropriate axes boxes.
Related Topics
Working with Traces
Sweeping a Variable in a Report in RMxprt

In RMxprt, a swept variable is an intrinsic, project, or design variable that typically has more than
one value. From the Traces dialog box, you can plot any calculated or derived quantity against one
or more of the swept variable's values.
When you click the Sweeps tab in the Traces dialog box, the first sweep variable listed is the "primary sweep". If you are creating a 3D report, the second sweep variable listed is the "secondary
sweep". Any additional sweep variables are represented as additional curves on the graph.
To modify which variable is the primary sweep variable:
Click the Name box for the primary sweep variable, and then click the variable name you want
to be the primary sweep variable.
To modify the secondary sweep variable or any additional sweep variable, follow the same procedure.
To modify the values that will be plotted for a variable:
1.
Click a variable in the table.

To the right, all of the possible values for the selected variable are listed.
2.
Select All Values.

All of the selected variable's values are plotted.
Alternatively, clear All Values and select the specific values to plot against the selected
quantity.
Selecting a Function in RMxprt

The value of a quantity being plotted depends upon its mathematical function, which you select
from the Function list in the Report dialog box. The available, valid functions depend on the type
of quantity (real or complex) that is being plotted. The function is applied to the quantity which is
implicitly defined by all the swept and current variables.
These functions can also be applied to previously specified Quantities and Functions as Range
Functions when using the Set Range Function dialog.
Some of these functions can operate along an entire curve. These are: deriv, min, max, integ, avg,
rms, pk2pk, cang_deg and cang_rad. These functions have syntax as follows:
deriv(quantity) implicitly implies derivative over the primary sweep

deriv(quantity, SweepVariable) explicitly means derivative over the sweep variable specified
in the second argument (such as "Freq").
You can select from the following functions in the Function list:
abs
Absolute value
acos
Arc cosine
acosh
Hyperbolic arc cosine
ang_deg
Angle (phase) of a complex number, cut at +/-180
ang_rad
Angle in radians
asin
Arc sine
asinh
Hyperbolic arc sine
atan
Arc tangent
atanh
Hyperbolic arc tangent
avg
Average of first parameter over the second parameter
avgabs
Absolute value of average.
cang_deg
Cumulative angle (phase) of the first parameter (a complex number) in

degrees, along the second parameter (typically sweep variable). Returns a
double precision value cut at +/-180.
cang_rad
Cumulative angle of the first parameter in radians along a second

parameter (typically a sweep variable) Returns a double precision value.
conjg
Conjugate of the complex number.
cos
Cosine
cosh
Hyperbolic cosine
crestfactor
Peak/RMS (root mean square) for the selected simulation quantity
dB(x)
20*log10(|x|)
dBm(x)
10*log10(|x|) +30
dBW(x)
10*log10(|x|)
deriv
Derivative of first parameter over second parameter.
even
Returns 1 if integer part of the number is even; returns 0 otherwise
exp
Exponential function (the natural anti-logarithm)
formfactor
Returns root mean square RMS/Mean Absolute Value for the selected
simulation quantity.
iae
Returns the integral of the absolute deviation of the selected quantity from
a target value that is entered via the additional argument. To use this
function, you need to open the Add Trace Characteristics dialog and select the
Error category.
im
Imaginary part of the complex number
int
Truncated integer function
integ
Integral of the selected quantity. Uses trapezoidal area..
integabs
Absolute value of integral.
ise
Returns the integral of the squared deviation of the selected quantity from
a target value that is entered via an additional argument. To use this
Error category.
itae
Returns the time-weighted absolute deviation of the selected quantity

from a target value that is entered via an additional argument.To use this
Error category.
itse
Returns the time-weighted squared deviation of the selected qty from a

target value that is entered via an additional argument.To use this function,
you need to open the Add Trace Characteristics dialog and select the Error
category.
j0
Bessel function of the first kind (0th order)
j1
Bessel function of the first kind (1st order)
ln
Natural logarithm
log10
Logarithm base 10
lsidelobex
The x value for the left side lobe: the next highest value to the left of the
max value.
The y value for the left side lobe: the next highest value to the left of the
max value.
lsidelobey
mag
Magnitude of the complex number
max
Maximum of magnitudes.
max_swp
Maximum value of a sweep.
min
Minimum magnititude.
min_swp
Minimum value of a sweep.
nint
Nearest integer
normalize
Divides each value within a trace by the maximum value of the trace. ex.
normalize(mag(x))
odd
Returns 1 if integer part of the number is odd; returns 0 otherwise
overshoot
Obtains the peak overshoot over a point (double argument)
per
Calculates period.
pk2pk
Peak to peak. Difference between max and min of the first parameter over
the second parameter. Returns the peak-to-peak value for the selected
pkavg
Returns the ratio of the peak to peak-to-average for the selected quantity.
pmax
Period max.
pmin
Period minimum
prms
Period Root Mean Square.
pulsefall9010
Pulse fall time of the selected simulation quantity according to the 90%10% estimate.
pulsefront9010 Pulse front time of the selected simulation quantity according to the 10%90% estimate.
pulsefront3090 Pulse front time of the selected simulation quantity according to the 30%90% estimate.
pulsemax
Pulse maximum from the front and tail estimates for the selected
pulsemaxtime
Time at which the maximum pulse value of the selected simulation

quantity is reached.
pulsemin
Pulse minimum from the front and tail estimates for the selected
pulsemintime
Tiime at which the minimum pulse value of the selected simulation

quantity is reached.
pulsetail50
Pulse tail time of the selected simulation quantity from the virtual peak to
50%.
pulsewidth5050 Pulse width of the selected simulation quantity as measured from the 50%
points on the pulse front and pulse tail.
PulseWidth
Functions
pw_plus
Pulse width of first positive pulse
pw_plus_max
Max. Pulse width of input stream
pw_plus_min
Min. Pulse width of input stream
pw_plus_avg
Average of the positive pulse width input stream
pw_plus_rms
RMS of the positive pulse width input stream
pw_minus_max Max. Pulse width of input stream

pw_minus_min Min. Pulse width of input stream
pw_minus_avg Average of the negative pulse width input stream
pw_minus_rms RMS of the negative pulse width input stream
polar
Converts the complex number in rectangular to polar
re
Real part of the complex number
rect
Converts the complex number in polar to rectangular
rem
Fractional part
ripple
Returns the ripple factor (AC RMS/Mean) for the selected quantity.
rms
Returns total root mean square of the selected quantity.
rmsAC
Returns the AC RMS for the selected quantity.
rsidelobex
The x value for the right side lobe: the next highest value to the right of
the max value.
rsidelobey
The y value for the right side lobe: the next highest value to the right of
the max value.
sgn
Sign extraction
sin
Sine
sinh
Hyperbolic sine
sqrt
Square root
tan
Tangent
tanh
Hyperbolic tangent
Undershoot
Obtains the peak undershoot over a point (double argument).
XAtYMax
Threshold crossing time: report first time (x value) at which an output

quantity crosses YMax.
XAtYMin
Threshold crossing time: report first time (x value) at which an output

quantity crosses a user definable threshold (YMin).
XAtYVal
Returns the X value at the first occurance of Y value.
xdb10beamdwi Width between left and right occurrences of values x db10 from max. Takes 'x'
as argument (3.0 default). To use this function, you need to open the Add Trace
dth
Characteristics dialog and select the Radiation category.
xdb20beamwidt Width between left and right occurrences of values x db20 from max. Takes 'x'
as argument (3.0 default) To use this function, you need to open the Add Trace
h
Characteristics dialog and select the Radiation category.
y0
Bessel function of the second kind (0th order)
y1
Bessel function of the second kind (1st order)
YAtXMax
Threshold crossing time: report first time (y value) at which an output

quantity crosses XMax.
YAtXMin
Threshold crossing time: report first time (y value) at which an output

quantity crosses a user definable threshold (XMin).
YatXVal
Returns the Y value at the first occurance of X value.
Selecting a Parameter, Variable, or Quantity to Plot in RMxprt

Each trace in a report includes a quantity that is plotted along an axis. The quantity being plotted
can be a value that was calculated by RMxprt, such as L11, a value from a calculated expression.
To select a parameter, variable, or quantity to plot:

1.
In the Traces dialog box, select one of the following categories:

Variables
User-defined project or design variables.
Output Variables Derived quantities RMxprt project or design variables, parameters or

solution curves.
2.
Select a quantity to plot from the Quantity list. The available quantities depend on the selected
category and the setup of the design.
Creating Quick Reports in RMxprt

Following is the procedure for creating a quick report.
1.
On the Project tree, select a setup or sweep icon of interest.
2.
Right-click to display the shortcut menu and select Quick Report.

The Quick Report dialog appears.
3.
Select the one or more categories for the report from the list and click OK.
A rectangular plot for each selected category displays. The new plot or plots appear in the
Project tree under the Results icon.
Related Topics
Creating Reports
Modifying Reports
RMxprt Quick Report Categories
RMxprt Quick Report Categories

When using the Quick Reports function for Solutions, the following report categories may be
available depending upon the solution parameters requested, solution type, etc:
Category
Description
Coil Voltage
Report voltages in the machine coil.
Current
Report currents for each line or phase of the machine,

source current, line current, armature current.
Flux Density
Report flux density in the machine air gap, flux

linkages.
Induced
Voltage
Report Induced Line and Phase voltages.
Misc.
Report miscellaneous quantities specific to the

machine type such as power factor, torque to current
ratio.
Percentage
Report machine efficiency.
Power
Report air gap power, output power.
Torque
Report cogging torque, output torque, magnet

generated torque, induction torque.
Voltage
Report Line and Phase voltage.
Angle
Reports power factor angle.
Angular Speed Reports angular speed.

Inductance
Reports air gap permeance.
8
Specifying RMxprt Winding Data
To define the winding data for an RMxprt machine

1.
In the project tree, under Machine, open the folder that requires a winding, and double-click
Winding to open the winding Properties dialog box.
For some machine types this would be Machine>Rotor>Winding, for others,

Machine>Stator>Winding.
You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.
2.
Specify the desired settings.
3.
Click OK to close the Properties dialog box.
The specific properties available depend on the specific machine.

The following machine types have winding data available:
Three-Phase Induction Motors (stator winding) and (rotor winding)

Three-Phase Synchronous Machines (stator winding) and (rotor winding)
Brushless PMDC Motors (stator winding)
Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines (stator winding)
PMDC Motors (rotor winding)
Switched Reluctance Motors (stator winding)
Line-Start Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motors (stator winding)
Universal Motors (stator winding) and (rotor winding)
General DC Machines (rotor winding)
Claw-Pole Alternators (stator winding)
Specifying RMxprt Winding Data 8-1
Setting the Winding Type

RMxprt can automatically arrange almost all commonly used single- or double-layer poly-phase
ac windings provided all coils have the same number of turns. Users do not need to define coils one
by one. For a double-layer winding, RMxprt can also handle the coils with half turns which are
arranged in the order of even, odd, even, odd, , as long as it is physically possible.
RMxprt also provides a very flexible tool Winding Editor in order for the users to design a variety of special winding types according to their own needs, such as compound single- and doublelayer winding, big- and small-phase-spread variable-pole multiple-speed winding, sine-wave threephase winding, and so forth. The Winding Editor is available to the following types of electric
machines:
1.
Three-phase induction motors
2.
Single-phase induction motors
3.
Three-phase synchronous motors and generators
4.
Line-start permanent-magnet synchronous motors
5.
Claw-pole alternators
6.
Adjustable-speed permanent-magnet synchronous motors and generators
7.
Brushless permanent-magnet DC motors
When you edit the AC winding of a new design for the first time, RMxprt creates a default winding
arrangement based on the basic winding specifications: Number of Phases, Number of Poles,
Number of Slots, Winding Layers, Conductors per Slot, and Coil Pitch. Then you can edit the
winding configuration based on the default arrangement.
Winding Types Available for Machines

Use the Winding Type dialog to set the Winding type.
1.
To display the Winding Type dialog double-click on the Winding property button.
Passing the cursor over the buttons for the Winding types changes the graphic to show the
available windings for the motor in the design. Choices differ depending on the motor. A
Winding Editor selection does not have a graphic.
Selections for the Three Phase Induction Motor (stator winding) and (rotor winding), ThreePhase Synchronous Machine (stator winding) and (rotor winding), Brushless Permanent Magnet DC Motor (stator winding), Adjust Speed Synchronous Machine (stator winding), Line
Start PM Synchronous Motor (stator winding), and Claw Pole alternator (stator winding)
include:
Editor - enable the Winding Editor

Whole Coiled
Half Coiled
Selections for the DC Permanent Magnet Motor (rotor winding) and Universal Motor include
(stator winding) and (rotor winding):
Lap
8-2 Specifying RMxprt Winding Data
Wave
Selection for the General DC Machines (rotor winding) include:
Lap
Wave
Frogleg
Selections for single-phase induction motor include:
Editor - enable the Winding Editor

Lap - 90 deg phase belt 2-layer coil for both single and double layer
Sin_1 - first class sinusoidal coil four double layer only
Sin_2 - second class sinusoidal coil four double layer only
The Switched Reluctance motor does not involve winding selections.

2.
Select the Winding Type and click OK.

This closes the window and sets the Winding Type property. If you select the Editor type, It
also enables the Machine>Edit Layout command on the menu bar.
Enable the Winding Editor

Setting the Winding Type property to Editor enables the command Machine>Edit Layout on the
menu bar. To display the dialog box Winding Editor:
1.
Open the Winding Properties window and set the Winding Type value to Editor. To do this,
double-click on the button Winding Type value to display the Winding Type selection window.
2.
Select Editor as the Winding Type and click OK. This closes the Winding Type selection window and sets the Winding Type Value to Editor. It also enables the command Machine>Winding>Edit Layout on the menu bar. Now the Machine Editor window displays the default
winding arrangement.
3.
Click Machine>Winding>Edit Layout. This displays the dialog box Winding Editor as
shown. The dialog box Winding Editor includes functions that do not appear in the tab sheet
Winding Editor in the RMxprt Machine Editor window.
4.
Edit Winding Configuration

Each row of the winding data table in the dialog box Winding Editor in Figure 3.13 is identified
with the coil index in the column Coil. This information is displayed in the tab sheet Winding Editor in the RMxprt Machine Editor window as well, but it is editable in the dialog box Winding Editor.
The winding data table contains four columns:
Phase
is for the phase to which the coil belongs.
Turns
is for the number of turns of the coil.
In Slots
is for the slot number with the coil side current flowing in ('flow-inside' for short). If 2 Layers are specified in the Winding Properties
window, the slot number ends with a "T" to show the top layer.
Out Slots
is for the slot number with the coil side current flowing out ("flow-outside" for short). If 2 Layers are specified in the Winding Properties
window, the slot number ends with a "B" to show the bottom layer.
Setting the Number of Winding Layers

To set the number of winding layers:
1.
2.
Open the Winding Properties window by double-clicking on the Winding icon in the properties window.
Use the drop-down menu in the Winding Layers field to set the number as 1 or 2.
This sets the winding layers used in the winding.
The number of layers selected makes a difference in the display of data in the Winding Editor.
Connecting and Disconnecting Windings

When you have specified the winding data, you can execute the following commands to automatically connect or disconnect the windings.
Machine>Winding>Connect All Coils

Upon executing, the graphical display in the main window shows the connections.
Machine>Winding>Disconnect All Coils

Upon executing, the graphical display in the main window updates to remove the connection.
Related Topics
View Winding Connections
Poly-phase Winding Editor

RMxprt provides a Winding Editor in order for users to design variety of special winding types
according to their own needs, such as compound single- and double-layer winding, big- and smallphase-spread variable-pole multiple-speed winding, sine-wave three-phase winding, and so forth.
The Winding Editor is available to the following types of electric machines:
Three-phase Induction Motor

Three-phase Synchronous Motor
Three-phase Synchronous Generator
Permanent-magnet Synchronous Generator
Line-start Permanent-magnet Synchronous Motor
Adjustable-speed Permanent-magnet Synchronous Motor
Brushless Permanent-magnet DC Motor
Claw-pole Alternator
You input data for Number of Poles in the Machine Properties window and data for the Number
of Slots and Slot Type in the Stator Properties window. You set the Number of Slots in the
Winding Properties window. RMxprt automatically arranges the winding layout and display the
relevant information that has been specified in the Winding Editor tab of the RMxprt main window. As long as the edited winding data have been saved, the Winding Editor tab will display the
last saved winding data whenever Winding Editor dialog is launched. The left top part of the
Winding Editor tab shows the winding data, as does the Winding Editor dialog. In this area, the
total number of rows equals half the number of slots.
Enabling the Winding Editor Dialog
Setting the Winding Type property to Editor enables the Machine>Edit Layout command on the
menu bar. To display the Winding Editor dialog:
1.
Open the Winding Properties window and set the Winding property to Editor.
To do this, double-click on the Winding property button to display the Winding Type selection window.
2.
Select Editor as the Winding Type and click OK.

This closes the Winding Type window and sets the Winding Type property to Editor. It also
enables the Machine>Edit Layout command on the menu bar.
3.
Click Machine>Edit Layout.

This displays the Winding Editor dialog. The Winding Editor dialog box includes functions
that do not appear in the RMxprt main window Winding Editor tab.
You can also invoke the Winding Editor dialog by:
a.
Right-click on the data table section of the Winding Editor tab of the main window.
b.
This displays an Edit Layout button.
c.
Click the Edit Layout button to display the Winding Editor dialog.
You can also display the Winding Editor dialog by:

a.
Right click in the Winding Editor tab main window display.

This displays a shortcut menu.
b.
Click Edit Layout from the shortcut menu.
Each row of the winding data is identified with coil index in the Coil column. This information is
displayed in the Winding Editor tab in the RMxprt Main window, and it editable in the Winding
Editor dialog.
Column Phase is for the phase to which the coil belongs.

Column Turns is for the number of turns of coil.
Column In Slots is for the slot number with the coil side current flowing in ('flow-in-side' for
short). If 2 Layers are specified in the Winding Properties window, the slot number ends with a
"T" to show the top layer.
Column Out Slots is for the slot number with the coil side current flowing out ('flow-out-side'
for short). If 2 Layers are specified in the Winding Properties window, the slot number ends
with a "B" to show the bottom layer.
By changing the belonging phase in column Phase, the number of turns in column Turns, the flowin-side slot number in column In Slot, the flow-out-side slot number in column Out Slot for each
coil, it is possible to arrange the distribution of coils of single and double layer winding of any type
required.
The Winding Editor dialog also includes three check boxes:
Periodic Multiplier: indicates the possibility to select the number of unit machines for editing
winding arrangement. It has a drop-down menu to show the possible numbers for the periodic
multiplier.
When checked, the pull-down list box to the right displays the numbers of unit machines for
selection. Selecting 1 means whole slots are considered as one unit machine, and all coils is
listed in the table of the edit window. Selecting 2 lists half of the total coils in the table, and
whole slots are divided into two unit machines, etc. When the check box Periodic Multiplier:
is unchecked, the pull-down list box to the right is grayed (enabled); all the coils are listed in
the table.
Constant Turns.
Checking the check box (multiple choices) Constant Turns indicates that the number of turns
keeps constant and the column Turns in the table is grayed (disabled). If the check box Constant Turns is unchecked, the column Turns in the table is brightened allowing for editing
and modifying the number of turns.
Constant Pitch
Checking this box grays the Out Slots column to the values cannot be edited. It means that the
coil pitch is constant. For two-layer windings, all flow-in-side slots are defined as top layer,
and all flow-out-side slots as bottom layer. The flow-out-side slot number is automatically
computed based on the input in the edit box Coil Pitch in Stator2 page in RMxprt window, and
Out Slot column is disabled.
When the check box Constant Pitch is unchecked, the column Out Slot is enabled to allow
arbitrarily changing slot pitch for each coil.
The Winding Editor dialog includes three command buttons.
Click the command button Default in the window Winding Editor, all the data in the table
resumes to the situation of data from automatic arrangement by RMxprt.
Click the command button Reset in the window Winding Editor, all the data in the table
resumes to the situation of data when the window Winding Editor was first opened, or
resumes to the data that you have saved.
Click OK to accept the current values and close the Winding Editor dialog.
Windings Basic Terminology

Conductor
A conductor refers to a half turn of a coil. A conductor may be formed with one insulated wire, or
with several strands of insulated wires.
Strands
A conductor may consist of several wires of same or different sizes stranded together. The number
of strands is also called number of wires per conductor. The conductor current may not uniformly
distribute among all wires, but the current density is uniformly distributed.
Coil
A coil is wound with several turns, each turn consisting of two conductors. Coils are generally
wound with insulation-wrapped electromagnetic wire continuously on a winding mould. However,
coils with single-turn for heavy current are often formed with two separate thick conductors. A
thick conductor is hammered onto the winding mould to form a half-coil. The linear part of a conductor imbedded into a slot of iron core is termed effective side.
Coil Pitch
The number of slots of the armature iron core spanned by the two effective sides of a coil is termed
coil pitch, denoted by y. For instance, if the side of a coil in the 1-st slot spans 8 slots and is connected to the side of the coil in the 9-th slot, the coil pitch of the coil is y = 8.
Full coil pitch:
coil pitch = pole pitch
Short coil pitch:
coil pitch < pole pitch
Long coil pitch:
coil pitch > pole pitch, usually used in variable-pole multiple-speed machines
Pole pitch:
distance between two contiguous poles measured in number of slots.
polepitch = totalnumberofslots
--------------------------------------------------numberofpoles
Coil Set
The coils belonging to the same phase under one pole are connected in series as a coil set.
Winding
The coils or coil sets of a phase are connected according to certain rules to form a phase winding. A
phase may consist of several branches connected in parallel. Every branch must produce exactly
the same back emf and must have the same resistance. As a result, the phase winding current is uniformly distributed among all branches.
In summary, a winding may be connected with several branches in parallel; each branch consists
of one or more coil sets connected in series; a coil set may have several series coils; a coil is wound
with a number of turns; a turn is formed by two conductors; a conductor may be stranded by one
or more same- or different-size wires.
Poly Phase AC Winding

The common armature winding of poly-phase ac machines is catalogued and classified as shown in
the following table.
Polyphase AC Winding
Double layer
Variable-pole multiple speed type

Fractional slot number type
Wave-type
Concentric type
Lap Type
Single Layer
Crossed Concentric type (whole coiled or half coiled)

Crossed Chain-type (whole coiled or half coiled)
Concentric type (whole coiled or half coiled)
Lap-type (whole coiled or half coiled)
Chain-type (whole coiled or half coiled)
Compound layer
Whole-coiled Windings
When the coils of an AC winding are connected so that there are as many coil sets per phase as
there are poles, the winding is called "whole-coiled."
Whole Coiled Single Layer
Whole Coiled Double Layer
Half-coiled Windings
When the coils are connected so that there is only one coil set per phase per pair of poles, the winding is called "half-coiled."
Half Coiled Single Layer
Half Coiled Double Layer
Single-Layer Windings
All the conductors in one slot are connected in series with all the conductors in another slot to form
a single-layer coil. You set the number of winding layers in the Winding properties window, Winding tab. Comparing to double-layer type, this type is characterized by
Number of coils halved;

No need for insulation between layers, therefore higher slot filling factor;
Coil pitch depends on the connection, and is not adjustable;
Being widely used in small capacity electric machines.
According to different layouts of the end winding, single-layer windings are classified as chain-,
lap-, concentric- and crossed-types.
Chain-type Windings
The name single-layer chain-type is from the linked chain-like developed winding diagram. For a
chain-type winding, every coil set has only one coil.
Half-coiled Chain-type Winding
An example of three-phase 6-pole 18-slot single-layer half-coiled chain-type winding is shown in
the following figure.
Whole-coiled Chain-type Winding

An example of three-phase 4-pole 24-slot single-layer whole-coiled chain-type winding is shown in
the following figure.
Lap-type Windings
The name single-layer lap-type is from the lapped layout of end connection. In a lap-type winding,
at least one coil set has 2 or more coils which are overlapped each other. If some coil sets have only
one coil, this winding type is also called "crossed lap-type".
Half-coiled Lap-type Winding

An example of three-phase 4-pole 24-slot single-layer half-coiled lap-type winding is shown in the
figure on the left, and an example of three-phase 8-pole 36-slot single-layer half-coiled crossed laptype windings is shown in the following figure on the right.
Whole-coiled Lap-type Winding

An example of three-phase 4-pole 48-slot single-layer whole-coiled lap-type winding is shown on
the left, and an example of three-phase 4-pole 36-slot single-layer whole-coiled crossed lap-type
winding is shown on the right1
Concentric-type Windings
In a concentric-type winding, at least one coil set has 2 or more coils and non coils are overlapped
each other. If some coil sets have only one coil, this winding type is also called "crossed concentrictype".
The single-layer concentric-type is formed of coils with different coil pitch, but with the same central line and of concentric-circle-like, therefore is named concentric-type. Its end connection can be
arranged in layers, and therefore is convenient to imbed into slots. Nevertheless, the end magnetic
leakage is a bit bigger.
Half-coiled Concentric-type Winding
An example of three-phase 4-pole 24-slot single-layer half-coiled concentric-type winding is
shown on the left, and an example of three-phase 8-pole 36-slot single-layer half-coiled crossed
concentric-type winding is shown on the right.
Whole-coiled Concentric-type Winding

An example of three-phase 4-pole 48-slot single-layer whole-coiled concentric-type winding is
shown on the left, and an example of three-phase 4-pole 36-slot single-layer whole-coiled crossed
concentric-type winding is shown on the right.
Double-Layer Windings
In this type, the conductors in a slot are arranged in upper and lower layers. One side of each coil is
imbedded in the upper layer in one slot and the other side is imbedded in the lower layer in another
slot. You set the number of winding layers in the Winding properties window, Winding tab. Comparing to single-layer-type, this type is characterized by:
Number of coils doubled;

Need for insulation between layers, therefore lower slot filling factor, and danger in electric
breakdown between phases;
Adjustable coil pitch, therefore possible weakening of harmonic emfs with proper short pitch
factor to improve electromagnetic properties of electric machines;
Being widely used in electric machines with capacity over 10 kW.
For the single speed electric machine, the double-layer winding typically adopts whole-coiled type.
For the double speed electric machine with doubling number of poles, the double-layer winding is
whole-coiled in high speed, half-coiled in low speed.
According to different coil shapes, double-layer windings are classified as lap-, concentric- and
wave-types.
Double-layer Lap-type Winding

An example of three-phase 4-pole 24-slot whole-coiled double-layer lap-type windings (short pitch
y = 5) is shown below.
Double-layer Concentric-type Winding

An example of three-phase 4-pole 24-slot whole-coiled double-layer concentric-type windings
(short pitch y = 5) is shown below.
Double-layer Wave-type Winding

The name double-layer wave-type is from the wave-like developed winding diagram as shown
below.
Compared to lap-type:
The winding of each phase connects the coils under different poles in series in one round, and
returns to the left to the first coil, then winds the next round, and so on so forth until all the
coils belonging to this phase are connected.
This type is usually used in single-turn preformed hard coil for low voltage high current electric machines.
This type needs less connection wire between poles.
Fractional-Pitch Winding
First, introduce a number q, called number of slots per pole per phase, which is defined as
q=
total number of slots

number of poles number of phases
A fractional-pitch winding has a fractional number
q = b
c
d
An example of three-phase 6-pole 45-slot fractional-pitch double-layer winding

1
q=2
2 , short pitch y = 7, pole pitch
=7
1
2 ) is shown here.
Auto-arrangement of AC Windings
RMxprt can arrange these windings automatically if all coils have the same number of turns. This
section describes the process to automatically arrange the coil distribution.For winding layout display in RMxprt, the lap-type is default if windings are automatically arranged. If a concentric-type
layout display is desired, the winding can be defined by winding editor, as described in the next
section.
The wave-type winding is effective to a lap-type winding, and is also displayed as a lap-type winding.
Star Vector Diagram
The conductors (or coils) in slots produce emf (or mmf), which can be expressed with unit vector.
When the electric machine has number of pole p, and number of slots Z, the angular phase difference in electric degrees between two contiguous slots is
p 180
Z
Drawing the vectors of emfs (or mmfs) in all the slots according to their phase angles forms the star
vector diagram of the winding. The figure below shows an example of the star vector diagram of 4pole 24-slot winding.
If there exists the greatest common factor t between the number of slots Z and the number of pole
pairs pp (= p/2), the star vector diagram repeats t times, i.e. the winding has t periods. Let
Z
Z0 =
t ,
and
p0 =
p
t ,
then Z0 and p0 construct a complete star vector diagram and form a unit electric machine. For the
whole-pitch winding electric machine (q, as shown later, is an integer), t = p/2. For the fractionalpitch winding electric machine,
c
Z
q=
=b+
d
mp
where m is the number of phases. If t > 1, the angular phase difference between two contiguous
vectors is
360
=
Z0
and the difference between the ordinal numbers of the slots of two contiguous vectors is
m(bd + c )G 1
y0 =
d
where G is a minimum integer to make y0 equal to an integer (y0 should take into account the possible reverse connection of coils under the contiguous pole).
Phase Spread
In the star vector diagram of a unit electric machine, the range occupied by the vectors of each
phase under one pole is termed phase spread, expressed in electric degrees or number of slots. For a
single-layer winding, the phase spread is 180/m (m the number of phases). The phase spread of a
double-layer half-coiled winding is 360/m, and the phase spread of a double-layer full-coiled
winding is 180/m.
The phase spread of a 2-phase winding is always 90 (= 180/m). Therefore, a 2-phase winding
cannot take the double-layer half-coiled winding type. The windings for single-phase induction
motor are also considered as 2-phase windings.
When the number of phases is an even number of greater than or equal to 4, the phase spread is
always 360/m. Therefore, a winding with even number of phases (4, 6, ) can take only the double-layer half-coiled winding type.
When the number of phases is an odd number of greater than or equal to 3, the phase spread can be
either 360/m or 180/m. Therefore, a winding with odd number of phases (3, 5, ) can take any
winding types.
Coil Arrangement
Coil arrangement is completed by the following processes. First, draw the star vector diagram
based on number of slots and number of poles. Then divide the whole region (360 electric degrees)
to several phase spreads, which is derived from the number of phases and the winding type. Finally,
assign all phase spreads to each phase in such a way that the axis of each succeeded phase lags by
360/m electric degrees (90 electric degrees for 2 phases).
Double-layer Windings
Take a three-phase winding as an example. The width of phase spread of half-coiled winding is
360o / 3 = 120o, the sequence of the phase spread is A, B, C. For whole-coiled winding, the width
of phase spread is 180o / 3 = 60o, the sequence of phase spread is A, C, B, A, C, B, where the
phase spread with negative sign is termed negative phase spread.
The winding types can be set in the Winding Type panel for a machine that includes these options
(in this case, a brushless permanent magnetic DC motor), for double-layer whole-coiled windings
as shown in on the left and double-layer half-coiled windings as shown on the right.
The star vector diagram of a three-phase whole-coiled (60o-phase-spread) winding is shown below
on the left, and that of a half-coiled (120o phase spread) winding is shown below on the right.
Single-layer Windings
The winding layers can be set in the properties window for the winding, for single-layer wholecoiled windings as shown on the left and single-layer half-coiled windings as shown on the right.
The phase spread of a three-phase single-layer whole-coiled or half-coiled winding is 60o, and the
star vector diagram is the same as the double-layer whole-coiled winding.
Fractional-pitch Windings
The number of slots per pole per phase of fractional-pitch winding is a mixed number.
c
d
In the unit electric machine, the numbers of slots occupied by phase spread are not all the same, but
repeat with the radix d. In each d poles, there are c poles with the slot number of phase spread equal
to b + 1 (big phase spread), d c poles with the slot number of phase spread equal to b (small phase
spread).
q=b
Take as an example a three-phase 10-pole 36-slot fractional-pitch winding with phase spread of
60. The number of slots per pole per phase of fractional-pitch winding is
q=
36
1
=1
3 10
5
the greatest common factor between the number of slots 36 and the number of pole pairs 5 is t = 1,
the angular phase difference between two contiguous vectors in the star vector diagram is
360 o
= 10 o
36
the difference between the ordinal numbers of the slots of two contiguous vectors is (G = 2)
3(1 5 + 1) 2 1
=7
5
the repetition radix d = 5. In each 5 pole region, each phase has big phase spread of 1 + 1 = 2 slots
under 1 pole, and small phase spread of 1 slot under 4 poles. The repeating format is 2 1 1 1 1 for
phase A. The repetition of phase spread distribution for all phases is shown in the following table.
y0 =
Slot number
Phase spread
Slot number
Phase spread
1~2
A
19~20
A
3
C
21
C
4
B
22
B
5
A
23
A
6
C
24
C
7~8
B
25
B
9
A
27
A
10
C
28
C
11
B
29
B
12
A
30
A
13~14
C
31
C
15
B
33
B
16
A
34
A
17
C
35
C
18
B
36
B
The star vector diagram of winding is shown below.
Asymmetric Windings
Whole-pitch windings (q is integer) are always symmetric. Fractional-pitch windings with

c
q=b
d
becomes asymmetric if the denominator d is a multiple of the number of phases m. In general, it is

avoid using asymmetric windings as possible. Nevertheless, it is sometime possible to design polyphase windings with little asymmetry in order to use existing punching tools.
If d is a multiple of the number of phases m, but the total number of slots Z can be divided by m, it
is possible to construct poly-phase winding with little asymmetry. RMxprt can perform automatic
arrangement for this sort of windings and obtain the phase-spread in electric degrees for each
phase.
Take as an example a three-phase 6-pole 66-slot fractional-pitch winding electric machine. Since
66
2
=3
36
3
d = m = 3, the winding is asymmetric. The output in the window Design Output is shown below.
q=
The information for WINDING ARRANGEMENT is displayed as follows:

The distribution of coil slots to phases:
The 3-phase, 2-layer winding can be arranged in 66 slots as below:
AAAAZZZZBBBXXXXCCCCYYYAAAZZZZBBBBXXXCCCCYYYYAAAAZZZBBBBXXXXCCCYYYY
X, Y and Z stands for A, -B and C, respectively. For asymmetric windings, additional information is output, as shown below.
The winding factors of each phase are:
Phase A
0.954119
Phase B
0.954119
Phase C
0.949042
The angles between two-phase winding axes are:

Phase A & B
119.082
Phase B & C
120.459
Phase C & A
120.459
If a sinusoidal rotating field links the winding, the fundamental induced-voltage components will
be:
Positive-sequence component
100%
Negative-sequence component
0.286577%
Zero-sequence component
0.639823%
Coil Connections
Connection of Double-layer Lap Windings
Every vector represents the top-layer effective side of a coil. The bottom effective side of the coil is
determined based on the coil pitch, and is not displayed in the diagrams. Therefore, every vector in
the diagrams can also stand for a coil. Connect all coils in phase spread of A in positive direction,
and all coils in phase spread of A in negative direction to form the phase A winding. In this way,
phase B and C windings can also be connected. The winding connection layouts for the vector diagrams are shown below.
Connection of Single-layer Half-coiled Windings
Every vector in A, B and C phase spread represents "go" effective side of a coil, the "return" effective side of the coil is located in A, B and C phase spread. For the lap type connection, all coils
are with full coil pitch. The connection layouts of the lap type and the concentric type, with respect
to the same vector drawing are shown below.
Connection of Single-layer Whole-coiled Windings
In the previous example, for the concentric type (lower right in the diagram), if coil 1 is not connected from slot 1 to slot 8 (long coil pitch: coil pitch = 7 > pole pitch = 6), but connected from slot
1 to slot 20, and slot 8 to slot 13, all coils of phase A winding have coil pitch of 5. In this way, the
winding becomes single-layer whole-coiled type with the same star vector diagram and phase
spread, and has much shorter average coil pitch. Therefore, single-layer whole-coiled windings
consume less electromagnetic wire than single-layer half-coiled windings. RMxprt can optimize
connections to minimize the average coil pitch to form a single-layer whole-coiled winding.
An example of three-phase 4-pole 36-slot single-layer whole-coiled crossed lap-type winding

(q = 3, 60o phase-spread) is shown below.
An example of three-phase 4-pole 36-slot single-layer whole-coiled crossed concentric-type winding (q = 3, 60o phase-spread) is shown below.
A star vector diagram with fractional coil pitch can also be connected with single-layer wholecoiled type. When the number of slots per pole per phase q <2, as shown in the following vector
diagram, the number of coil sets per phase may not equal to the number of poles (6 coils vs 10
poles), but the algorithm to connect coils is the same (minimize the average coil pitch), and therefore, it is still referred as whole coiled windings.
The winding connection layout for the previous vector diagram is shown below.
Another example is an asymmetric three-phase winding. The connection layout is shown below.
Connection of Double-pole Dual-speed Windings

Commonly used for coils of double-layer windings are lap- and concentric-types. Single-speed
double-layer winding electric machine is usually connected as whole-coiled winding. Double-pole
dual-speed electric machine is connected as double-layer whole-coiled winding at high speed and
as double-layer half-coiled winding at low speed.
Take as an example a three-phase dual-speed 2/4-pole 24-slot double-layer winding. The arrangement of coils is shown in the Table and in the following figure.
Slot number
Two poles
Four poles
1
A
A
2
A
A
3
A
A
4
A
A
5
C
C
6
C
C
7
C
C
8
C
C
9
B
B
10
B
B
11
B
B
12
B
B
Slot number
Two poles
Four poles
13
A
A
14
A
A
15
A
A
16
A
A
17
C
C
18
C
C
19
C
C
20
C
C
21
B
B
22
B
B
23
B
B
24
B
B
The connection for variation of number of poles is shown in the next figure. On the top-left is the 2pole 2Y-connection at high speed, on the top-right is the 4-pole -connection at low speed.
DC Windings
Lap Winding
The winding layout of a lap-type winding for dc machines is as shown below.
A lap-type winding has the following relationships:

Coil pitch
y1 =
Z
= integer
p
Commutator pitch
yk = m
Number of branches in
parallel
a = mp
where
Z
number of slots
number of poles
number of multiplex
Wave Winding
The winding layout of a wave-type winding for dc machines is as shown below.
A wave-type winding has the following relationships:

Coil pitch
y1 =
Z
= integer
p
yK =
Km
= integer
p/2
Commutator pitch
a=m
Number of
branches in parallel
Frog-leg Winding
A frog-leg winding consists of a lap winding and a wave winding. Assume the lap winding has m
multiplex number. In order to connect the wave winding in parallel with the lap winding, the wave
winding should have the same branch bake emf as the lap winding. Therefore, the number of
branches in parallel of the wave winding has to be the same as that of the lap winding, or the multi-
plex number of the wave winding must be mp/2. The winding layout of a frog-leg-type winding
with m=1 for dc machines is as shown below.
A frog-leg-type winding has the following relationships:

Coil pitch
y1a + y1b =
Commutator
pitch
2K
= integer
p
y Ka + y Kb =
2K
= integer
p
yKa = m
y Kb =
2K
m
p
Number of
a = pm
branch in parallel
where
m
number of multiplex (of the lap winding)
Virtual Slots
Windings of the dc machine are usually double-layer type. In many cases, often a number of coil
sides are imbedded into one slot for simplification of structure. Therefore, the number of slots Z is
less than the number of coils S. There exists the relationship
S
Z=
where is the number of coil sides in each layer in one slot and is termed virtual slot factor. Therefore, the number of conductors per slots is equal to multiple of 2.
Equipotential Connectors
The points ideally possessing the same electric potential in armature winding are often wholly or
partly connected by short copper wire, which is termed equipotential connector.
Equipotential Connector Class A of Simplex-lap Winding
Asymmetry in magnetic circuit, such as eccentric air-gap, causes circulating current in lap winding,
increases losses and affects commutation in order. The equipotential connector Class A on the commutator of simplex-lap winding can solve this problem. The connection pitch of equipotential connector Class A of simplex-lap winding yp is equal to the number of commutator segments per pole
pair.
K K
yp =
=
= integer
p
a
Winding with yp = integer is termed symmetric winding. Only symmetric winding can have equipotential connector Class A.
No need for Equipotential Connector for Simplex-wave Winding
Simplex-wave winding does not possess electrically equipotential points, therefore, can not have
equipotential connector. On the other hand, simplex-wave winding does not need equipotential
connector.
Equipotential Connector Class B of Multiplex-wave Winding
There are electric equipotential points among different sets of simplex-wave windings of multiplex-wave winding. They can be connected to eliminate the nonuniform distribution of electric
potential on commutator segments due to inequality of brush resistances. This is termed equipotential connector Class B. The connection pitch of equipotential connector Class B of multiplex-wave
winding yp is equal to the number of commutator segments per branch pair in parallel.
yp =
K
= integer
a
Equipotential Connector of Multiplex-lap Winding
For multiplex-lap winding, equipotential connector Class A is needed for each set of simplex-lap
windings, equipotential connector Class B is needed among different sets of simplex-lap windings.
There exist no electrically equipotential points among different sets of simplex-lap windings on the
commutator side of armature, however, there exist electrically equipotential points among different
sets of simplex-lap windings on different sides of armature as points A and B in the figure below.
Those points can be connected by conductors passing through inside armature.

No Need for Equipotential Connector for Frog-leg Winding
For frog-leg winding, each pair of electrically equipotential points on commutator is connected by a
lap coil and a wave coil in series. The connection acts as equipotential connector Class A for lap
winding and as equipotential connector Class B for wave winding. Therefore there is no need for
extra equipotential connectors.
Pole Windings
The following two types of electric machines possess similar pole winding structure:
DC machine (motor and generator)

Three-phase synchronous machine (motor and generator)
RMxprt adopts the same arrangement procedure for pole windings of the two types of electric
machines. There are three types of structure as shown in the figure below:
Round Wire
pole winding with round wire.
Cylinder Coil
pole winding with rectangular wire wound in standing way.
Edgewise Coil
pole winding with rectangular wire wound in flatting way.
Limited Space for Wire Arrangement

Before completing a winding arrangement, RMxprt needs to determine the limited space sizes for
the winding. The limited sizes include: limited Overall Height, limited Overall Width and Winding Clearance (the clearance between two adjacent pole windings), as shown below.
Overall Height
Winding Clearance
Overall Width
Overall Height, Overall Width and Winding Clearance can be input from RMxprt panel. If
either Overall Height or Overall Width is set to 0, RMxprt perform automatic space optimization
to obtain the maximum space for pole winding arrangement in the condition to guarantee the clearance between pole windings.
If the space from input or determined by space optimization is not sufficient to arrange for the input
number of turns per pole, a message of "The rotor/shunt/series/commutating winding control
dimension is not big enough." is displayed in Design Output window.
Round Wire Winding

The arrangement of pole winding with round wire is shown below.
With auto-arrangement of pole windings, RMxprt calculates maximum number of layers, minimum number of layers, maximum number of turns per layer, minimum number of turns per layer,
and the maximum number of turns per pole that is available from the limited space, and so forth.
Cylinder Coil
The arrangement of magnetic-pole winding with rectangular wire wound in standing way by RMxprt is shown below.
The cylinder coil is wound with half-turn over lapped layer by layer. Layers with the same number
of turns constitute a section. The output window Design Output displays the number of layers and
the number of turns per layer of each section, and the maximum number of turns per pole that is
available from the limited space.
Edgewise Coil
The arrangement of magnetic-pole winding with rectangular wire wound in flatting way by RMxprt is shown below.
To guarantee the clearance between two adjacent pole windings, the wire width of the lower parts is
decreased, while the wire thickness is increased to keep the sectional area of wire invariant as possible. The turns with the same wire gauge constitute a section (maximum three sections are
allowed). The output window Design Output displays the number of turns of each section and the
sizes of wire gauge, and the maximum number of turns per pole that is available from the limited
space.
Pole Winding with Half Turns

For some large machines, a half turn may be included due to too few turns per pole. When the number of turns per pole is an integer number, the number of conductors per pole is an even number
with equal conductor number at both pole sides. Therefore, the two terminal leads of one pole coil
are at the same axial side (or at different pole sides), as shown below.
When the number of turns per pole includes a half turn, the number of conductors per pole is an odd
number. In this case, one pole side has one more conductor than the other pole side, and the two terminal leads of one pole coil are at different axial sides (or at the same pole side), as shown below.
Exporting Winding Data

Winding data may be export to a table:
1. Select the Machine>Winding>Export Layout command from the menu. You may also rightclick in the Winding Editor window and select Export Layout from the shortcut menu.
2. Browse to the location to save the file and enter a filename.
3.
Click Save to export the winding data to a file and dismiss the dialog.
Note
The winding must be editable for the Export Layout command to be available. If you are
using a standard winding, you can switch to the Winding Editor by:
1. Click on the winding in the Project Tree window.
2.
In the Properties Window, click on the button next to Winding Type.

The Winding Type dialog is displayed.
3.
Select Editor as the winding type and click OK.
9
RMxprt Machine Types
Using RMxprt, you can simulate and analyze the following thirteen machine types:
Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine

Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motor
Claw-Pole Alternator
General DC Machine
Generic Rotating Machine
Line-Start Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motor
Permanent-Magnet DC Motor
Single-Phase Induction Motor
Switched Reluctance Motor
Three-Phase Induction Motor
Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machine
Three-Phase Synchronous Machine
Universal Motor
RMxprt Machine Types 9-1
Three-Phase Induction Motors

After you have selected Three-Phase Induction Motors as your model type, you must define the
following:
General data, such as the voltage, speed, and materials.

Stator data, such as the slot types, diameter, and wire dimensions.
Rotor data, such as the slot dimensions, skew, and ventage holes.
Solution data, such as rated output voltage and frequency.

By option, you can add vents to and remove an existing vent from the stator and rotor.
Analysis Approach for Three-Phase Induction Motors

For a three-phase induction motor, the stator winding (with a sinusoidal spatial distribution and p
pairs of poles) is connected to a three-phase symmetric voltage power supply. The resulting currents in the stator produce a rotating magnetic field. The rotor winding is often a squirrel cage type
with the number of poles dictated by the number of poles in the stator. Currents are induced in the
rotor bars and produce, in turn, a second rotating magnetic field. The two rotating fields produce a
resultant rotating magnetic field in the air gap of the machine. The interaction of this field in the air
gap with the rotor bar currents produces an electromagnetic torque, which acts on the rotor in the
direction of the rotation of the field in the air gap. A torque of equal value acts upon the stator in the
opposite direction.
The stator winding, which is connected to a phase of the supply system, has p coils, each with a
symmetric spatial distribution and an opening of D/2p, where D is the diameter of the winding. In
this case, the magnetic field in the air gap has p periods, and the winding has p pairs of poles.
The performance of three-phase induction motors (IndM3) is analyzed based on the equivalent circuit of one phase in the frequency domain as shown in Figure 1.
In the figure, R1 is the stator resistance, X1 is stator leakage reactance, which consists of stator slot
leakage reactance, end-winding leakage reactance, and differential leakage reactance. X2 and R2
are rotor leakage reactance and rotor resistance, respectively. X2 includes rotor slot leakage reactance, end-ring leakage reactance, differential leakage reactance, and skewing leakage reactance.
Due to the saturation of the leakage field, X1 and X2 are nonlinear. The parameters in the equivalent circuit are dependent on the stator and rotor currents. Due to the skin effects, X2 and R2 are the
equivalent values from a distributed-parameter circuit, as shown in Figure 2.
9-2 RMxprt Machine Types
They vary with the rotor slip s. All rotor parameters have been referred to the stator side.
Figure 1
Figure 2
In the exciting branch, Xm is the magnetizing reactance, and RFe is the resistance corresponding to
iron-core losses. Xm is a linearized nonlinear parameter that varies with the saturation of the main
field.
After a phase voltage U1 is applied to the phase terminals, stator phase current I1 and rotor current
I2, which has been referred to the stator, can be easily computed by the circuit analysis. The electromagnetic power Pm, or air-gap power, is computed by the following:
Pm = 3 * I2^2 * R2/s
The electromagnetic torque Tm is:

Tm = Pm/
where w is the synchronous speed in rad/s.
The output mechanical shaft torque T2 is:

T2 = Tm - Tfw
where Tfw is the frictional and wind torque.

The output power is:
P2 = T2 * 2
where 2 = * (1 - s) and is rotor speed in rad/s.

The input power is:
P1 = P2 + Pfw + Pcu2 + PFe + Pcu1 + Ps
where Pfw, Pcu2, PFe, Pcu1, and Ps are frictional and wind loss, rotor copper loss, iron-core loss,
stator copper loss, and stray loss, respectively.
The power factor is derived from:
PF = P1/(m * U1 * I1)
The efficiency is computed by:

eff = P2/P1 * 100%
Defining a Three-Phase Induction Motor

The general procedure for defining a three-phase induction motor is as follows:
1. Insert a three-phase induction motor into an existing or new project.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Double-click the Machine entry in the project tree to define the general data, such as the number of poles and machine losses.
Double-click the Machine-Stator entry in the project tree to define the stator geometry.
Double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree to define the stator slot dimensions.
Double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree to define the stator windings and conductors.
Double-click the Machine-Rotor entry in the project tree to define the rotor geometry.
Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry in the project tree to define the rotor slot dimensions.
Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree to define the rotor conductor, ventage hole dimensions, and skew.
Double-click the Machine-Shaft entry in the project tree to define the magnetism of the shaft.
10. Right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add Solution Setup to define the solution
data.
11. Choose File>Save to save the project.
12. Choose RMxprt>Analyze to analyze the design.
Note
When you place the cursor over an entry field in the data windows, a brief description of
that field appears in the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window.
Once the design is analyzed, the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler, or it can be used
to create a new Maxwell 2D project, and a new Maxwell 3D design.
Please refer to the Three-Phase Induction Motor Problem application note, on the technical support
page of the ANSYS web site, for a specific example of a three-phase induction motor problem.
Defining the General Data for a Three Phase Induction Motor

Use the General Data Properties window to define the basic parameters of the induction motor,
such as the number of poles, and frictional loss.
To define the general data:
1. To open the General Data Properties window, double-click the Machine entry in the project
tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without
opening a separate window.)
2. Enter the number of poles for the machine in the Number of Poles field. This value is the total
number of poles in the stator (or the number of pole pairs multiplied by two).
3. Enter the stray loss factor in the Stray Loss Factor field. The stray load loss consists of the
losses arising from non-uniform current distribution in the copper and additional core losses
produced in the iron by distortion of the magnetic flux by the load current. The IEEE Standard
provides different assumed stray load loss values for AC motors rated less than 2500 hp, as follows:
4.
5.
1) 1-125 HP = 1.8% of rated output power

2) 126-500 HP = 1.5%
3) 501-2499 HP = 1.2%
Enter the energy loss due to friction at the given speed in the Frictional Loss field.
6.
Enter the wind loss due to air resistance measured at the reference speed in the Wind Loss
field.
Enter the given speed in the Reference Speed field.
7.
Click OK to close the Properties window.
General Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors

To access the general data, double-click the Machine entry in the project tree.
The General Data Properties window for a three-phase induction motor contains the following
fields:
The machine type you selected when inserting a new RMxprt design (Three
Phase Induction Motor).
Number of Poles The number of poles the machine contains.
Stray Loss Factor The stray loss factor: the ratio of stray loss to rated output power.
Frictional Loss
The frictional energy loss (due to friction) measured at the reference speed.
Wind Loss
The wind loss (due to air resistance) measured at the reference speed.
Reference Speed The given speed of reference.
Machine Type
Defining the Stator Data for a Three-Phase Induction Motor

The stator is the outer lamination stack where the three-phase windings reside. In the project tree,
double-click Machine>Stator, Machine-Stator-Slot, and Machine-Stator-Winding to define the
physical dimensions, slot data, wires, and conductors for the stator.
TTo define general stator data:
1. To open the Stator Data Properties window, double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the
project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop
without opening a separate window.)
2.
Enter the Outer Diameter of the stator.
3.
Enter the Inner Diameter of the stator.
4.
Enter the length of the stator core in the Length field.
5.
Enter the stacking factor for the stator core in the Stacking Factor field.
6.
Select a Steel Type for the stator core:

a.
b.
Click the button for Steel Type.

The Select Definition window appears.
Select a steel type from the list, or define a new steel type.
c.
Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window.
7.
Enter the Number of Slots in the stator.
8.
Select the Slot Type:

a.
Click the button for the Slot Type.

The Select Slot Type window appears.
b.
Note
Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4).

When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type, a schematic of the selected type
appears, displaying the slot dimension variables.
Optionally, check User Defined Slot if you wish to define the slot dimensions using the
Slot Editor.
c.
9.
Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window.
Enter the number of sectors in the Lamination Sectors field.
10. Enter the thickness of the magnetic end pressboard in the Pressboard Thickness field. Enter 0
for a non-magnetic end pressboard.
11. Enter the skew width, measured in slot number, in the Skew Width field.
12. Click OK to close the Properties window.
Stator Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors

To access the general stator data, double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree.
The Stator Data Properties window contains the following fields:
Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Stacking Factor
Steel Type
Number of Slots
Slot Type
Lamination
Sectors
Pressboard
Thickness
Skew Width
The outer diameter of the stator core.

The inner diameter of the stator core.
The length of the stator core.
The stacking factor of the stator core.
The steel type of the stator core. Click the button to open the Select
Definition window.
The number of slots the stator core contains.
The type of slots in the stator core. Click the button to open the Select Slot
Type window.
The number of lamination sectors.
The magnetic press board thickness (0 for a non-magnetic press board).
The skew width measured in slot number.
Defining the Stator Slots for a Three-Phase Induction Motor

Note
If you chose User Defined Slot in the Select Slot Type window, you must define the slot
dimensions using the Slot Editor.
To define the stator slots:

1. To open the Stator Slot Data Properties window, double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot
entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of
the desktop without opening a separate window.)
2. Optionally, to automatically design the dimensions of slots Hs2, Bs1, and Bs2, select the Auto
Design check box.
3. Optionally, to design dimensions of slots Bs1 and Bs2 based on the stator tooth width, select
the Parallel Tooth check box, and enter a value in the Tooth Width field.
4. Enter the available slot dimensions.
Hs0
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
Rs
5.
Always available.
Available only when Auto Design is cleared. When Auto Design is selected, this
slot dimension is determined automatically.
Always available.
Available only when Auto Design and Parallel Tooth are both cleared. When Auto
Design is selected, this slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel
Tooth is selected, this slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the
Tooth Width field.
Tooth Width field.
Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.
Stator Slot Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors

To access the stator slot data, double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot entry in the project tree.
The Stator Slot Data Properties window contains the following fields:
Auto Design Select or clear this to enable or disable auto-design of slots Hs2, Bs1, and
Bs2. When this check box is selected, only two other fields appear in the
window: Hs0 and Bs0.
Parallel
Select this to design Bs1 and Bs2 based on the tooth width. When this
check box is selected, the Bs1 and Bs2 fields are removed, and the Tooth
Tooth
Width field is added.
Tooth Width The tooth width for the parallel tooth, on which Bs1 and Bs2 are designed.
A slot dimension (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when
Machine-Stator-Slot is selected).
A slot dimension. (see the diagram shown in the modeling window when
Machine-Stator-Slot is selected). Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.
Hs0
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
Rs
Defining the Stator Windings for a Three-Phase Induction Motor

Define the wires, conductors, insulation, and windings of the stator.
To define the wires and windings:
1. To open the Stator Slot Winding Properties window, double-click the Machine-StatorWinding entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties
section of the desktop without opening a separate window.)
2. Click the Winding tab.
3.
4.
Enter the number of layers in the stator winding in the Winding Layers field.
Select a Winding Type:
a.
b.
Click the button for Winding Type.

The Winding Type window appears.
Select from one of the following three types of winding:
Whole Coiled
Half Coiled
Editor
When you place the mouse cursor over a winding button, an outline of the selected winding appears. The following table describes the six types of windings that are possible
(three for one-layer and three for two-layer):
Type
Description
One A user-defined one-layer winding arrangement. You need to set up the winding arrangement
layer for each slot.
winding
Editor
A one-layer whole-coiled winding:
Whole
Coiled
Slot 123
A one-layer concentric half-coiled winding:
Half
Coiled
Slot 123
Two A user-defined two-layer winding arrangement. When you select for winding layers the you
Layer can specify a different winding arrangement for each slot in the Winding Editor.
Winding
Editor
A two-layer whole coiled winding:
Whole
Coiled
Slot 123
The phase belt for this winding configuration is equal to 360/2m, where m is the phase
number.
A two-layer half-coiled winding:
Half
Coiled
Slot 1 2 3
There is only one coil per phase per pair of poles.

Note
c.
For a two-layer winding, if you check Constant Pitch in the Winding Editor, only the top
layer needs to be defined; the bottom layer will be determined according to the coil
pitch.
Once you have clicked a button to select a winding, click OK to close the Winding Type
window and return to the Properties window.
5.
Select or enter the number of parallel branches in one phase of the winding in the Parallel
Branches field.
6.
Enter the total number of conductors in each stator slot in the Conductors per Slot field. This
value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers.
Enter the coil pitch, measured in number of slots, in the Coil Pitch field. The coil pitch is the
number of slots separating one winding. For example, if a coil starts in slot 1 and ends in slot 6,
it has a coil pitch of 5.
Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Enter 0 to have
RMxprt auto-design this value.
7.
8.
9.
Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Enter 0 to automat-
ically obtain this value from the wire library.
Insulation
Conductor
y
Wire Wrap = 2*y
10. Select the Wire Size:

a.
b.
c.
Click the button for Wire Size.

The Wire Size window appears.
Select a value from the Wire Diameter pull-down list.
Select a wire gauge from the Gauge pull-down menu. You can select from the following
options:
You can select a specific gauge number. When you select a gauge number, the
<number> Wire Diameter field is automatically updated.
This option allows you to manually enter the Wire Diameter. This is useful when
USER you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge.
This option sets the Wire Diameter to zero, and RMxprt automatically calculates
AUTO the optimal value. The diameter information is then written to the output file
when you analyze the design.
This option allows you to define a conductor that is made of different size wires.
MIXED For example, a single conductor may consist of 5 wires, 3 wires with a diameter
of 0.21mm and 2 with a diameter of 0.13mm.
The gauge number is based on AWG settings. You can create your own wire table using
Machine>Wire, and then you can select this wire table using the
Tools>Options>Machine Options command.
d.
When you are done setting the wire size, click OK to close the Wire Size window and
return to the Properties window.
11. Click the End/Insulation tab.

12. Select or clear the Input Half-turn Length check box.
13. Do one of the following:
If you selected Input Half-turn Length, then enter the half-turn length of the armature
winding in the Half Turn Length field.
If you cleared Input Half-turn Length, then enter the end length adjustment of the stator
coils in the End Adjustment field. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator.
End
Adjustment
End of Stator
Stator
Coil
14. Enter the inner radius of the base corner in the Base Inner Radius field.
15. Enter the inner diameter of the coil tip in the Tip Inner Diameter field.
16. Enter the distance between two stator coils in the End Clearance field.
17. Enter the thickness of the slot liner insulation in the Slot Liner field.
18. Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field.
19. Enter the thickness of the insulation layer in the Layer Insulation field.
20. Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field.
Stator Winding Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors

To access the stator winding data, double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project
tree.
The Stator Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields:
Winding tabWinding Layers The number of winding layers.
Winding Type
The type of stator winding. Click the button to open the Winding
Type window and choose from Whole Coiled, Half Coiled, and
Editor.
Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the stator winding.
Conductors per The number of conductors per stator slot (0 for auto-design).
Slot
Coil Pitch
Number of
Strands
Wire Wrap
End/
Insulation
tab
The coil pitch measured in number of slots.

The number of wires per conductor (0 for auto-design).
The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically

obtain this value from the wire library).
Wire Size
The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design). Click the button to
open the Wire Size window where you can specify units, wire
type, diameter, and gauge.
Input Half-turn Select or clear this check box to specify whether or not you want
to enter the half-turn length. When this check box is selected, the
Length
Half Turn Length field appears the next time you open the
Properties window. When this check box is selected, the End
Adjustment field appears instead.
Half Turn Length The half-turn length of the armature winding.
End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the stator coils, which is the distance
one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the
stator.
Base Inner
The inner radius of the base corner.
Radius
Tip Inner
The inner diameter of the coil tip.
Diameter
End Clearance The end clearance between two adjacent coils.
Slot Liner
The thickness of the slot liner insulation.
Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation.
Layer Insulation The thickness of the insulation layer.
Limited Fill
The limited slot fill factor for the wire design.
Factor
Winding Editor for a Three-Phase Induction Motor

For a three-phase induction motor, you may want to specify a different number of conductors for
each stator slot. The Winding Editor makes this possible by enabling you to specify the number of
turns for each coil. To enable the Winding Editor, you must have set the Winding Property for
the Winding Type to Editor.
To specify the number of turns for each coil:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

The Winding Editor window appears.
In the table in the upper left, set which phase you want for each coil and which slot is the in
and out slot for the current in each coil.
If you are working on a quarter or half model, you may want to specify a multiplier by clicking
the Periodic Multiplier check box and specifying a value.
Select or deselect the Constant Turns or Constant Pitch check boxes, depending on whether
you want to be able to change these setting in the table above. When these options are selected,
you cannot change the turns or pitch.
When you are satisfied with the coil settings, click OK to close the Winding Editor window.
Defining Different Size Wires for a Three-Phase Induction Motor

Use the Gauge option if you have a conductor that is made up different size wires.
To define different size wires:
1. In the Wire Size window, select MIXED from the Gauge pull-down menu.
2.
3.
Select either Round or Rectangular as the Wire Type.

Enter the appropriate wire data in the table:
For a round wire:
Enter the Diameter in the table.

Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have this
diameter.
For a rectangular wire:
Enter the Width of the wire in the table.

Enter the Thickness of the wire in the table.
Enter the Fillet value in the table.
data.
4.
Choose Add to add the new wire data.
5.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each size wire you want to add.
6.
When you are finished defining the wires, click OK to close the Wire Size window.
Note
For example, if one conductor is made up of 5 wires, and 3 of those wires have a
diameter of 0.21mm, and the other 2 have a diameter of 0.13mm, then the mixed wire
size table will have two lines. The first line will list Diameter = 0.21 and Number = 3.
The second line will list Diameter = 0.13 and Number = 2. An equivalent wire diameter
is displayed as Wire Size value in the Winding tab in the Properties window.
Stator Vent Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors

By option, you can add a vent to a three-phase induction motor. To add a vent to stator in a threephase induction motor.
1. Select the stator icon in the project tree.
2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Insert Vent.
The vent icon appears in the project tree under the stator.
To remove a vent to stator in a three-phase induction motor.
1. Select the stator icon in the project tree.
2. Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Remove Vent.
The vent icon disappears in the project tree under the stator.
The Vent data for the stator includes the following fields.
Vent Ducts
Number of radial vent ducts
Duct Width
Width of radial vent ducts
Magnetic Spacer Width Width of magnetic spacer which holds vent ducts. 0 for non magnetic
spacer
Duct Pitch
Center-to-Center distance between two adjacent Vent ducts
Defining the Rotor Data for a Three-Phase Induction Motor

The rotor consists of copper bars in which current is induced by the magnetic fields produced by
the stator windings. In the project tree, double-click Machine-Rotor, Machine-Rotor-Slot, and
Machine-Rotor-Winding to define the rotor slots and vents.
To define general stator data:
1.
2.
To open the Rotor Data Properties window, double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the
Enter the stacking factor for the rotor core in the Stacking Factor field.
3.
Enter the Number of Slots in the rotor.
4.

a.
b.
Note
c.

5.
Enter the outer diameter of the rotor in the Outer Diameter field.
6.
Enter the inner diameter of the rotor in the Inner Diameter field.
7.
Enter the length of the rotor core in the Length field.
8.
Select a Steel Type for the rotor core:

a.
b.
c.

9.
Enter the Skew Width, measured in rotor slot pitch. This value defines by how much the rotor
bars are skewed.
10. Optionally, select Cast Rotor to allow the conductor to fill all the space available in the slot.
Otherwise, RMxprt assumes the slot wedge that fixes the bars is filled with insulator material
in a 2D/3D geometry model.
11. Optionally, select Half Slot to draw only half of the rotor slots.
12. Optionally, select Double Cage to specify the winding as a double-squirrel-cage winding.
If you select Double Cage, another line appears in the properties to let you specify the Bottom
Slot type.
a. Click on the Custom button on the Double Cage row. This displays the Select Slot Type
window.
b. Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4).
Note
Rotor Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors

To access the general rotor data, double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree.
The Rotor Data Properties window contains the following fields:

Stacking Factor
Number of Slots
Slot Type
Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Steel Type
Skew Width
Cast Rotor
Half Slot
Double Cage
The stacking factor of the rotor core.

The number of slots the rotor core contains.
The type of slots in the rotor core. Click the button to open the Select Slot
Type window.
The outer diameter of the rotor core.
The inner diameter of the rotor core.
The length of the rotor core.
The steel type of the rotor core. Click the button to open the Select
Definition window.
Select or clear this to specify whether the rotor squirrel-cage winding is cast
or not.
Select this to specify a half-shaped unsymmetrical slot.
Select this to specify the winding as double-squirrel-cage.
Defining the Rotor Slots for a Three-Phase Induction Motor

To define the type and dimensions of the rotors slots:
1. To open the Rotor Data Slot Properties window, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry
in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the
desktop without opening a separate window.)
2. Enter the slot dimensions in the following fields: Hs0, Hs01, Hs2, Bs0, Bs1, Bs2, Rs.
3.
Rotor Slot Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors

To access the rotor slot data, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry in the project tree.
The Rotor Slot Data Properties window contains the following fields:
Hs0
Hs01
Hs2
Bs0
Machine-Rotor-Slot is selected).
Bs1
Bs2
Rs
Defining the Rotor Winding for a Three-Phase Induction Motor

To define the rotor winding data:
1. To open the Rotor Data Slot Properties window, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding
2. Select a Bar Conductor Type for the rotor winding bar:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Enter the length of the gap between the end ring and the iron core in the End Length field.
This field specifies the value for only one end of the gap, not both.
Enter the end ring dimension in the axial direction in the End-Ring Width field. The end ring
connects the bars of the rotor to one another.
Enter the end ring dimension in the radius direction in the End-Ring Height field. The end
rings height covers at least the cross section of the rotor conductor.
Select an End Ring Conductor Type for the rotor winding end ring:
a.
b.
c.
7.
Click the button for Bar Conductor Type.

Select a conductor type from the list, or define a new conductor type.
Click the button for End Ring Conductor Type.

Rotor Winding for Three-Phase Induction Motors

To access the rotor winding data, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project
tree.
The Rotor Winding Data Properties window contains the following fields:
The type of bar conductor used in the winding. Click the button to open the
Select Definition window.
The length of the single-side end of the extended bar.
The width of one side of the end rings in the axial direction. The end ring
End Ring Height The height of the end rings in the radian direction. The end ring connects
the bars of the rotor to one another.
End Ring
The type of end ring conductor used in the winding. Click the button to
Conductor Type open the Select Definition window.
Bar Conductor
Type
End Length
End Ring Width
Rotor Vent Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors

By option, you can add a vent to a rotor in a three-phase induction motor.
To add a vent to rotor:
1. Select the rotor icon in the project tree.
The vent icon appears in the project tree under the rotor.
The Vent data for the rotor includes the following fields.
Vent Ducts
Duct Width
Magnetic Spacer Width Width of magnetic spacer which holds vent ducts. 0 for non magnetic
spacer
Duct Pitch
Center to center distance between vent ducts
Holes per row
Number of axial vent holes per row.
Inner hole diameter
Diameter of vent holes in inner row.
Outer hole diameter
Diameter of vent holes in outer row.
Inner hole location
Center to center diameter of inner hole vents
Outer hole location
Center to center diameter of outer hole vents.
Defining the Shaft Data for a Three-Phase Induction Motor

To define the shaft:
1. To open the Shaft Data Properties window, double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the
2. Select or clear the Magnetic Shaft check box to specify whether or not the shaft is to be made
of magnetic material.
Shaft Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors

To access the shaft data, double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree.
The Shaft Data Properties window contains the following fields:
Magnetic Shaft
Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made of
magnetic material.
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Three-Phase Induction Motor

To define the solution data:
1. To open the Solution Setup window, right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add
Solution Setup.
2. Click the General tab. The Operation Type is automatically set to Motor for this machine
type.
3. Select the Load Type used in the motor from the following options:
The speed remains constant in the motor.
The output power remains constant in the motor.
The torque remains constant regardless of the speed. In this case, Tload =
Trated, given by the output power divided by the given rated speed.
Linear Torque The torque increases linearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/
nrated) where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated
speed.
Fan Load
The load varies nonlinearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/
nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given rated
speed.
Const Speed
Const Power
Const Torque
4.
Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the motor in the Rated Output Power field.
5.
Enter the RMS line-to-line voltage in the Rated Voltage field.
6.
Enter the desired rotor speed in the Rated Speed field. When input Rated Speed is less than
the Synchronous Speed, the machine operates as a motor. When input Rated Speed is greater
than the Synchronous Speed, the machine operates as a generator. For an induction generator,
the rated performance will be calculated at the input Rated Speed with the three-phase windRMxprt Machine Types 9-21
7.
ings connecting to infite bus.

Enter the temperature at which the system functions in the Operating Temperature field.
8.
Click the Three-Phase Induction Motor tab.
9.
Enter the electrical line frequency in the Frequency field, and select the units.
10. Select the Winding Connection from the following options:
Wye (Y)
Delta
11. Click OK to close the Solution Setup window.

Related Topics:
Solution Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors
Solution Data for Three-Phase Induction Motors

To access the solution data, right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add Solution Setup.
The Solution Setup window contains the following fields:
Operation Type
Load Type
Rated Output
Power
Rated Voltage
Rated Speed
Operating
Temperature
Frequency
Winding
Connection
On the General tab. The operation type is automatically set to Motor for
this machine type.
On the General tab. Select from Const Speed, Const Power, Const
Torque, Linear Torque, and Fan Load. The default is Const Power.
On the General tab. Type a value for the rated output voltage, and select
the units.
On the General tab. Type a value for the rated voltage, and select the units.
On the General tab. Type a value for the rated speed, and select the units.
On the General tab. Type a value for the operating temperature, and select
the units.
On the Three-Phase Induction Motor tab. Type a value for the frequency,
and select the units.
On the Three-Phase Induction Motor tab. Select from Wye or Delta.
Related Topics:
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Three-Phase Induction Motor
Single-Phase Induction Motors

After you have selected Single-Phase Induction Motors as your model type, you must define the
following:
General data, such as the voltage, speed, and materials used in the motor.
Stator data, such as the slot types, diameter, and wire dimensions.
Rotor data, such as the slot dimensions, skew width, and ventage holes.

By option, you can add a vent or remove a vent from the rotor.
Analysis Approach for Single-Phase Induction Motors

The construction of a single-phase induction motor is structurally similar to the poly-phase squirrel-cage induction motors. The primary difference is that the stator windings, which consist of a
main winding and an auxiliary winding, have axes of these that are displaced 90 electrical degrees
in space. To produce a starting torque, the currents in the two windings must be out of phase. Usually a capacitor is connected in series with the auxiliary winding so that the auxiliary winding current is forced to lead the main winding current by about 90 electrical degrees. Two parallel
capacitors can also be used: one for starting, and one for running, so that both a starting and running
performance are obtained.
An algorithm called symmetric component method is applied to analyze single-phase induction
motors (IndM1). Both voltages and currents of the main-phase and auxiliary-phase windings are
decomposed to positive- and negative-sequence components. The equivalent circuits for mainphase positive-sequence components, auxiliary-phase positive-sequence components, main-phase
negative-sequence components, and auxiliary-phase negative-sequence components are shown in

(a), (b), (c), and (d) of Figure 3, respectively.
Figure 3
In the figures, R1m, X1m, R1a, X1a, R2, X2, and Xm are main-phase stator resistance, main-phase
stator leakage reactance, auxiliary-phase stator resistance, auxiliary-phase stator leakage reactance,
rotor resistance, rotor leakage reactance, and magnetizing reactance, respectively. XC is the reactance of the capacitor connected in series with the auxiliary winding, and the coefficient k is the
ratio of effective turns of the auxiliary winding to that of the main winding. R2, X2, and Xm have
been referred to the main winding. The equivalent impedance of the four circuits is Zm1, Za1, Zm2,
and Za2, as shown in the figures.
According to the symmetric component method, the positive and negative components of auxiliaryphase currents can be expressed in the form of a phasor as the following:
Ia1 = (j / k)Im1
Ia2 = ((j / k)Im2
Because the main winding and the auxiliary winding have the same applied terminal voltage U1,
the voltage equations for both windings become the following:
U1 = Um1 + Um2 = Im1Zm1 + Im2Zm2
U1 = Ua1 + Ua2 = Ia1Za1 + Ia2Za2
= (j / k)(Im1Za1 - Im2Za2)
The positive and negative components of main-phase current are calculated by the following:
Im1 = U1(Za2 - jkZm2) / (Zm1Za2 + Zm2Za1)
Im2 = U1(Za1 + jkZm1) / (Zm1Za2 + Zm2Za1)
The total input current is:
I1 = Im + Ia = (Im1 + Im2) + (Ia1 + Ia2)
Based on these two components of main-phase current, all current components shown in Figure 3
can be obtained by simple computation.
Then the total input current is:
I1 = Im + Ia = (Im1 + Im2) + (Ia1 + Ia2)
The positive- and negative-sequence air-gap power can be computed in the following way:
Pm1 = 2 * Irm1^2 * R2 / s
Pm2 = 2 * Irm2^2 * R2 / (2 - s)
The total air-gap power is:

Pm = Pm1 - Pm2
Tm, T2, P2, P1, and eff are computed in the same way as for three-phase induction motors.
The power factor is derived from:
PF = P1 / (U1 * I1)
Defining a Single-Phase Induction Motor

The general procedure for structurally defining a single-phase induction motor is as follows:
1. Insert a single-phase induction motor design in an existing or newly created project.
2. Double-click the Machine entry in the project tree to define the general data.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree to define the rotor conductor, ventage hole dimensions, and skew.
9.
data.
Note
Once the design is analyzed, the model can be imported into the Maxwell 2D Modeler, or can be
used to create a new Maxwell 2D project, and a new Maxwell 3D design.
Please refer to the A Capacitor-Run Single-Phase Induction Motor Problem application note, on the
technical support page of the ANSYS web site, for a specific example of a single-phase induction
motor problem.
Defining the General Data for a Single-Phase Induction Motor

Use the General Data Properties window to define the basic parameters of the induction motor,
such as the number of poles, frictional loss, and operation mode.
3. Select one of the following for the Rotor Position:
4.
5.
Inner Rotor
Outer Rotor
6.
field.
7.
Select the Operation Mode:

a.
b.
Click the button.

The Select Operation Mode window appears.
Select from one of the following:
C-Run Capacitance-run mode. The capacitor is in series with the auxiliary winding. In the
Capacitor run mode, the capacitor will be designed (if the auto-design mode is
selected) to minimize the backward magnetomotive force.
C-Start Capacitance-start mode. The auxiliary winding is in series with the capacitor and is
disconnected when the rotor reaches the switching speed.
C-R&S Capacitance-run and start mode. Two capacitors are in series with the auxiliary
winding; one for starting, one for running.
R-Start Resistor-start mode. The auxiliary winding is disconnected when the rotor reaches
the switching speed.
c.
8.
Click OK to close the Select Operation Mode window and return to the Properties window.
Enter values in the following capacitance, resistance, and switching speed fields:
Run Capacitance Available for C-Run, C-R&S
Run Resistance Available for C-Run, C-R&S
Start Capacitance Available for C-Start, C-R&S

Start Resistance Available for C-Start, C-R&S
Switching Speed Available for C-Start, C-R&S, R-Start
9.
If the start winding needs to be optimized, select the Objective Type from the following three
options:
Note
(Tst/Ist)max. Accept the defaults. This is the ratio of the maximum starting torque to the
starting current ratio.
(Tst)max. Enter the given start current ratio. This is the maximum starting torque
(Ist)min (minimum starting current). Enter the given start torque ratio.
The start-winding optimization goal is disabled for the C-Run operation mode.
In capacitor-run mode, the capacitor is designed to minimize the backward
magnetomotive force. For other modes, if the auto-design function is active, the
capacitor and the resistance are designed according to the start goal, selected from the
following:
The maximum value of (Starting Torque/Starting Current).

The maximum starting torque.
The minimum starting current.
General Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors

fields:
Machine Type
Number of Poles
Rotor Position
Frictional Loss
Wind Loss
Reference Speed
Operation Mode
Run Capacitance
Run Resistance
The machine type you selected when inserting a new RMxprt design
(Single Phase Induction Motor).
The number of poles the machine contains.
Select whether the rotor is an Inner Rotor or Outer Rotor.
The given speed of reference.
Click the button to select from the following four modes: C-Run, C-Start,
C-R&S, and R-Start.
The capacitance of the run capacitor. Available for C-Run and C-R&S
operation modes.
The resistance of the run capacitor. Available for C-Run and C-R&S
operation modes. See Note below.
Start Capacitance The resistance of the start capacitor. Available for C-Start and C-R&S
operation modes.
Start Resistance The resistance of the start capacitor. Available for C-Start and C-R&S
operation modes.
Switching Speed The switching speed of the capacitor or resistor. Available for C-Start, CR&S, and R-Start operation modes.
Objective Type If the start winding needs to be optimized, select from the following three
objective types: (Tst/Ist)max, (Tst)max, or (Ist)min.
For (Tst/Ist) max, accept the defaults. This is the ratio of the
maximum starting torque to the starting current ratio.
For (Tst) max, enter the Given Start Current Ratio. This is
the maximum starting torque.
For (Ist) min (minimum starting current), enter the Given

Start Torque Ratio.
The start-winding optimization goal is disabled for the C-Run operation
mode.
Note
When exporting the RMxprt model to Maxwell:
If the value of the Run Resistance is zero in RMxprt, the value of the Run
Resistance will be autocomputed in Maxwell to a value of 1% of the capacitor
reactance.
To neglect the Run Resistance in Maxwell, set the value to a small non-zero
number in RMxprt.
Defining the Stator Data for a Single-Phase Induction Motor

The stator is the outer lamination stack where the three-phase windings reside. In the project tree,
double-click Machine-Stator, Machine-Stator-Slot, and Machine-Stator-Winding to define the
physical dimensions, slot data, wires, and conductors for the stator.
2. Enter the Outer Diameter of the stator.
3.
4.
5.
6.

a.
b.

c.
7.
8.

a.
b.
Note
9.

c. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type window and return to the Properties window.
Stator Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors

Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Stacking Factor
Steel Type
Number of Slots
Slot Type

Definition window.
Type window.
Defining the Stator Slots for a Single-Phase Induction Motor

Use the Stator1 window to define the physical dimensions of the stator slots.
1.
2.
3.
To open the Stator Slot Data Properties window, double-click the Machine-Stator-Slot
Optionally, to automatically design the dimensions of slots Hs2, Bs1, and Bs2, select the Auto
Design check box.
Optionally, to design dimensions of slots Bs1 and Bs2 based on the stator tooth width, select
4.
Enter the available slot dimensions.

Hs0
Hs1
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
Rs
5.
Always available.
Always available.
Always available.
Tooth Width field.
Tooth Width field.

Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the series winding.
Number of
The number of wires per conductor in the series winding (0 for
auto-design).
Strands
Wire Wrap
The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 for auto-pickup
from the wire library).
Wire Size
The wire diameter (0 for auto-design).
Stator Slot Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors

Parallel
Tooth
Hs0
Hs1
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
Rs
Defining the Stator Windings for a Single-Phase Induction Motor

Define the wires, conductors, insulation, and windings of the stator.
To define the wires and windings:
1. To open the Stator Winding Properties window, double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding
3.
Enter the thickness of the slot liner in the Slot Liner field.
Slot
Insulation
4.
Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field.
5.
Enter the limited slot fill factor for the wire design in the Limited Fill Factor field.
6.
7.
Select or clear the Include Series Winding check box. This option sets whether or not to
include the series winding in the speed adjustment. When this option is selected, a third tab,
Series (C), appears in the Properties window.
Enter the number of layers in the Winding Layers field.
8.
Enter the number of slots in the Coil Pitch field.

9.

a. Click the button for Winding Type.
b. Select from one of the following three types of winding:
Whole Coiled
Half Coiled
Editor
Type
Description
A
user-defined
one-layer
winding
arrangement.
You need to set up the winding
One-Layer
arrangement
for
each
slot.
Winding
Editor
Whole
Coiled
Slot 123
Half
Coiled
Slot 123
A user-defined two-layer winding arrangement. When you select 2 Winding layers, the
Winding Winding Editor is enabled, where you can specify a different winding arrangement for
Editor each slot.
A two-layer wave winding:
Whole
Coiled
Slot 123
number.
Half
Coiled
Slot 1 2 3

Note
pitch.
The following winding types are available:

A single-layer coil:
Slot 123
A 90-degree phase-belt two-layer coil.
A first-class sinusoidal coil. The Conductors per Layer field defines the maximum
number of conductors in the slot. The software will determine the winding distribution in
the slots to get the sinusoidal current distribution:
A second-class sinusoidal coil. The Conductors per Layer field defines the maximum
number of conductors in the slot. The software will determine the winding distribution in
the slots to get the sinusoidal current distribution.
A first-class concentric coil:
Slot 123
You must define the distribution of conductors per slot.

A second-class concentric coil:
Slot 123
You must define the distribution of conductors per slot.

The available winding types vary with the slot type that is selected.
c. Once you have clicked a button to select a winding, click OK to close the Winding Type

10. Click the Main (A) tab.
11. Enter the end length adjustment of the main stator coil in the End Adjustment field. The end
adjustment is the distance one end of the conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the
stator.
End
Adjustment
End of Stator
Stator
Coil
12. Enter the number of conductors per layer of main winding in the Conductors per Layer field.
13. Enter the number of parallel branches in the main stator winding in the Parallel Branches
field.
14. Enter the number of wires per conductor in the Number of Strands field. Enter 0 to have
RMxprt auto-design the value.
15. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Enter 0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library.
Insulation
Conductor
y
Wire Wrap = 2*y

a.
b.
c.

options:
d.
17. Click the Aux (B) tab.

18. Enter the end length adjustment of the auxiliary stator coil in the End Adjustment field.
19. Enter the number of conductors per layer of auxiliary winding in the Conductors per Layer
field.
20. Enter the number of parallel branches in the auxiliary stator winding in the Parallel Branches
field.
22. WIRE WRAP
23. WIRE SIZE
24. Click the Series (C) tab. (This tab only appears when Include Series Winding is selected on
the Winding tab.)
25. Enter the end length adjustment of the series winding in the End Adjustment field.
26. Enter the number of parallel branches in the series stator winding in the Parallel Branches
field.
28. Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Enter 0 to automat-
Insulation
Conductor
y
Wire Wrap = 2*y

a.
b.
c.

options:
d.
Stator Winding Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors

tree.
Winding tabSlot Liner
The thickness of the slot liner.
Wedge Thickness The thickness of the wedge insulation
Limited Fill
Factor
Include Series
Select or clear to specify whether or not to include the series
winding in the speed adjustment. When this option is selected, a
Winding
third tab, Series (C), appears in the Properties window.
Winding Layers The number of winding layers.
Coil Pitch
Winding Type
The type of stator winding for the main phase. Click the button to
open the Winding Type window and choose from Whole Coiled,
Half Coiled, and Editor.
Main (A) End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the stator coils.
Aux (B)
Series (C)
Conductors per The number of conductors per layer in the main winding.
Layer
Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the main stator winding.
Number of
Strands
Wire Wrap
Wire Size
End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the auxiliary winding.
Conductors per The number of conductors per layer in the auxiliary winding.
Layer
Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the auxiliary stator winding.
Number of
The number of wires per conductor in the auxiliary winding (0 for
auto-design).
Strands
Wire Wrap
Wire Size
This tab appears when Include Series Winding is selected on the Winding tab.
End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the series winding.
Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the series winding.
Number of
Strands
Wire Wrap
Wire Size
The number of wires per conductor in the series winding (0 for

auto-design).
Winding Editor for a SIngle-Phase Induction Motor

For a single-phase induction motor, you may want to specify a different number of conductors for
turns for each coil.
1. Click Machine>Winding>Edit Layout.
2. In the table in the upper left, set which phase you want for each coil and which slot is the in
3. If you are working on a quarter or half model, you may want to specify a multiplier by clicking
4. Select or deselect the Constant Turns or Constant Pitch check boxes, depending on whether
5. When you are satisfied with the coil settings, click OK to close the Winding Editor window.
Defining Different Size Wires for a Single-Phase Induction Motor

2.
3.

For a round wire:

diameter.

data.
4.
5.

6.
Note
Defining the Rotor Data for a Single-Phase Induction Motor

The rotor consists of copper bars in which current is induced from the stator windings. The rotor
rotates at a slightly slower speed than the stator electromagnetic field. In the project tree, doubleclick Machine>Rotor, Machine-Rotor-Slot, and Machine-Rotor-Winding to define the physical
dimensions, slot data, wires, and conductors for the rotor.
To define the general rotor data:
1. To open the Rotor Properties window, double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project
2. Enter the stacking factor for the rotor core in the Stacking Factor field.
3.
4.

a.
b.
Note
c.

5.
6.
7.
8.

a.
9.
b.

c.
Enter the Skew Width, measured in rotor slot pitch. This value defines by how much the rotor
bars are skewed.
10. Optionally, select Cast Rotor to allow the conductor to fill all the space available in the slot.
Otherwise, RMxprt assumes the slot wedge that fixes the bars is filled with insulator material
in a 3D/3D geometry model.
Rotor Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors

Stacking Factor
Number of Slots
Slot Type
Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Steel Type
Skew Width
Cast Rotor

Type window.
Definition window.
Select or clear this to specify whether the rotor squirrel-cage winding is cast
or not.
Defining the Rotor Slots for Single-Phase Induction Motors

To define the rotors slots:
1. To open the Rotor Slot Properties window, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry in
the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the
2. Enter the slot dimensions in the following fields: Hs0, Hs01, Hs2, Bs0, Bs1, Bs2, Rs.
3.
Rotor Slot Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors

Hs0
Hs01
Hs1
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
Rs
Defining the Rotor Windings for Single-Phase Induction Motors

To define the rotor windings:
1. To open the Rotor Winding Properties window, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding
2. Select a Bar Conductor Type for the rotor winding bar:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Enter the length of the gap between the end ring and the iron core in the End Length field.
This field specifies the value for only one end of the gap, not both.
Enter the end ring dimension in the axial direction in the End-Ring Width field. The end ring
Enter the end ring dimension in the radius direction in the End-Ring Height field. The end
rings height covers at least the cross section of the rotor conductor.
Select an End Ring Conductor Type for the rotor winding end ring:
a.
7.
Click the button for Bar Conductor Type.

b.
Click the button for End Ring Conductor Type.

c.
Rotor Winding Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors

tree.
Bar Conductor
Type
End Length
End Ring Width
End Ring Height
End Ring
Conductor Type
The type of bar conductor used in the winding. Click the button to open the
Select Definition window.
The length of the single-side end of the extended bar.
The width of one side of the end rings in the axial direction.
The height of the end rings in the radian direction.
The type of end ring conductor used in the winding. Click the button to
open the Select Definition window.
Adding or Removing a Vent from a Single-Phase Induction Motor

By option, you can add a vent to a single-phase induction motor. To add a vent:.
To remove a vent from a rotor in a three-phase induction motor.
The vent icon disappears in the project tree under the rotor.
The Vent data for the stator includes the following fields.
Holes per row
Number of axial vent holes per row.
Inner hole diameter
Outer hole diameter
Inner hole location
Center to center diameter of inner hole vents
Outer hole location
Center to center diameter of outer hole vents.
Defining the Shaft Data for a Single-Phase Induction Motor

Shaft Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors


Magnetic Shaft
magnetic material.
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Single-Phase Induction Motor

Solution Setup.
type.
Const Speed
Const Power
Const Torque
Linear Torque
Fan Load

The torque increases linearly with speed. In this case, Tload = Trated * (n/
speed.
speed.
1.
2.
3.
Enter the desired output speed of the motor at the load point in the Rated Speed field.
4.
5.
Click the Single-Phase Induction Motor tab.
6.
Enter the electrical line frequency in the Frequency field, and select the units.
Click OK to close the Solution Setup window.
7.
Related Topics:
Solution Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors
Solution Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors


Operation Type
Load Type
Rated Output
Power
Rated Voltage
Rated Speed
Operating
Temperature
Frequency
On the General tab. The operation type is automatically set to Motor for
this machine type.
On the General tab. Select from Const Speed, Const Power, Const
Torque, Linear Torque, and Fan Load. The default is Const Power.
the units.
the units.
On the Single-Phase Induction Motor tab. Type a value for the frequency,
and select the units.
Related Topics:
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Single-Phase Induction Motor
Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines

After you have selected Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines as your model type, you need to
define the following:
General data, such as the voltage, speed, and circuit type of the model.
Circuit data, such as trigger pulse width, transistor drop, and control circuit information.
Stator data, such as the diameter, slot dimensions, and skew width of the stator.
Stator Winding
Rotor pole data, such as the associated permanent-magnet dimensions, air gap, and stacking
factor.
Analysis Approach Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines

In adjustable-speed permanent-magnet synchronous machines, the rotor speed is controlled by
adjusting the frequency of the input voltage. Unlike standard brushless permanent-magnet DC
motors, this type of machine does not utilize position sensors.
Permanent magnets are mounted on the rotor of a permanent-magnet synchronous machine, which
could be either inner or outer rotor type. The poly-phase armature winding is embedded in the stator, whose number of poles is the same as that of the rotor. The machine can operate as a generator
or as a motor. When the machine operates as a motor, the stator poly-phase winding can be fed
either by a sinusoidal AC source or by a DC source via a DC to AC inverter. When the machine
operates as a generator, the stator poly-phase winding supplies an AC source for electric loads.
Stator Winding Connected to a Sinusoidal AC Source

In this case, the performance of the machine can be analyzed in the frequency domain based on the
phasor diagrams, as shown in Figure 6.1 for the generators and Figure 6.2 for the motors.
jI Xaq
M
E0
jI X1
jI d Xad
IR1
jI q Xaq
I
Iq
Id
Figure 6.1 The phasor

diagram for generators
jI X1
jI Xaq
U
jI d Xad
IR1
E0
jI q Xaq
N
I
Iq
Id
O
Figure 6.2 The phasor diagram for motors
In the figures, R1 and X1 are the resistance and the leakage reactance of the armature winding, Xad
and Xaq are the d-axis armature reactance and the q-axis armature reactance, respectively. In the
phasor diagram, Xad is a linearized nonlinear parameter, and Xaq is a linear parameter. The d-axis
synchronous reactance Xd and q-axis synchronous reactance Xaq are calculated directly from
X d = X 1 + X ad
X q = X 1 + X aq
Let ? denote the power angle for a generator (the angle that U lags E0), or the torque angle for a
motor (the angle that E0 lags U), then we have
I d X d + I q R 1 = ( U cos E 0 )
I d R 1 + I q X q = U sin
where the plus sign + is for the motor and the minus sign - is for the generator.
Solving for Id and Iq yields
X q ( U cos E 0 ) R 1 U sin
I d = --------------------------------------------------------------------------2
R 1 + Xd Xq
R 1 ( U cos E 0 ) X d U sin
I q = --------------------------------------------------------------------------2
R 1 + Xd Xq
Let the angle that I lags E0 be , we have
1 Id
---- = tan
Iq
The power factor angle (the angle that I lags U) is
=
For the motor operation, the input electric power is
P 1 = 3UI cos
The output mechanical power is
P 2 = P 1 ( P fw + P Cua + P Fe )
where Pfw, PCua, and PFe denote the frictional and wind, the armature copper and the iron-core
losses, respectively.
The output mechanical torque is
P2
T 2 = -----
where denotes the synchronous speed in rad/s.

The efficiency of the motor is
P2
= ------ 100 %
P1
For the generator operation, the output electric power is
P 2 = 3UI cos
The input mechanical power is
P 1 = P 2 + P fw + P Cua + P Fe
where Pfw, PCua, and PFe denote the frictional and wind, the armature copper and the iron-core
losses, respectively.
The input mechanical torque is
P1
T 1 = -----
where denotes the synchronous speed in mechanical rad/s.
The efficiency of the generator is
P2
= ------ 100
P1
Stator Winding Fed by a DC to AC Inverter

In this case, this adjustable-speed synchronous machine (ASSM) operates as a motor, and the analysis approach is similar to that of a brushless DC (BLDC) motor. The stator poly-phase armature
winding is connected to a DC power supply through a DC to AC inverter to produce the rotational
magnetic field in the air-gap. The main difference between ASSM and BLDC motor is: in BLDC
motor, trigger time exactly depends on the rotor position; but in ASSM, the trigger time is independent of the rotor position. If the mechanical load of a BLDC motor increases, the rotor speed
and the induced voltage decreases, causing the armature current and torque increase to balance the
increased mechanical load. However, for an ASSM, if the mechanical load increases, the rotor
speed decreases temporarily, which causes the torque angle (the same as lead angle of trigger for a
BLDC motor) increase and then torque increase to retain the synchronous speed.
Therefore, the speed of a BLDC motor varies with input voltage and mechanical load, while the
speed of an ASSM does not. The speed of an ASSM can be changed by adjusting the frequency of
the controlling signal, which explains why it is called Adjustable-Speed Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Machine.
Using the time-domain mathematical model to analyze the characteristics of the electric machine,
Park's voltage equation in the matrix form is as follows
R1 + Ld Lq e
0
id
vq eq = Ld e R1 + Lq
0
iq
v0
e0
0
0
R1 + L0
i0
vd
ed
where R1 is the armature winding resistance, Ld, Lq and L0 are the d-, the q- and the 0-axis inductances respectively, e is the revolution speed in electric radians per second, the differential operator is
d
dt
The coordinate transformation equations for the terminal voltage, the induced emf and the armature
winding current are
vd
vq = C
v0
va
ed
vb
eq = C
e0
ea
eb
ia
id
ib = C iq
i0
The transformation matrices for the two-, the three- and the four-phase systems are C2, C3 and C4,
respectively, as follows
C2 =
cos sin 0
sin cos 0
1
------2
2
1
--- cos ( ) sin ( ) -----3
2
1
cos ( 2 ) sin ( 2 ) ------2
cos
C3 =
cos
C 4 = sin
cos
sin
sin
sin
cos
sin
cos
0
0
0
0
where
2
= ---
3
The input electric power is obtained from the voltage and the current as:
T
1
p 1 = --- ( v d i d + v q i q + v 0 i 0 ) dt
T
0
The output mechanical power is:
P 2 = P 1 ( P fw + P Cua + P Fe )
where Pfw, PCua, Pt and PFe denote the frictional and wind, the armature copper, the switching and
the iron-core losses, respectively.
The output mechanical torque is
P2
T 2 = -----
where denotes the revolution speed in mechanical radians per second.
The efficiency of the electric machine is
P2
= ------ 100 %
P1
Defining an Adjustable-Speed Synchronous Machine

The general procedure for defining a adjust-speed synchronous machine is as follows:
1. Insert the adjust-speed synchronous machine into a new or existing project.
3.
Double-click the Machine>Circuit entry in the project tree to define the control circuit.
4.
Double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree to define the stator geometry.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Pole entry in the project tree to define the pole, embrace,
offset, and air gap data for the rotor pole.
Double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree to define the magnetism of the shaft.
data.
Note
Once analyzed, the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler, or it can be used to create a
new Maxwell 2D project, and a new Maxwell 3D design.
Defining the General Data for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine

Use the General window to define the basic parameters of the motor, such as the motors rated output power, rated voltage, losses, and circuit types.
3. Enter the energy loss due to friction at the given speed in the Frictional Loss field.
4.
5.
Enter the wind loss due to air resistance measured at the reference speed in the Windage Loss
field.
6.
Select one of the following from the Control Type pull-down list:
7.
DC: Switched DC voltage at the given input frequency.

PWM: Pulse width modulation. When you select this source type, you must enter the following values in the Circuit Data Properties window: Modulation Index (the ratio of
the sine wave amplitude to the triangular amplitude) and Carrier Frequency Times (the
ratio of the triangular frequency to the sine wave frequency).
AC: An AC excitation.
Select a Circuit Type from the following types:

Y3 Y-connected, three-phase.
L3 Loop-type, three-phase.
S3 Star-type, three-phase.
C2 Cross-type, two-phase.
L4 Loop-type, four-phase.
S4 Star-type, four-phase.
The circuit types are based on industry standards. By default, type Y3, a three-phase, six-status
circuit, is selected as the circuit type.
Note
8.
When you place the mouse cursor over a circuit type, an outline schematic of the circuit
appears.
General Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines

fields:
(Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine).
Rotor Position
Frictional Loss
Windage Loss
The windage loss (due to air resistance) measured at the reference speed.
Control Type
The way the circuit is controlled. Select from DC, PWM (pulse-width
modulation), or AC.
Circuit Type
The drive circuit type. Click the button to open the Circuit Type window
and select from the following six types:
Machine Type
Y3: Y-Type, 3-Phase

L3: Loop-Type, 3-Phase
S3: Star-Type, 3-Phase
C2: Cross-Type, 2-Phase
Defining the Circuit Data for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine

Use the Circuit Data Properties window to define the circuit properties for an adjustable-speed
synchronous machine.
Note
No circuit data properties exist when AC is selected as the Control Type.
1.
To open the Circuit Data Properties window, double-click the Machine>Circuit entry in the
2.
If you selected DC as the Control Type, enter the period from on-status to off-status of a transistor, in electrical degrees, in the Trigger Pulse Width field.
3.
Enter the voltage drop across one transistor when the transistor is turned on in the Transistor
Drop field. Refer to the figures of the different circuit types in step 2.
4.
Enter the voltage drop of one diode in the discharge loop in the Diode Drop field. If you
selected a star-type circuit (S3 or S4) as the Circuit Type, enter the total discharge voltage in
this field.
5.
If you selected PWM as the Control Type, then enter values in the following two fields:
Modulation Index: The ratio of the sine-wave amplitude to the triangular amplitude.
(PWM circuits only.)
6.
Carrier Frequency Times: The ratio of the triangular frequency to the sine-wave frequency. (PWM circuits only.)
Circuit Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines

To access the Circuit Data Properties window, double-click the Machine>Circuit entry in the
project tree. No circuit data properties exist when AC is selected as the Control Type.
Trigger Pulse
The period from on-status to off-status for a transistor, in electrical degrees.
(DC circuits only.)
Width
Transistor Drop The voltage drop across one transistor when the transistor is turned on.
Diode Drop
The voltage drop across one diode in the discharge loop.
Modulation Index The ratio of the sine-wave amplitude to the triangular amplitude.
(PWM circuits only.)
Carrier
The ratio of the triangular frequency to the sine-wave frequency.
Frequency Times (PWM circuits only.)
Defining the Stator Data for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine

Use the Stator Properties windows to define the stator dimensions, slots, windings, and conductors.
The stator is the outer lamination stack where the polyphase voltage windings reside.
To define the general stator data:
4.
3.

5.
6.

a.
7.
8.
b.

c.

a.
b.
Note
c.
9.

Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4)..
Enter the skew width, measured in slot number, in the Skew Width field.
Defining the Stator Dimensions and Slots

Design check box.
Hs0
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
Rs
5.
Always available.
Always available.
Tooth Width field.
Tooth Width field.
Stator Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines


Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Stacking Factor
Steel Type
Number of Slots
Slot Type
Skew Width

Definition window.
Type window.
Stator Slot Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines

Parallel
Tooth
Hs0
Hs1
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
Rs
Defining the Stator Windings and Conductors for an Adjust-Speed

Synchronous Machine
To define the stator windings and conductors:
3.
4.

a.
b.

Whole Coiled
Half Coiled
Editor
Type
Description
A
user-defined
one-layer
winding
arrangement.
You need to set up the winding
One
arrangement
for
each
slot.
Layer
Winding
Editor
Whole
Coiled
Slot 123
Half
Coiled
Slot 123
A user-defined two-layer winding arrangement. When you select 20, the Winding Editor
Editor opens, where you can specify a different winding arrangement for each slot.
Whole
Coiled
Slot 123
number.
Half
Coiled
Slot 1 2 3

Note
c.
5.
pitch.
Select the Winding Type for the stator.
Note
When you place the mouse cursor over the winding type, a schematic of the selected
winding appears.
Winding types 10 and 20 are user-defined. If you select either of these, a window appears, asking you to define the name of the winding arrangement. The window closes when the user-
defined winding is entered.

Select from the following winding types:
One- A user-defined single-layer winding arrangement. When you select this type, enter the
Layer winding arrangement, and choose OK.
Winding
Editor
11
Slot 123
12
Slot 123
20
21
A user-defined winding arrangement. When you select this type, enter the winding
arrangement, and choose OK.
Slot 123
number.
22
A two-layer winding:
Slot 1 2 3
6.
Branches field.
7.
8. Enter the coil pitch, measured in number of slots, in the Coil Pitch field. The coil pitch is the
Insulation
Conductor
y
Wire Wrap = 2*y

a.

b.
c.

options:
d.

coils in the End Adjustment field. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the con-
ductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator.
End
Adjustment
End of Stator
Stator
Coil
Slot
Insulation
Winding Editor for an Adjustable-Speed Synchronous Machine

For a adjustable-speed synchronous machine, you may want to specify a different number of conductors for each stator slot. The Winding Editor makes this possible by enabling you to specify the
number of turns for each coil.
5. When you are satisfied with the coil settings, click OK to close the Winding Editor window.
Defining Different Size Wires for an Adjustable Speed Synchronous Machine

Use the Gauge option in the Wire Size dialog if you have a conductor that is made up different size
wires.
2.
3.
For a round wire:

diameter.

data.
4.
Click Add to add the new wire data.
5.
6.
When you are finished defining the wires, click OK to close the Wire Size window and return
to the RMxprt Properties window.

Note
Stator Winding Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines

tree.
Winding Type
Editor.
Slot
Coil Pitch
Number of
Strands
Wire Wrap
Wire Size
End/
Insulation Length
tab
stator.
Base Inner
Radius
Tip Inner
Diameter
Slot Liner
Limited Fill
Factor
Defining the Rotor Data for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine

the stator windings. In the project tree, double-click Machine>Rotor and Machine-Rotor-Pole to
define the rotor and the pole.
1. To open the Rotor Data Properties window, double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the
2. Enter the outer diameter of the rotor in the Outer Diameter field.
3.
4.
5.

a.
b.

c.
6.
7.
Select a Pole Type:

a.
b.
Note
c.
8.
Click the button.

The Select Pole Type window appears.
Click a button to select the desired pole type (1, 2, 3, 4, or 5). TIP: When you run the
mouse over each option, the diagram changes to show that pole type.
When you place the mouse cursor over a rotor type, an outline of the selected circuit type
appears.
Click OK to close the Select Pole Type window and return to the Properties window.
Rotor Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines

Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Steel Type
Stacking Factor
Pole Type

Definition window.
The pole type for the rotor. Click this button to open the Select Pole Type
window and select from the following types: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
Defining the Rotor Pole for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine

The rotor pole drives the electromagnetic field which is coupled with the stator windings. Use the
Rotor Pole Data Properties window to define the rotor pole.
Note
Some of the fields in the Rotor Pole window change, or are inactive, depending on the
Rotor Type you select.
To define the rotor pole:

1.
To open the Rotor Pole Data Properties window, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Pole
2.
For all pole types except type 4, enter the ratio of the actual arc distance in relation to the max-
imum possible arc distance in the Embrace field. This value is between 0 and 1.
Pole Embrace = 1.0
Pole Embrace = 0.7

3.
For pole type 4, enter the shaft diameter of the rotor in the Shaft Diameter field.
4.
For pole types 1, 2, and 3, enter the distance from the center of the rotor to the polar arc center
in the Offset field. Enter 0 for a uniform air gap.
Magnet
Radius Rotor OD
Radius
Offset
5.
For pole type 5, enter the thickness of the bridge across the two poles in the Bridge field.
6.
For pole type 5, enter the width of the rib supporting the bridge in the Rib field.
7.
Select the type of magnet to use in the rotor pole from the Magnet Type pull-down menu.
8.
For pole types 4 and 5, enter the width of the magnet in the Magnet Width field.
9.
Enter the maximum radial thickness of the magnet in the Magnet Thickness field.

Rotor Pole Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines

To access the pole rotor data, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Pole entry in the project tree.
The Rotor Pole Data Properties window contains the following fields:
Embrace
The pole embrace. For pole types 1, 2, 3, and 5.
Shaft Diameter
The shaft diameter of the rotor. For pole type 4.
Offset
The pole-arc center offset from the rotor center (0 for a uniform air gap).
For pole types 1, 2, and 3.
Bridge
The thickness of the bridge across two adjacent poles. For pole type 5.
Rib
The width of the rib at the center of two adjacent poles that support the
bridge. For pole type 5.
Magnet Type
The type of magnet. Click the button to open the Select Definition
window. For all pole types.
Magnet Width
The maximum width of the magnet. For pole types 4 and 5.
Magnet
Thickness
The maximum thickness of the magnet. For all pole types.
Defining the Shaft Data for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine

Shaft Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines

Magnetic Shaft
Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft is made
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous

Machine
1. Right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add Solution Setup to open the Solution
2.
Setup window.
Click the General tab. The Operation Type is automatically set to Motor for this machine
type.
Note
a.
To enable selection of Generator for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines, the machine

Control Type must be set to AC in its Properties window.
If Motor was selected for the Operation Type, select the Load Type used in the motor
from the following options:
Const Speed
Const Power
Const Torque
Linear Torque
speed.
Fan Load
nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the given
rated speed.
b.
3.
If Generator was selected for the Operation Type, select the Load Type used in the generator from the following options: Infinite Bus or Independent Generator.
4.
Enter either the RMS line-to-line voltage (for AC control type), or the DC voltage (for DC and
PWM control types) in the Rated Voltage field.
5.
6.
7.
Click the Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine tab and select either Time or Frequency as
the Domain for the solution.
8.
Related Topics:
Solution Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines
Solution Data for Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machines

For this machine type, there is only one tab, the General tab.

Operation Type
The operation type is automatically set to Motor for this machine type.
Load Type
Select from Const Speed, Const Power, Const Torque, Linear Torque,
and Fan Load. The default is Const Power.
Rated Output
Power
Type a value for the rated output voltage, and select the units.
Rated Voltage
Type a value for the rated voltage, and select the units.
Rated Speed
Type a value for the rated speed, and select the units.
Operating
Temperature
Type a value for the operating temperature, and select the units.
Related Topics:
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for an Adjust-Speed Synchronous Machine
Permanent-Magnet DC Motors
After you have selected Permanent-Magnet DC Motors as your model type, you need to define
the following:
Stator data, such as the diameter, slot dimensions, and skew width of the stator.
Stator pole data, such as its associated pole dimensions, type of steel, and pole magnet specifications.
Rotor data, such as the slot types and dimensions, slot data, and windings.
Commutator and brush data, such as the commutator dimensions and brush length.
Shaft data
Analysis Approach for PMDC Motors

For a permanent-magnet DC motor, the stator is equipped with P pairs of permanent magnets, creating P pairs of alternating north and south poles. The distribution of the magnetic field produced
by the permanent magnets field flux is fixed with respect to the stator. The rotor is equipped with a
distributed winding connected to a commutator that revolves together with the rotor.
A system of brushes is kept in permanent electrical contact with the commutator. When DC current
is applied to the rotor winding (via the brushes and commutator), a torque is produced by the interaction of the rotor (armature) currents and the field produced by the permanent magnets.
The commutator causes the armature to create a magnetic flux distribution that is fixed in space and
whose axis is perpendicular to the axis of the field flux produced by the permanent magnets. For
these motors, the commutator acts as a mechanical rectifier.
The performance of a permanent-magnet DC (PMDC) motor is computed by DC analysis only. The
voltage equation of a PMDC motor is:
U = Ub + R1 * I + E
where Ub is the voltage drop of one-pair brushes, R1 is the armature resistance, E = Ke * is the
back emf with Ke the back-emf constant in Vs/rad, and is the speed in rad/s. For a given speed
, armature current can be computed based on the applied voltage U, as shown below:
I = (U - Ub - Ke * )/R1
The shaft torque T2 is computed by:
T2 = Kt * I - Tfw
where Kt is the torque constant in Nm/A, which is numerically the same as Ke, and Tfw is the frictional torque.
The output power (mechanical power) is:
P2 = T2 *
The input power (electrical power) is:
P1 = P2 + Pfw + Pcua + Pb + PFe

where Pfw, Pcua, Pb, and PFe are frictional and wind loss, armature copper loss, brush drop loss,
and iron-core loss, respectively.
The efficiency is:
eff = P2/P1 * 100%
Defining a Permanent-Magnet DC Motor

The general procedure for defining a permanent-magnet DC motor is as follows:
1. Insert the permanent-magnet DC motor into a new or existing project.
2.
Double-click the Machine entry in the project tree to define the general data.
3.
Double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree to define the stator geometry.
4.
Double-click the Machine-Stator-Pole entry in the project tree to define the stator pole
dimensions.
Double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree to define the rotor geometry.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree to define the rotor windings and conductors.
Double-click the Machine>Commutator entry in the project tree to define the commutator
and brush data.
Double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree to define the magnetism of the shaft.
data.
Note
new Maxwell 2D project, and a new Maxwell 3D project.
Refer to the Permanent-Magnet DC Motor Problem application note, on the technical support page
of the ANSYS web site, for a specific example of a permanent-magnet DC motor problem.
Defining the General Data for PMDC Motors

Use the General window to specify the rated output power, voltage values, circuit type, and speed
of the DC motor.
2.
3.

Enter the number of poles for the machine in the Number of Poles field. This value is the total
Note
4.
To use the Brush Press and Frictional Coefficient fields when you define the
commutator and brush later in the Commutator/Brush Data window, enter 0 here for
the Friction Loss.
5.
field.
6.
General Data for PMDC Motors

fields:
The machine type you selected when inserting a new RMxprt design (DC
Permanent Magnet Motor).
Rotor Position
Frictional Loss
Wind Loss
Machine Type
Defining the Stator Data for a PMDC Motor

2.
3.
4.
5.
Enter the stacking factor for the stator core in the Stacking Factor field. This value is a ratio of
the effective magnetic length of the core, and ranges from 0 to 1. It is defined as the total
length minus the total insulation from the laminations, divided by the total length. A value of 1
indicates that the stator is not laminated.
6.
Stator Data for PMDC Motors

Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Stacking Factor

Defining the Stator Pole for a PMDC Motor

The rotor pole drives the electromagnetic field which is coupled with the stator windings. Use the s
Stator Pole Data Properties window to define the stator pole.
1. To open the Stator Pole Data Properties window, double-click the Machine-Stator-Pole
Note
2.
For a two-pole machine, a pole embrace of 0.75 yields a magnet with a span of 135
degrees (based on 0.75*180 degrees).
Enter the ratio of the actual arc distance in relation to the maximum possible arc distance in the
Embrace field. This value is between 0 and 1.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Enter the distance from the center of the stator to the magnet arc center in the Offset field.
Enter 0 for a uniform air gap.
To select the type of magnet to use in the rotor pole:
a. Click the Magnet Type button.
b. Select or define a material for the magnet type.
c. Click OK to close the Select Definition window and return to the Properties window.
Enter the length of the magnet in the axial direction in the Magnet Length field.
Enter the maximum radial thickness of the magnet at the center of the pole in the Magnet
Thickness field. To control the flux, the magnets thickness may vary.
Stator Pole Data for PMDC Motors

To access the stator pole data, double-click the Machine-Stator-Pole entry in the project tree.
The Stator Pole Data Properties window contains the following fields:
Embrace
The pole embrace.
Offset
The pole-arc center offset from the stator center (0 for a uniform air gap).
Magnet Type
The type of magnet. Click the button to open the Select Definition window.
Magnet Length The maximum length of the magnet.
Magnet Thickness The maximum thickness of the magnet.
Defining the Rotor Data for a PMDC Motor

The rotor is equipped with slots containing copper conductors that are connected to the commutator. The commutator acts as a mechanical rectifier in the motor.
Use the Rotor Data Properties, Rotor Slot Data Properties, and Rotor Winding Data Properties windows to define the rotor slots, windings, and dimensions.
To define general rotor data:
1.
2.
To open the Rotor Data Properties window, double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the
3.
4.

a.
b.
Note

Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 4)..
When you place the mouse cursor over the slot type, a schematic outline of the slot
appears.
5.
c.
6.
7.
8.

a.
b.
c.
9.

Rotor Data for PMDC Motors


Stacking Factor
Number of Slots
Slot Type
Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Steel Type
Skew Width

Type window.
Definition window.
Defining the Rotor Slots for a PMDC Motor

To define the physical dimensions of the rotor slots:
1. To open the Rotor Slot Data Properties window, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry
Design check box.
Hs0
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
Rs
4.
Always available.
Always available.
slot dimension is determined automatically. When Parallel Tooth is selected, this
slot dimension is determined based on the value entered in the Tooth Width field.
Rotor Slot Data for PMDC Motors

To access the stator slot data, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry in the project tree.
Hs0
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
Rs
Rs
Defining the Rotor Windings and Conductors for a PMDC Motor

To define the rotor windings, wires, and conductors:
1. To open the Rotor Slot Winding Properties window, double-click the Machine-RotorWinding entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties
3.

a.
b.

4.
Lap
Wave
Frog Leg
Enter the number of windings in the Multiplex Number field (1 for a single winding, 2 for
double windings, 3 for triple windings). For a lap winding, the multiplex number is the number
of commutators between the start and end of one winding, and the number of parallel branches
is equal to the number of poles multiplied by the multiplex number. For a wave winding, the
number of parallel branches equals the multiplex number multiplied by two.
5.
Enter the number of virtual slots per each real slot in the Virtual Slots field. The rotor is
assumed to have two layers of conductors, an upper and a lower layer. Each layer of conductors can have a number of windings, which are referred to as virtual slots.
Note
6.
7.
8.
9.
For example, the upper and lower layer can have two windings each, which would yield
a virtual slot number of two; for a 12 slot machine, this would yield 24 commutation
segments.
Enter the total number of conductors in each rotor slot in the Conductors per Slot field. This
value is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. This value is the total
number of conductors in one real full rotor slot.
Insulation
Conductor
y
Wire Wrap = 2*y

a.
b.
c.

options:
d.

End
Adjustment
End of Stator
Stator
Coil
16. Enter the distance between two rotor coils in the End Clearance field.
Slot
Insulation
21. Select the type of equalizer connection from the Equalizer Connection pull-down menu.
Select from None, Half, or Full.
Defining Different Size Wires for a PMDC Motor

1.
In the Wire Size window, select MIXED from the Gauge pull-down menu.
2.
3.
For a round wire:

diameter.

data.
4.
5.
6.
Note
Rotor Winding Data for PMDC Motors

To access the stator winding data, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project
tree.
Winding tabWinding Type
End/
Insulation
tab
The type of rotor winding. Click the button to open the Winding
Type window and choose from Lap, Wave, and Frog Leg.
Multiplex Number Single, double, or triple windings (1, 2, or 3).

Virtual Slots
The number of virtual slots per real slot.
Conductors per The number of conductors per rotor slot (0 for auto-design).
Slot
Coil Pitch
Number of
Strands
Wire Wrap
Wire Size
Length
Base Inner Radius The inner radius of the base corner.
Tip Inner
Diameter
End Clearance
The end clearance between two adjacent coils.
Slot Liner
Limited Fill FactorThe limited slot fill factor for the wire design.
Equalizer
The connection type of the equalizer. Select from None, Half, or
Full.
Connection
Defining the Commutator and Brush for a PMDC Motor

The commutator allows current transfer between DC terminals or brushes and the rotor coils, providing the current to the system as a function of rotation. Due to the action of the commutator, the
corresponding magnetic field has a fixed distribution with respect to the stator.
To define the commutator and brush pairs:
1. To open the Commutator Data Properties window, double-click the Machine>Commutator entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a separate window.)
2.
Click the Commutator tab.
3.
Select Cylinder or Pancake Type as the Commutator Type.
Note
4.
5.
6.
When you place the mouse cursor over the commutator type, an outline of the
commutator appears.
For Cylinder commutators, do the following:

a.
Enter the Commutator Diameter.
b.
Enter the Commutator Length.
For Pancake commutators, do the following:

a.
Enter the Outer Diameter.
b.
Enter the Inner Diameter.
Enter the thickness of the insulation between two consecutive commutator segments in the
Commutator Insulation field.
7.
8.
Click the Brush tab.

Enter the Brush Width.
9.
Enter the Brush Length.
10. Enter the number of brush pairs when using a wave armature winding in the Brush Pairs field.
11. Enter the angle of displacement from the neutral axis, in mechanical degrees, in the Brush Displacement field.
Note
The brush displacement is positive for the counter-clockwise direction. For example, if
the rotor turns clockwise and the brush displacement is also clockwise, then the angle is
negative; if the rotor turns clockwise but the brush displacement is counter-clockwise,
then the angle is positive.
12. Enter the voltage drop across one brush pair in the Brush Drop field.
13. Enter the mechanical pressure of the brushes as they press against the commutator in the
Brush Press field.
14. Enter the Frictional Coefficient of the brush.
Note
If the Friction Loss field is used in the General window, the Brush Press and
Frictional Coefficient fields will be hidden in the Commutator/Brush window. These
fields are shown only when the Friction Loss field in the General window is set to zero.
Commutator and Brush Data for PMDC Motors

To access the commutator and brush data, double-click the Machine>Commutator entry in the
project tree.
The Commutator Data Properties window contains the following fields:
Commutator Commutator Type The type of commutator. Click the button to open the Select
tab
Commutator Type window and select from Cylinder or
Pancake.
Commutator
Diameter
For a Cylinder commutator type, the diameter of the commutator.
Commutator
Length
For a Cylinder commutator type, the length of the commutator.
Outer Diameter
For a Pancake commutator type, the outer diameter of the

commutator.
For a Pancake commutator type, the inner diameter of the
commutator.
The thickness of the insulation between the two commutator bars.
Inner Diameter
Commutator
Insulation
Brush tab
Brush Width
Brush Length
Brush Pairs
Brush
Displacement
Brush Drop
Brush Press
Frictional
Coefficient
The width of the brush.

The length of the brush.
The number of brush pairs.
The displacement of the brush from the neutral position, in
mechanical degrees (positive for anti-rotating direction).
The voltage drop across a one-pair brush.
The brush press per unit area. (Available only when Frictional
Loss is set to zero for the machine.)
The frictional coefficient of the brush. (Available only when
Frictional Loss is set to zero for the machine.)
Defining the Shaft Data for a PMDC Motor

Shaft Data for PMDC Motors

Magnetic Shaft
magnetic material.
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a PMDC Motor

Solution Setup.
type.
3.
Select the Load Type used in the motor from the following options:
Const Speed
Const Power

Const Torque
Linear Torque
Fan Load
speed.
speed.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Related Topics:
Solution Data for PMDC Motors
Solution Data for PMDC Motors

Operation Type
Load Type
Rated Output
Power
Rated Voltage
Rated Speed
Operating
Temperature
Related Topics:
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a PMDC Motor
Three-Phase Synchronous Machines

After you have selected Three-Phase Synchronous Machines as your model type, you need to
define the following:
General data, such as the unit system, power, and voltage.

Stator data, such as the slot types and dimensions, stator diameter, skew width, and laminations.
Optional stator Vent data.
Winding data, such as the parallel branches, conductors, and wire dimensions.
Rotor pole data, such as its associated pole-body dimensions and air gaps.
Optional Rotor damper data, such as the damper dimensions, rings, and material properties.
Rotor winding data and the winding control parameters.
Shaft Data
Solution data, such as specifying motor or generator application, and rated output voltage and
frequency.
Also see the Analysis Approach for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines.
Analysis Approach for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines

The three-phase salient-pole synchronous electric machine has two types: the generator and the
motor. Their basic structures are the same. Three-phase synchronous generators are the main source
of electrical energy for industrial, commercial, and private use. They receive mechanical energy at
the shaft and transform it into electrical energy. The rotor is equipped with a multi-pole winding
excited by a DC source. The stator is equipped with a three-phase winding that has a sinusoidal
spatial distribution. The spinning rotor produces a rotating magnetic field in the air gap of the
machine. The frequency of the voltage induced in the stator is given by f=pv, where p is the number
of pairs of poles, and v is the velocity of the rotor. The machine is capable of producing both active
and reactive power as required by the load connected at the stator phasor.
The three-phase salient-pole synchronous electric machine has two types: the generator and the
motor. Their basic structures are the same. Usually the frequency-domain phasor diagram is
adopted to analyze the characteristics. The phasor diagram for a generator is shown on the left and
and that for a motor is shown on the right.
jI X1
jI Xaq
U
jI d Xad
IR1
E0
jI q Xaq
N
I
Iq
Id
O
Generator
Motor
In the figure, R1, X1, Xad, and Xaq are armature resistance, armature leakage reactance, d-axis
armature reactance, and q-axis armature reactance, respectively. Xad is nonlinear, while a linearized value is used in the phasor diagram. Taking the input voltage U as the reference phasor, for a
given current:
I = I
where is the power factor angle, a phasor represented by OM can be derived by:
U + I(R1 + jX1 + jXaq)
The direction of E0 can, therefore, be obtained. Taking the power angle, the angle that U legs E0,
as , then the angle that I legs E0 is:
= +
The d- and q-axis currents are then represented by the following:
Id = I * sin( )
Iq = I * cos( )
The phasor length ON represents the d-axis back EMF from d-axis resultant flux linkage and is
used to determine the d-axis field saturation. Then a frozen method is applied to derive E0, Xad, and
exciting current If.
The output power (electric power) is directly computed from voltage and current as:
P2 = 3*U*I*cos( )
The input power (mechanical power) is defined as:
P1 = P2 + Pfw + Pcua + PFe + Padd + Pcuf + Pex

where Pfw, Pcua, PFe, Padd, Pcuf and Pex are frictional and wind loss, armature copper loss, ironcore loss, additional loss, field winding copper loss, and exciter loss, respectively.
The input mechanical shaft torque is:
T1 = P1/
where SYMBOL is synchronous speed in rad/s.
eff = P2/P1 * 100%

Main Features
Adapted to both Synchronous Motor and Generator

The structures of the salient-pole synchronous motor and the generator are basically the same,
but their phasor relationships and the computation methods are slightly different, their output
characteristics data are also different. This is specified in the solution setup.
Auto Arrangement of Three-phase Windings
Almost all commonly used three-phase single- and double-layer, half- and whole-type ac
windings (including fractional-pitch windings) can be automatically arranged. Users do not
need to define coils one by one. RMxprt also supports a double-layer winding with half-turn
coils which are auto-arranged in the order of even, odd, even, odd, , and even, odd, as long
as it is physically possible.
When a designer adopts single-layer whole-coiled windings, RMxprt will perform winding
arrangement optimization to minimize the average coil pitch. When asymmetric three-phase
windings are used, winding arrangement is optimized in such a way that minimum negativesequence and zero-sequence components are achieved.
Winding Editor Supporting Any Single- and Double-Layer Windings
Besides taking advantage of the winding auto-arrangement function in RMxprt, users can also
specify any special winding by using of the Winding Editor function.
In Winding Editor, through modification of phase belonging, number of turns, in-slot and outslot number of each coil, it is possible to design single- and double-layer winding arrangement
for any purposes.
Analyze Air-Gap Magnetic Field Distribution
For both uniform and non-uniform air gaps, Schwarz-Christopher Transformation is adopted
to solve for the air-gap magnetic field distribution.
Analyze EMF Waveform and Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
Based on the analysis of the air-gap magnetic field waveform, taking into account coil short
pitch, winding distribution, skew slot, winding connection, load effects and other factors, the
emf waveforms in the coils and the windings are analyzed to solve for the emf distortion facRMxprt Machine Types 9-95
tors.
Analyze Dynamic Parameters of Damping Winding

Different from the squirrel-cage winding of the induction machine, the damping winding of the
salient-pole synchronous machine is located in the surface of magnetic field poles, which deviates greatly along the d- and the q-axes. Furthermore, the connection of damping bars has several forms. The bars under each pole could be connected, but not connected with those under
other poles. All the bars could be connected together. The bars could be connected through
end-plate. RMxprt can deal with all those complicated situations and give the dynamic parameters for the damping winding.
Defining a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine

The general procedure for defining a three-phase synchronous machine is as follows:
1. Insert a three-phase synchronous machine into a existing or new project.
3.
4.
5. Optionally, you can add a vent to, or remove an existing vent from the stator. To add a vent,
select the stator, and right-click to display the pop-up menu for Insert Vent.
6. Double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree to define the stator windings, conductors, and insulation data.
7. Double-click the Machine-Rotor entry in the project tree to define the general rotor geometry,
the pole data, and the insulation data.
8. Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree to define the rotor conductors and windings.
9. Optionally, you can add a damper to the design or remove an existing damper. To add a
damper, use Machine-Insert Damper. This inserts the damper in the project tree under the
rotor. You must then specify the slot type and other properties for the damper.
10. Optionally, you can add a vent to, or remove an existing vent from the rotor. To add a vent
select the rotor, and right-click to display the pop-up menu. Use Insert Vent.
11. Double-click the Machine-Shaft entry in the project tree to define the magnetism of the shaft.
12. Right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add Solution Setup to define this solution
data.
Note
When you place the cursor over an entry field, a brief description of that field appears in
the status bar at the bottom of the RMxprt window.
Once the design is analyzed, the model can be viewed in the Maxwell 2D Modeler, or it can be used
to create a new Maxwell 2D project, and a Maxwell 3D design.
Defining the General Data for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine

Use the General Data Properties window to define the power settings, speed, and efficiency of the
generator. This window allows you to define the basic parameters of the synchronous generator,
such as power, voltage, winding connections, and losses.
3. Enter the power lost through frictional forces in the Frictional Loss field.
4.
Enter the wind loss measured at the reference speed in the Wind Loss field.
5.
6.
General Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines

fields:
Phase Synchronous Machine).
Frictional Loss
Wind Loss
Machine Type
Defining the Stator for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine

Use the Stator windows to define the slot dimensions, stacking factors, air ducts, and insulation of
the stator. The stator is the outer lamination stack where the three-phase windings reside.
2.
3.

4.
5.

6.

a.
b.

7.
c.
8.

a.
b.
Note
c.

Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 6). Slot types 1 though 4 are filled
with round wire. Slot types 5 and 6 are filled with rectangular wire. If Auto Design is
enabled, the software designs an optimum slot geometry; in this case, you can input the
tooth width dimension, and the software determines the slot width accordingly.
9.

10. Enter the thickness of the magnetic pressboard in the Pressboard Thickness field. Enter 0 for
a non-magnetic pressboard.
Stator Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines

Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Stacking Factor
Steel Type
Number of Slots
Slot Type

Definition window.
Type window.
Lamination
Sectors
Pressboard
Thickness
Skew Width

The magnetic press board thickness (0 for a non-magnetic press board).
Defining Stator Slots for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine

To define the slot dimensions:
Design check box.
Hs0
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
5.
Always available.
Always available.
Tooth Width field.
Tooth Width field.
Stator Slot Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines

Parallel
Tooth
Hs0
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
Rs
Defining Stator Windings and Insulation for a Three-Phase Synchronous
Machine
Use the Stator Winding window to define the stator winding data, such as the coils, wires, insulation, number of parallel branches, and physical dimensions of the windings.
End Clearance
Base-End
Inner Radius
End Adjustment
Top-End
Inner Diameter
End of Stator
Stator Coil
The stator winding data defines the configuration of one phase of the three-phase windings.
To define the stator windings and insulation:
3.
4.

a.
b.

Whole Coiled
Half Coiled
Editor
Type
Description
A user-defined one-layer winding arrangement. You need to set up the winding arrangement
for each slot. For this winding type, the following letters are used for the phase windings:
Editor
Phase A/A return uses A/X.

Phase B/B return uses B/Y.
Phase C/C return uses C/Z.

Whole
Coiled
Slot 123
Half
Coiled
Slot 123
Whole
Coiled
Slot 123
number.
Half
Coiled
Slot 1 2 3

Note
Example 1: A one layer winding arranged in 12 slots should be defined as type 10, with
the following arrangement: AAZZBBXXCCYY
Example 2: A two layer winding arranged in 12 slots should be defined as type 20, with
Only the top layer needs to be defined; the bottom layer will be determined according to
the coil pitch.
c.
5.
Select a Winding Type. When you place the mouse cursor over a winding, an outline of the
selected winding appears. The following winding types are available:
10 A user-defined single-layer winding arrangement. When you select it, enter the winding
arrangement, and choose OK. For this winding type, the following letters are used for the
phase windings:
phase A/A return uses A/X.

phase B/B return uses B/Y.
11
phase C/C return uses C/Z.

12
Slot 123
Slot 123
20 A user-defined winding arrangement. When you select this type, enter the winding
arrangement, and choose OK.
21 A two-layer wave winding:
Slot 123
number.
22 A two-layer winding:
Slot 1 2 3
Note
Example 1: A one layer winding arranged in 12 slots should be defined as type 10, with
Example 2: A two layer winding arranged in 12 slots should be defined as type 20, with
Only the top layer needs to be defined; the bottom layer will be determined according to
the coil pitch.
6.
Branches field.
7.
8.
9.
Insulation
Conductor
y
Wire Wrap = 2*y

a.
b.
c.

options:
d.

End
Adjustment
End of Stator
Stator
Coil
Stator Winding and Insulation for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines

To access the stator winding and insulation data, double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry
in the project tree.
Winding Type
Editor.
Slot
Coil Pitch
Number of
Strands
Wire Wrap
Wire Size
End/
Insulation Length7
tab
stator.
Base Inner
Radius
Tip Inner
Diameter
Slot Liner

Limited Fill
Factor
Winding Editor for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine

For a three-phase synchronous machine, you may want to specify a different number of conductors
for each stator slot. The Winding Editor makes this possible by enabling you to specify the number
of turns for each coil.
3.
4.
5.
Defining Different Size Wires for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine

1.
2.
3.
For a round wire:

diameter.

data.
4.
5.
6.
Note
Stator Vent Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines

To insert a vent on a stator for a three phase synchronous machine:
1. Right click on the stator icon in the project tree to display the shortcut menu.
2. Click Insert Vent.
To remove an existing vent item,
1. Right-click on the stator icon in the project tree to display the shortcut menu.
2. Click Remove Vent.
This removes the vent item from the project tree.
To access the Vent properties for a vent, double click on a vent item. The Vent Properties window
contains the following fields.
Vent Ducts
The number of radial vent ducts.
Duct Width
The width of the radial vent ducts.
Magnetic spacer
width
Width of magnetic spacer which holds vent ducts. O for non-magnetic spacer.
Duct pitch.

Defining the Rotor for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine

the stator windings. In the project tree, double-click Machine-Rotor and Machine-Rotor-Winding to define the rotor.
To define the general rotor data:
1.
2.
To open the Rotor Data Properties window, double-click the Machine-Rotor entry in the
Click the Rotor tab.
3.
4.
5.
6.

a.
b.
c.

7.
8.
Click the Pole tab.
9.
Enter the pole-arc center offset from the rotor center in the Pole Arc Offset field.
Radius
Offset
10. Enter the width of the pole shoe in the Pole Shoe Width field.
11. Enter the height of the pole shoe in the Pole Shoe Height field.
12. Enter the width of the pole body in the Pole Body Width field.
13. Enter the height of the pole body in the Pole Body Height field.
14. Enter the width between the rotor pole and rotor yoke in the Second Air Gap field.
15. To include the two arcs in the half-pole range, do the following:
a.
Select the Select Pole Arc check box.
b.
Enter the offset of the second arc perpendicular to the pole-center line in the Off2_x field.
c.
Enter the offset of the second arc parallel with the pole-center line in the Off2_y field.
16. Select or clear the Magnetic PressBoard check box to specify whether or not the press board
is made of magnetic material.
17. Enter the thickness of the press board in the Press Board Thickness field.
18. Click the Insulation tab.
19. Enter the thickness of the insulating material beneath the shoe pole in the Shoe Insulation
field.
20. Enter the thickness of the insulating material on the side of the pole body in the Pole Insulation field.
21. Enter the clearance distance between the windings in the Winding Clearance field.
Rotor, Rotor Pole, and Insulation for Three-Phase Synchronous

Machines
To access the general rotor data, pole data, and insulation data double-click the Machine>Rotor
entry in the project tree.
Rotor tab
Pole tab
Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Steel Type
Stacking Factor
Pole Arc Offset
Pole Shoe Width
Pole Shoe Height
Pole Body Width
Pole Body Height
Second Air Gap

Definition window.
The pole-arc center offset from the rotor center.
The width of the pole shoe.
The height of the pole shoe.
The width of the pole body.
The height of the pole body.
The width of the second air gap, between the rotor pole and rotor
yoke.
Insulation
tab
Second Pole Arc Select or clear this option to specify whether or not the pole
surface includes the two arcs in the half-pole range. When you
select this check box, two additional fields appear: Off2_x and
Off2_y.
Off2_x
The offset of the second arc perpendicular to the pole-center line.
This field is only available when Second Pole Arc is selected.
Off2_y
The offset of the second arc parallel with the pole-center line. This
field is only available when Second Pole Arc is selected.
Magnetic
Select or clear this option to specify whether or not the press
board is made of magnetic material.
PressBoard
Press Board
The thickness of the press board.
Thickness
Steel Type
The steel type of the rotor pole. Click the button to open the Select
Definition window. Default value is the same as the rotor core.
Stacking Factor The stacking factor of the rotor pole. Default value is the same as
the rotor core.
Shoe Insulation The thickness of the insulating material beneath the pole shoe.
Pole Insulation
Winding
Clearance
The thickness of the insulating material on the side of the pole

body.
The clearance distance between the windings.
Defining the Rotor Pole for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine

The rotor pole drives the electromagnetic field that is coupled with the stator windings.
The following figure shows a partial diagram of a rotor pole:
The following figure shows a diagram of an entire rotor:
Defining the Rotor Winding Data for a Three-Phase Synchronous
Machine
Use the Rotor Winding window to define the wires and physical dimensions of the rotor winding.
The rotor winding provides the excitation for the electromagnetic field that produces the rotor pole.
Slot pitch
Center
slot pitch
Pole shoe width
Pole
insulation
Overall
height
Shoe
insulation
Wire
width
Pole body
width
Wire thickness
Second air-gap
To define the rotor windings:

1. To open the Rotor Winding Properties window, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding
2. Select the Winding Type for the rotor:
a.
b.
Click the button.

Click to select the type of winding, from Round, Cylinder, or EdgeWise.
When you place the mouse cursor over the winding type, a schematic of the selected winding appears
3.
c.
Click OK to return to the Properties window.

Enter the number of parallel branches for the winding in the Parallel Branches field.
4.
5.
Conductors per Pole

Enter the number of wires in each conductor in the Number of Strands field.
6.
Enter the width of the insulating wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field.
Interturn Insulation
Enter the gauge of the wire in the Wire Size field.
7.
8.
9.
Enter the Axial Clearance to specify the axial distance between the core and the coil at the end
of the lamination stack.
Winding
Fillet
Axial
Clearance
Rotor
winding
Radial
Duct
Width
Rotor
length
10. Limited Cross Width

11. Limited Cross Height
12. Winding Fillet
Rotor Winding Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines

tree.
The type of rotor winding. Click the button to open the Winding Type
window and choose from Whole Coiled, Half Coiled, and Editor.
Parallel Branches The number of parallel branches in the rotor winding.
Conductors per The number of conductors per rotor pole (0 for auto-design).
Pole
Number of
Strands
Wire Wrap
The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to automatically obtain this
value from the wire library).
Interturn
The thickness of the inter-turn insulation of an edgewise winding. This field
only appears when EdgewiseCoil is selected as the Winding Type.
Insulation
Wire Size
The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design). Click the button to open the
Wire Size window where you can specify units, wire type, diameter, and
gauge.
Axial Clearance The axial gap between the field winding and the pole body or inner coil.
Limited Cross
The limited cross-section width for the winding design or arrangement (0
for available maximum area).
Width
Limited Cross
The limited cross-section height for the winding design or arrangement (0
for available maximum area).
Height
Winding Fillet
The size of the winding fillet.
Winding Type
Defining the Rotor Damper Data

To define a rotor damper for a machine that permits one:
1. Click Machine>Insert Damper.
2.
3.
4.
The Damper icon appears in the project tree under the rotor icon. A slot icon appears in the
hierarchy under the damper.
Double click on the Damper icon to display the properties window for the damper.
Enter the appropriate values for the damper. The slot type, the bar conductor type, and end
conductor type are entered by clicking on buttons that open other windows.
Click OK to close the properties window.
Damper Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines

By option, you can add a damper to or remove damper from the rotor of a three phase machine.
To add a damper:
1. Right-click on the rotor icon in the project tree to display the short cut menu.
2.
Click Insert Damper on the menu.
1.
The damper appears in the project tree under the rotor. The damper also includes an associated
slot.
To remove a damper, right-click on the rotor icon in the project tree to display the short cut
menu.
Click Remove Damper on the menu.
2.
The damper and associated slot are removed from the project tree.
The damper data contains the following fields.
Damper slots per Number of damper slots per pole.

pole
Slot type
Damper slot type. Specify this by clicking the button in the properties field
and selecting from the Select Slot Type window.
Cast Rotor.
Whether the rotor squirrel cage winding is cast.
Bar conductor
type.
Specify this by clicking the button in the properties field, and using the Select
Definition window to find and assign materials.
End length
Single side end extended bar length/
End ring width
Axial width of end ring.
End ring height
Radial height of end ring.
End ring
conductor type.
Specify this by clicking the button in the properties field and using the Select
Definition window to find and assign the material.
Slot pitch
Slot pitch in mechanical degrees.
Center slot pitch Center slot pitch in mechanical degrees

End Ring type
Type of end ring for the damper. Specify this by clicking the button in the
properties field and use the Select Pole type window to select from the
available types.
Defining the Shaft Data for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine

2.
Select or clear the Magnetic Shaft check box to specify whether or not the shaft is to be made
3.
Shaft Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines

Magnetic Shaft
magnetic material.
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Three-Phase Synchronous

Machine
Solution Setup.
2. Click the General tab.
3.
Select Motor or Generator from the Operation Type pull-down list.
4.
Infinite Bus
Independent
Generator
Const Speed
Const Power
Const Torque
Linear Torque
Fan Load
5.
For Generators.
For Generators.
For Motors. The speed remains constant in the motor.
For Motors. The output power remains constant in the motor.
For Motors. The torque remains constant regardless of the speed. In this
case, Tload = Trated, given by the output power divided by the given rated
speed.
For Motors. The torque increases linearly with speed. In this case, Tload =
Trated * (n/nrated) where Trated is given by the output power divided by the
given rated speed.
For Motors. The load varies nonlinearly with speed. In this case, Tload =
Trated * (n/nrated)2 where Trated is given by the output power divided by the
given rated speed.
6.
Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the machine in the Rated Output Power
field.
7.
8.
9.
Click the Three-Phase Synchronous Machine tab.

10. Enter a value in the Rated Power Factor field.

11. Select Wye or Delta from the Winding Connection pull-down list.
12. In the Exciter Efficiency field, enter the efficiency of the exciter used to supply the rotor
winding with DC current if it is mechanically connected to the shaft of the generator. The efficiency value ranges between 0 and 1 and will only affect the total efficiency result.
13. To enter an Input Exciting Current, select the check box, enter a value, and select the units.
Related Topics:
Solution Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines
Solution Data for Three-Phase Synchronous Machines

On the General tab. Select from Motor or Generator.
On the General tab. For a motor, select from Const Speed, Const Power,
Const Torque, Linear Torque, and Fan Load. The default is Const
Power. For a generator, select from Infinite Bus and Independent
Generator.
Rated Output
the units.
Power
Rated Voltage
Rated Speed
Operating
the units.
Temperature
Rated Power
On the Three-Phase Synchronous Machine tab. Type a value for the rated
power factor.
Factor
Winding
On the Three-Phase Synchronous Machine tab. Select from Wye or
Delta.
Connection
Exciter Efficiency On the Three-Phase Synchronous Machine tab. Type a percent for the
exciter efficiency.
Input Exciting
On the Three-Phase Synchronous Machine tab. If you select this check
box, then enter the exciting current, and select the units.
Current
Operation Type
Load Type
Related Topics:
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Three-Phase Synchronous Machine
Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motors

After you have selected Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motors as your model type, you need
to define the following:
Circuit data, such as lead trigger angle, transistor drop, and control circuit information.
Stator data, such as the diameter, slot dimensions, winding data, and skew width of the stator.
Rotor data
Rotor pole data, such as the magnet dimensions and stacking factor.
Shaft data
Analysis Approach for Brushless PMDC Motors

The stator of a brushless DC motor is equipped with a polyphase winding. The phases are connected to the DC bus through a switching circuit. The switching sequence is controlled so that it is
synchronized with the position of the rotor. As a result, the stator produces a rotating magnetic
field.
The rotor is equipped with permanent magnets, creating a structure with the same number of poles
at the stator. The stator switches act like a commutator in a classic DC motor.
In brushless permanent-magnet DC (BLDC) motors, the armature currents are commutated exactly
according to rotor position. The signal of rotor position may be obtained from a position sensor, or
from induced voltages for sensor-less control system.
The performance of BLDC motors is analyzed via a time-domain simulation. The voltage equation
in the time domain is:
R1 + Ld p Lq e
0
id
iq
vq eq = Ld e R1 + Lq p
0
e0
0
0
R1 + L0 p
i0
v0
vd
ed
where R1, Ld, Lq, and L0 are armature resistance, d-axis synchronous inductance, q-axis synchronous inductance, and 0-axis inductance, respectively. e is rotor speed in electrical rad/s, and
represents for d/dt.
The transformations for terminal voltages, induced voltages, and winding currents are given by the
following three equations:
vd
va
T
vq = C v
b
v0
ed
ea
ia
T
eq = C e
b
e0
id
ib = C iq
i0
The transformation matrices for 2-phase, 3-phase, and 4-phases systems, noted as C2, C3, and C4,
are as follows:
C2 =
C3 =
cos sin 0
sin cos 0
cos
sin
1 ( 2)
2
--- cos ( ) sin ( ) 1 ( 2 )
3
cos ( 2 ) sin ( 2 ) 1 ( 2 )
cos
C 4 = sin
cos
sin
sin
cos
sin
cos
0
0
0
0
where = 2 /3.
The input power (electric power) can now be computed from the voltage and current as:
T
1
p 1 = --- ( v d i d + v q i q + v 0 i 0 ) dt
t
0
P2 = P1 - (Pfw + PCua + Pt + PFe)

where Pfw, PCua, Pt, and PFe are frictional and wind loss, armature copper loss, transistor/diode
loss, and iron-core loss, respectively.
T2 = P2 /
where is the rotor speed in mechanical rad/s.
eff = P2/P1 * 100%
Defining a Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motor

The general procedure for defining a brushless permanent-magnet DC motor is as follows:
1. Insert the permanent magnet brushless DC motor into a new or existing project.
3.
2.
Double-click the Machine-Circuit entry in the project tree to define the control circuit.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
data.
Note
new Maxwell 2D project, and a new Maxwell 3D design
Please refer to the Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motor Problem application note, on the technical support page of the ANSYS web site, for a specific example of a brushless permanent-magnet
DC motor problem.
Defining the General Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor

Use the General window to specify the rated output power, voltage values, circuit type, and speed
of the brushless DC motor.
2.
3.
4.

5.
field.
6.
Select DC or CCC from the Control Type pull-down list.
7.

Y3 Y-connected, three-phase.
L3 Loop-type, three-phase.
S3 Star-type, three-phase.
C2 Cross-type, two-phase.
L4 Loop-type, four-phase.
S4 Star-type, four-phase.
The circuit types are based on industry standards. By default, type Y3, a three-phase, six-status
circuit, is selected as the circuit type.
Note
8.
appears.
General Data for Brushless PMDC Motors

fields:
(Brushless Permanent-Magnet DC Motor).
Rotor Position
Frictional Loss
Wind Loss
Machine Type

Control Type
The way the circuit is controlled. Select from DC or CCC (chopped current
control).
Circuit Type
and select from the following six types:
Y3: Y-Type, 3-Phase

C2: Cross-Type, 2-Phase
Defining the Circuit Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor

Use the Circuit Data Properties window to define the circuit data for a brushless PMDC Motor.
1. To open the Circuit Data Properties window, double-click the Machine>Circuit entry in the
2. Enter the triggers lead angle in electrical degrees in the Lead Angle of Trigger field. The
triggers lead angle is shown in the following plot of the open circuit induced voltage versus
position. An angle of 0 means that the induced voltage in the triggered phase is at a maximum:
Note
A positive value represents a lead angle, and a negative value represents a lag angle.
3.
Enter the period from on-status to off-status of a transistor, in electrical degrees, in the Trigger
Pulse Width field.
4.
Drop field. Refer to the figures of the different circuit types in step 2.
5.
Enter the voltage drop of one diode in the discharge loop in the Diode Drop field. If you
selected a star-type circuit (S3 or S4) as the Circuit Type, enter the total discharge voltage in
this field.
If you selected CCC (chopped current control) as the Control Type, then enter the maximum
and minimum current values in the Maximum Current and Minimum Current fields.
6.
7.
Circuit Data for Brushless PMDC Motors

project tree.
Lead Angle of
Trigger
Trigger Pulse
Width
Transistor Drop
Diode Drop
Maximum
Current
Minimum
Current
The triggers lead angle, in electrical degrees.

The voltage drop across one transistor when the transistor is turned on.
The maximum current for the chopped current control. This field is not
available for a DC circuit.
The minimum current for the chopped current control. This field is not
Defining the Stator Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

a.

b.
c.
7.
8.

a.
b.
Note
c.
9.

Stator Data for Brushless PMDC Motors

Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Stacking Factor
Steel Type
Number of Slots
Slot Type
Skew Width

Definition window.
Type window.
Defining the Stator Slots for a Brushless PMDC Motor

To define the physical dimensions of the stator slots:
Design check box.
4.

Hs0
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
5.
Always available.
Always available.
Tooth Width field.
Tooth Width field.
Stator Slot Data for Brushless PMDC Motors

Parallel
Tooth
Hs0
Hs1
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
Rs
Defining the Stator Windings and Conductors for a Brushless PMDC
Motor
To define the stator windings, wires, and conductors:
3.
4.
a.
b.

Whole Coiled
Half Coiled
Editor
Type
Description
A user-defined one-layer winding arrangement. You need to set up the winding arrangement
for each slot. For this winding type, the following letters are used for the phase windings:
Editor


Whole
Coiled
Slot 123
Half
Coiled
Slot 123
Whole
Coiled
Slot 123
number.
Half
Coiled
Slot 1 2 3

Note
c.
5.
For a two layer winding, if you check Constant Pitch in the Winding Editor, only the top
pitch.
Select a Winding Type.
Note
When you place the mouse cursor over a winding, an outline of the selected winding
appears.
The following winding types are available:
10 A user-defined single-layer winding arrangement. When you select this type, enter the
winding arrangement, and choose OK. For this winding type, the following letters are
used for the phase windings:
11


Slot 123
12 A one-layer concentric half-coiled winding:
Slot 123
20 A user-defined two-layer winding arrangement. When you select this type, enter the
21
winding arrangement, and choose OK.

Slot 123
number.
22 A two-layer winding:
Slot 1 2 3
6.
Branches field.
7.
8. Enter the coil pitch, measured in number of slots, in the Coil Pitch field. The coil pitch is the
Insulation
Conductor
y
Wire Wrap = 2*y

a.

b.
c.

options:
d.

coils in the End Adjustment field. The end adjustment is the distance one end of the con-
ductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator.
End
Adjustment
End of Stator
Stator
Coil
Slot
Insulation
Winding Editor for a Brushless DC Motor

For a brushless DC motor, you may want to specify a different number of conductors for each stator
slot. The Winding Editor makes this possible by enabling you to specify the number of turns for
each coil.
5. When you are satisfied with the conductor settings, click OK to close the Winding Editor
window.
Defining Different Size Wires for a Brushless DC Motor

Use the Gauge option in the Wire Size dialog if you have a conductor that is made up different size
wires.
2.
3.
For a round wire:

diameter.

data.
4.
5.
6.

Note
Stator Winding Data for Brushless PMDC Motors

tree.
Winding Type
Editor.
Slot
Coil Pitch
Number of
Strands
Wire Wrap
Wire Size
End/
Insulation Length
tab
stator.
Base Inner
Radius
Tip Inner
Diameter
Slot Liner
Limited Fill
Factor
Defining the Rotor Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor

3.
4.
5.

a.
b.

c.
6.
7.
Select a Pole Type:

a.
b.
Note
c.
8.
Click the button.

Click a button to select the desired pole type (1, 2, 3, 4, or 5). TIP: When you run the
mouse over each option, the diagram changes to show that pole type.
When you place the mouse cursor over a pole type, an outline of the selected circuit type
appears.
Rotor Data for Brushless PMDC Motors

Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Steel Type
Stacking Factor
Pole Type

Definition window.
window and select from the following types: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5.
Defining the Rotor Pole for a Brushless PMDC Motor

Note

1.
2.
For all pole types except type 4, enter the ratio of the actual arc distance in relation to the max-
imum possible arc distance in the Embrace field. This value is between 0 and 1.
Pole Embrace = 1.0
Pole Embrace = 0.7

3.
For pole type 4, enter the shaft diameter of the rotor in the Shaft Diameter field.
4.
For pole types 1, 2, and 3, enter the distance from the center of the rotor to the polar arc center
in the Offset field. Enter 0 for a uniform air gap.
Magnet
Radius Rotor OD
Radius
Offset
5.
For pole type 5, enter the thickness of the bridge across the two poles in the Bridge field.
6.
For pole type 5, enter the width of the rib supporting the bridge in the Rib field.
7.
8.
For pole types 4 and 5, enter the width of the magnet in the Magnet Width field.
9.

Rotor Pole Data for Brushless PMDC Motors

The Rotor Pole Data Properties window may contain the following fields, depending on the pole
type specified.
The pole embrace. For pole types 1, 2, 3, and 5.
The shaft diameter of the rotor. For pole type 4.
The pole-arc center offset from the rotor center (0 for a uniform air gap).
For pole types 1, 2, and 3.
Bridge
The thickness of the bridge across two adjacent poles. For pole type 5.
Rib
bridge. For pole type 5.
Magnet Type
For all pole types.
Magnet Width
The maximum width of the magnet. For pole types 4 and 5.
Magnet Thickness The maximum thickness of the magnet. For all pole types.
Embrace
Shaft Diameter
Offset
Defining the Shaft Data for a Brushless PMDC Motor

Shaft Data for Brushless PMDC Motors

Magnetic Shaft
magnetic material.

Solution Setup.
2. Click the General tab. The Operation Type is Motor for this machine type.
3.
Const Speed
Const Power
Const Torque
Linear Torque
Fan Load

speed.
speed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Related Topics:
Solution Data for Brushless PMDC Motors

Analysis Offered
Analysis Offered
Adapted to both Synchronous Motor and Generator

The structures of the salient-pole synchronous motor and the generator are basically the same,
but their phasor relationships and the computation methods are slightly different, their output
characteristics data are also different. Therefore, RMxprt divides the synchronous machine
into two design modules: Synchronous Motor and Synchronous Generator.
Auto Arrangement of Three-phase Windings
Almost all commonly used three-phase single- and double-layer, half- and whole-type ac
windings (including fractional-pitch windings) can be automatically arranged. Users do not
need to define coils one by one. RMxprt also supports a double-layer winding with half-turn
coils which are auto-arranged in the order of even, odd, even, odd, , and even, odd, as long
as it is physically possible.
When a designer adopts single-layer whole-coiled windings, RMxprt will perform winding
arrangement optimization to minimize the average coil pitch. When asymmetric three-phase
windings are used, winding arrangement is optimized in such a way that minimum negativesequence and zero-sequence components are achieved.
Winding Editor Supporting Any Single- and Double-Layer Windings
Besides taking the great advantage of the winding auto-arrangement function in RMxprt, users
can also specify any special winding by using of the Winding Editor function.
In Winding Editor, through modification of phase belonging, number of turns, in-slot and outslot number of each coil, it is possible to design single- and double-layer winding arrangement
for any purposes.
Analyze Air-Gap Magnetic Field Distribution

For both uniform and non-uniform air gaps, Schwarz-Christopher Transformation is adopted
to solve for the air-gap magnetic field distribution.
Analyze EMF Waveform and Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
Based on the analysis of the air-gap magnetic field waveform, taking into account coil short
pitch, winding distribution, skew slot, winding connection, load effects and other factors, the
emf waveforms in the coils and the windings are analyzed to solve for the emf distortion factors.
Analyze Dynamic Parameters of Damping Winding
Different from the squirrel-cage winding of the induction machine, the damping winding of the
salient-pole synchronous machine is located in the surface of magnetic field poles, which deviates greatly along the d- and the q-axes. Furthermore, the connection of damping bars has several forms. The bars under each pole could be connected, but not connected with those under
other poles. All the bars could be connected together. The bars could be connected through
end-plate. RMxprt can deal with all those complicated situations and give the dynamic parameters for the damping winding.
Related Topics:
Solution Data for Brushless PMDC Motors

Operation Type
Load Type
Rated Output
Power
Rated Voltage
Rated Speed
Operating
Temperature
Related Topics:
Switched Reluctance Motors

After you have selected Switched Reluctance Motors as your model type, define the following:
General data, such as the power, voltage, and speed of the motor.
Circuit data.
Stator core data, such as the number of poles, diameter, and yoke thickness.
Stator coil data, such as the slot liner thickness, number of parallel branches, and number of
wires in each conductor.
Rotor core data, such as the air gap dimensions and number of poles in the rotor.
Shaft data.
Solution data.
Analysis Approach for Switched Reluctance Motors

This motor type operates with shaft position feedback to synchronize the commutation of the phase
currents with precise rotor position. Typically, both the stator and the rotor are salient to increase
the torque-producing characteristics of the motor. The rotor has no windings; the torque is produced
by the alignment tendency of the rotor to the stator so that the stator flux linkage is maximized.
In these motors, the stator and rotor have different numbers of poles. The stator phase windings are
energized at precise moments synchronized with the position of the rotor. The task of energizing
the stator windings is performed by a complex electronic system.
The number of phases in the winding is the ratio of the stator number of poles to the smallest common divider of the stator and the rotor number of poles.
In switched reluctance motors (SRM), the stator and the rotor have a different number of poles, and
the stator currents are commutated exactly according to rotor position. The signal of the rotor position is obtained from a position sensor. The stator windings are triggered one by one, and normally
the current in a winding has finished or almost finished freewheeling when the next winding is triggered. Therefore, the mutual effects between two phases can be neglected. The voltage equation of
one phase is:
d ( , i )
u = u T + R S i + --------------------dt
where uT is the transistor or diode voltage drop, and Rs is the stator winding resistance. ( , i) is
the flux linkage of the winding at rotor position and winding current i, as is shown in Figure 8,
where the rotor position when the center of the rotor slot is aligned to the winding axis is defined as
0.
Figure 8
Let
( , i )
L = -------------------i
and
L
( i )
G = ------------------ = --------
Then
u = u T + R S i + L pi + G e i
where e is the rotor speed in electrical rad/s, and p is the differential operator as given by:
p =
d
dt
The instant electromagnetic torque t2 is:
1 2
t 2 = --- Gi
2
The input electric power is computed from voltage and current as:
T
1
P 1 = --- ( u i dt )
T
0
The output mechanical power is:
P 2 = P 1 ( P fw + P Cua + P t + P Fe )
where Pfw, PCua, Pt, and PFe are frictional and wind loss, armature copper loss, transistor/diode
loss, and iron-core loss, respectively.
The average output mechanical shaft torque T2 is:
P2
T 2 = -----
where is the rotor angular speed in mechanical rad/s.

The efficiency of the electric machine is computed by:
P2
= ------ 100
P1
Defining a Switched Reluctance Motor

The general procedure for defining a switched reluctance motor is as follows:
1. Insert a Switched Reluctance motor into a new or existing project.
3.
2.
Double-click the Machine-Circuit entry in the project tree to define the control circuit.
4.
5.
Double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding entry in the project tree to define the stator windRMxprt Machine Types 9-147
6.
ings and conductors.

7.
8.
Right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add Solution Setup to define the solution
data.
Choose File>Save to save the project.
9.

Note
new Maxwell 2D project, and a new Maxwell 3D project.
Please refer to the Switched Reluctance Motor Problem application note, on the technical support
page of the ANSYS web site, for a specific example.
Defining the General Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor

Use the General window to define the power settings, speed, and period of the motor.
3.
4.
field.
5.
Select DC or CCC from the Control Type pull-down list.
6.
Full-Voltage
Half-Voltage
Coupled-Coil
The circuit types are based on industry standards. By default, type Full-Voltage, is selected as
the circuit type.
Note
7.
appears.
General Data for Switched Reluctance Motors

fields:
Frictional Loss
Wind Loss
Control Type
The way the circuit is controlled. Select from DC or CCC (chopped current
control, which forces the current to fall between the minimum and
maximum values specified).
Circuit Type
and select from the following three types:
Machine Type
Full-Voltage
Half-Voltage
Coupled-Coil
Defining the Circuit Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor

Use the Circuit Data Properties window to specify the rated output power, voltage values, circuit
type, and speed of the brushless DC motor.
1. To open the Circuit Data Properties window, double-click the Machine-Circuit entry in the
2.
Enter the triggers lead angle in electrical degrees in the Lead Angle of Trigger field. The
trigger angle is the point at which the magnetic poles interact to begin the motion of the motor.
An angle of 0 means that each phase is triggered when its axis is aligned with the rotor slot
center. The triggers lead angle is shown in the following plot of the open circuit induced voltage versus position. An angle of 0 means that the induced voltage in the triggered phase is at a
maximum:
Note
A positive value represents a lead angle, and a negative value represents a lag angle.
3.
Enter the period from on-status to off-status of a transistor, in electrical degrees, in the Trigger
Pulse Width field. The trigger pulse width is the width of the energizing pulse applied to the
winding, or the period for an on status of the transistors. The maximum on period is given
by 180 degrees plus the value for the lead angle of trigger.
4.
Drop field. Refer to the figures of the different circuit types in step 2. This value is over one
conduction path when the transistors are triggered.
5.
Enter the voltage drop on all anti-parallel diodes in the discharge path in the Diode Drop field.
If you selected a star-type circuit (S3 or S4) as the Circuit Type, enter the total discharge voltage in this field.
If you selected CCC (chopped current control) as the Control Type, then enter the maximum
and minimum current values in the Maximum Current and Minimum Current fields.
6.
7.
Circuit Data for Switched Reluctance Motors

project tree. When AC is selected at the Control Type, now circuit data properties exist.
Lead Angle of
Trigger
Trigger Pulse
Width
Transistor Drop
Diode Drop
Maximum
Current
Minimum
Current
The triggers lead angle, in electrical degrees.

The voltage drop across one transistor when the transistor is turned on.
The maximum current for the chopped current control. This field is not
The minimum current for the chopped current control. This field is not
Defining the Stator Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor

3.
4.
Enter the total length of the stator core in the Length field.
5.
Enter the effective magnetic length of the core in the Stacking Factor field. This value typically ranges from between 0.93 and 1.0, and is defined as the total length minus the total lamination insulation, divided by the total length.
6.
a.
b.
c.

7.
Enter the number of poles the stator core contains in the Number of Poles field.
8.
Enter the pole embrace in the Embrace field. The pole embrace is the ratio of the actual pole
arc angle to the maximum possible pole angle in the field. This value ranges from between 0
and 1.
Enter the thickness of the stator coil yoke in the Yoke Thickness field.
9.

Stator Data for Switched Reluctance Motors

Definition window.
Number of Poles The number of poles the stator core contains.
Embrace
The stator pole embrace.
Yoke Thickness The thickness of the yoke at the stator core.
Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Stacking Factor
Steel Type
Defining the Stator Winding Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor

The stator coils provide the excitation for the rotating magnetic poles.
Use the Stator Coil window to define the parallel branches, wire specifications, and slot liner for
the stator coil.
To define the stator coils:
2. Enter the thickness of the insulation between the stator core and the field winding in the Insulation Thickness field.
3. Enter the end length adjustment of the stator coils in the End Adjustment field. The end
stator.
End
Adjustment
End of Stator
Stator
Coil
4.
Branches field.
5.
Enter the number of turns per stator pole in the Turns per Pole field.
6.
Enter the thickness of the double-sided wire wrap in the Wire Wrap field. Enter 0 to automatically obtain this value from the wire library.
7.
Insulation
Conductor
y
Wire Wrap = 2*y
8.
Select the Wire Size:

a.

b.
c.
options:
d. When you are done setting the wire size, click OK to close the Wire Size window and
9. Enter the conductor area ratio of the coupled circuit to the main circuit in the Coupled Ratio
field.
Defining Different Size Wires for a Switched Reluctance Motor

Use the Gauge option in the Wire Size window if you have a conductor that is made up different
size wires.
2.
3.

4.
For a round wire:

diameter.

data.
5.
6.
Note
Stator Winding Data for Switched Reluctance Motors

tree.
Insulation
The thickness of the insulation between the stator core and the
field winding.
Thickness
stator.
Turns per Pole The number of turns per stator pole (0 for auto-design).
Number of
Strands
Wire Wrap
Wire Size
Coupled Ratio
The conductor area ratio of the coupled circuit to the main circuit.
Defining the Rotor Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor

The rotor core channels the flux generated by stator windings and provides shaft torque. The rotor
consists of copper bars in which current is induced by the magnetic fields produced by the stator
windings. Use the Rotor Data Properties window to define the air gaps, rotor dimensions, and
type of steel used in the rotor core. In the project tree, double-click Machine>Rotor to define the
rotor.
2.

3.
4.
5.

a.
6.
7.
b.

c.
Enter the effective magnetic length of the core in the Stacking Factor field. This value ranges
from 0 to 1, and is defined as the total length minus the total lamination insulation, divided by
the total length.
Enter the number of poles the rotor core contains in the Number of Poles field.
8.
Enter the ratio of the actual pole angle in relation to the maximum possible pole angle in the
Embrace field. The value ranges from 0 to 1.
9.
Enter the thickness of the rotor yoke in the Yoke Thickness field.
Rotor Data for Switched Reluctance Motors

To access the general rotor data, double-click the Machine-Rotor entry in the project tree.
Definition window.
Stacking Factor The stacking factor of the rotor core.
Number of Poles The number of poles the rotor core contains.
Embrace
The rotor pole embrace.
Yoke Thickness The thickness of the rotor core yoke.
Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Steel Type
Defining the Shaft Data for a Switched Reluctance Motor

3.
Shaft Data for Switched Reluctance Motors

To access the shaft data, double-click the Machine-Shaft entry in the project tree.
Magnetic Shaft
magnetic material.
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Switched Reluctance Motor

Solution Setup.
type.
Const Speed
Const Power
Const Torque
Linear Torque
Fan Load

speed.
speed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Related Topics:
Solution Data for Switched Reluctance Motors
Solution Data for Switched Reluctance Motors


Operation Type
Load Type
Rated Output
Power
Rated Voltage
Rated Speed
Operating
Temperature
Related Topics:
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Switched Reluctance Motor
Line-Start Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motors

Once you have selected Line-Start Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motors as your motor type,
you can define the following:
General data, such as the frequency, winding connection, number of poles, and voltage.
Stator data, such as the slot type and dimensions, stator diameter, and winding data.
Rotor pole data, such as its associated dimensions, stacking factor, and magnet type.
Shaft data.
Solution data.
By option, you can:
add a vent to or remove an existing vent from a stator,

add a damper to or remove a damper from a rotor.
Analysis Approach for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors

Synchronous motors use a three-phase sinusoidal voltage source to induce a rotating magnetic field
in the stator. Applying this three-phase sinusoidal voltage source to the stator winding of a synchronous motor yields the rotational magnetic field in the air gap. The permanent magnet poles
mounted on the rotor try to align in this rotating field, producing a synchronous torque on the rotor.
Upon starting, the damping winding on the rotor generates the asynchronous starting torque, creating a self-starting feature.
The phasor diagram for the line-start permanent-magnet synchronous motor (LSSM) in the frequency domain is shown in Figure 6.
Figure 6
In Figure 6, R1, Xd, and Xq are armature resistance, d-axis synchronous reactance, and q-axis synchronous reactance, respectively. Xd is the sum of leakage reactance, X1 and d-axis armature reactance Xad, and Xq is the sum of X1 and q-axis armature reactance Xaq:
X d = X 1 + X ad
X q = X 1 + X aq
For a given torque angle , the angle that E0 lags U, we have the following:
I d X d + I q R 1 = U cos E 0
Solving for Id and Iq yields:
I d = ---------------------------------------------------------------------2
R 1 + Xd Xq
R 1 ( U cos E 0 ) X d U sin
I q = ---------------------------------------------------------------------2
R 1 + Xd Xq
The angle that I legs E0 is:
Id
= tanh ----Iq
The power factor angle (or torque angle) that I legs U, is:
= +
The input power (electric power) can now be computed from voltage and current as:
P 1 = 3UI cos
P 2 = P 1 ( P fw + P Cu + P Fe )
where Pfw, PCu, and PFe are frictional and wind loss, armature copper loss, and iron-core loss,
respectively.
The output mechanical power (torque) T2 is:
P2
T 2 = -----
where is the synchronous speed in rad/s.
P2
= ------ 100 %
P1
The motor is started the same way as for an induction motor, by using a squirrel-cage-type winding
-- called a damper winding in this case -- that is mounted on the rotor, producing the starting torque.
Defining a Line-Start Permanent Magnet Synchronous Motor

The general procedure for defining a line-start synchronous motor is as follows:
1. Insert a line-start synchronous motor into a new or existing project.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
data.
Note
Defining the General Data for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor

Use the General window to define the basic parameters of the motor, such as the motors rated output power, rated voltage, losses, and connection type.
4.
5.
field.
6.
General Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors

fields:
The machine type you selected when inserting a new RMxprt design (LineStart PM Synchronous Motor).
Frictional Loss
Wind Loss
Machine Type
Defining the Stator Data for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor

Use the Stator Data, Stator Slot Data, and Stator Winding Data windows to define the stator
data, such as physical dimensions of the lamination, windings, and conductors.
3.
4.
5.
Enter the effective magnetic length of the core in the Stacking Factor field.
6.

a.
b.
c.

7.
8.

a.
b.
Note

c.
9.
Stator Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors

Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Stacking Factor
Steel Type

Definition window.
Number of Slots
Slot Type
Skew Width

Type window.
Defining the Stator Slots for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor

To define the slot type:
Design check box.
Hs0
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
Rs
5.
Always available.
Always available.
Tooth Width field.
Tooth Width field.
Stator Slot Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors

Parallel
Tooth
Hs0
Hs1
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
Rs
Defining the Stator Windings and Conductors for a Line-Start PM
Synchronous Motor
2.
Click the Winding tab.
3.
4.
Select the Winding Type for the stator:

a.
b.

Whole Coiled
Half Coiled
Note
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Editor
When you place the mouse cursor over the winding type, a schematic of that type
appears.
c. Click OK to close the Winding Type window and return to the Properties window.
Branches field.
Insulation
Conductor
y
Wire Wrap = 2*y

a.
b.

c.
options:
End
Adjustment
Stator
Coil
End of Stator
Stator
Pole
Slot
Insulation
Winding Editor for a Line-Start Synchronous Motor

For a line-start synchronous motor, you may want to specify a different number of conductors for
turns for each coil.
3.
4.
5.
Defining Different Size Wires for a Line-Start Synchronous Motor

size wires.

2.
3.
For a round wire:

diameter.

data.
4.
5.
6.
Note
Stator Winding Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors

tree.
Winding Type
Editor.
Slot
Coil Pitch
Number of
Strands

Wire Size
Length
stator.
Base Inner
Radius
Tip Inner
Diameter
Slot Liner
Limited Fill
Factor
Wire Wrap
End/
Insulation
tab
Optional Vent for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor Stator

To add a Vent to the stator, select the stator icon and right-click to display the pop-up menu with
Insert Vent.
The vent is shown in the project tree under the stator.
To remove an existing Vent, select the stator and right-click to display the up-up menu with
Remove Vent.
The Vent Data properties window contains the following fields.
Vent Ducts
Duct Width
Magnetic spacer
width
Width of magnetic spacer which hold vent ducts. 0 for non-magnetic spacer.
Duct pitch
Vent ducts.
Defining the Rotor Data for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor

the stator windings. In the project tree, double-click Machine-Rotor and Machine-Rotor-Pole to
3.
4.
5.

a.
b.
c.

6.
Enter the effective magnetic length of the rotor core in the Stacking Factor field. This value
ranges from 0 to 1 and is defined as the total length minus the total lamination insulation,
divided by the total length. A value of 1 indicates that the rotor is not laminated.
7.
Select a Pole Type:

a.
b.
Click the button.

Click a button to select the desired pole type (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8). TIP: When you run
the mouse over each option, the diagram changes to show that pole type.
Note
c.
8.
When you place the mouse cursor over a pole type, an outline of the selected circuit type
appears.
Rotor Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors

Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Steel Type
Stacking Factor
Pole Type

Definition window.
window and select from the following types: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8. When you
mouse over each button, a diagram appears for that pole type, showing the
arrangement and dimensions.
Defining the Rotor Pole for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor

Note

1.
2.
Enter the limited diameter for the magnet ducts in the D1 field.
3.
Enter one or more of the following magnet duct dimensions, depending on the pole type
selected: O1, O2, B1.
For all pole types except number 8, enter the width of the rib supporting the bridge in the Rib
field.
4.
5.
Select the type of magnet to use in the rotor pole:

a. Click Magnet Type button.
b.

Select a material.
c.
6.
Enter the total width of all magnets per pole in the Magnet Width field.
7.
8.
Rotor Pole Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors

The limited diameter for the magnet ducts. See the diagrams in the Select
Pole Type window for the location of each dimension and which pole types
require which dimensions.
O1
A magnet duct dimension. See the diagrams in the Select Pole Type
window for the location of each dimension and which pole types require
which dimensions.
O2
which dimensions.
B1
which dimensions.
Rib
bridge. For pole types except number 8.
Magnet Type
For all pole types.
Magnet Width
The maximum width of the magnet. For all pole types.
Magnet Thickness The maximum thickness of the magnet. For all pole types.
D1
Optional Rotor Damper for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor

To add a damper, right-click on the rotor item in the project tree to display the pop-up menu with
Insert Damper.
To remove an existing damper, right-click on the rotor icon in the project tree to display the shortcut menu with Remove Damper.
The Damper Data properties window contains the following fields.

Damper Slots per Number of damper slots per pole.
Pole
Slot Type
Damper slot type. Click the field button open the Slot selection window and
select one of the four types.
Cast Rotor.
Specify whether the rotor squirrel cage winding is cast.
Bar conductor
type
Click the field button to open the Materials Selection window to specify the
material for the bar conductor.
End Length
Single side end extended bar length
End Ring Width
Axial width of end ring.
End Ring Height Radial height of end ring

End Ring
Conductor type
Click the field button to open the Materials Selection window to specify the
material for the end ring conductor.
Defining the Shaft Data for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor

1. To open the Shaft Data Properties window, double-click the Machine-Shaft entry in the
Shaft Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors

To access the shaft data, double-click the Machine-Shaft entry in the project tree.
Magnetic Shaft
magnetic material.
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor

Solution Setup.
type.
3.
Const Speed
Const Power
Const Torque
Linear Torque
Fan Load

speed.
speed.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Click the Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor tab.
9.
Select Wye or Delta from the Winding Connection pull-down list.

Related Topics:
Solution Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors
Solution Data for Line-Start PM Synchronous Motors

Operation Type
Load Type
Rated Output
Power
Rated Voltage
Rated Speed
Operating
Temperature
Winding
Connection
General tab. The operation type is automatically set to Motor for this
machine type.
General tab. Select from Const Speed, Const Power, Const Torque,
Linear Torque, and Fan Load. The default is Const Power.
General tab. Type a value for the rated output voltage, and select the units.
General tab. Type a value for the rated voltage, and select the units.
General tab. Type a value for the rated speed, and select the units.
General tab. Type a value for the operating temperature, and select the
units.
Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor tab. Select Wye or Delta from the
Winding Connection pull-down list.
Related Topics:
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Line-Start PM Synchronous Motor
Universal Motors
After you have selected Universal Motors as your model type, enter the motor data to define the
following:
General data, such as the number of poles, frictional loss, and reference speed.
Stator pole and winding data, such as its associated pole dimensions, type of steel, and wire
definitions.
Rotor data, such as the slot types and dimensions, rotor diameter, laminations, and windings
and conductors.
Shaft data.
Solution data.
Analysis Approach for Universal Motors

For a DC motor, if its field winding is connected in series with its armature winding, it becomes a
series motor. When the polarity of the terminal voltage changes, the direction of the produced electromagnetic torque does not change because the armature and the exciting currents alternate their
directions at the same time. That means the motor can operate not only with a DC source but also
with an AC source. Because it can operate with both DC and AC sources, a series motor is also
called universal motor (UniM).
For a universal motor, the stator is equipped with p pairs of coil-wound poles, creating P pairs of
alternating north and south poles. The coil excitation may be either AC or DC. The rotor is
equipped with a distributed winding connected to a commutator that revolves together with the
rotor.
A system of brushes is kept in permanent electrical contact with the commutator. When AC or DC
current is applied to the rotor winding (via the brushes and commutator) a torque is produced by the
interaction of the rotor (armature) currents and the field produced by the stator poles.
The commutator causes the armature to create a magnetic flux distribution whose axis is perpendicular to the axis of the field flux produced by the permanent magnets. For these motors, the commutator acts as a mechanical rectifier.
The performance of a universal motor is analyzed in the frequency domain. The voltage equation of
a universal motor is:
U = ZI = ( R a + R f + R b )I + j ( L a + L f + 2M af )I + e ( G aa + G af )I
where, Ra, Rf, and Rb are the armature resistance, field winding resistance, and the brush contact
resistance, respectively. La, Lf, and Maf are the armature self inductance, field winding self inductance, and their mutual inductance, respectively, and are linearized nonlinear parameters. Gaa and
Gaf are the coefficients of motion induced voltages by the armature and field winding currents,
respectively, and are also linearized nonlinear parameters. is the radian frequency, and e the
rotor speed in electric rad/s. Z is equivalent input impedance. When the brush axis is aligned with
q-axis:
M af = G aa = 0
For a given rotor speed e, armature current can be computed based on the applied voltage U, as:
U
I = ---Z
The input power (electric power) is directly computed from voltage and current as:
P 1 = UI cos
P 2 = P 1 ( P fw + P b + P
+ P Fe )
cuf
where Pfw, Pb, Pcua, Pcuf, and PFe are frictional and wind loss, brush drop loss, armature copper
loss, field winding copper loss, and iron-core loss, respectively.
P2
T 2 = -----
P2
eff = ------ 100
P1
Defining a Universal Motor

The general procedure for defining a universal motor is as follows:
1.
2.
Insert a universal motor into a new or existing project.

3.
4.
dimensions.
5.
6.
7.
8. Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree to define the rotor windings and conductors.
9. Double-click the Machine-Commutator entry in the project tree to define the commutator
and brush data.
data.
Note
Refer to the Universal Motor Problem application note, on the technical support page of the
ANSYS web site, for a specific example.
Defining the General Data for a Universal Motor

Use the General window to define the basic parameters of the universal motor such as the power
settings, speed, and rated voltage.
2.
3.
4.
5.
field.
6.
General Data for Universal Motors

fields:
Number of Poles Number of poles for this machine.
Frictional Loss
Wind Loss
Machine Type
Defining the Stator Data for a Universal Motor

3.
Enter the overall width of the stator outer profile in the Overall Width field.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

a.

b.
c.
Stator Data for Universal Motors

Outer Diameter
Overall Width
Inner Diameter

The overall width of the stator outer profile.
Length
Stacking Factor
Steel Type

The effective magnetic length of the stator core.
Definition window.
Defining the Stator Pole for a Universal Motor

1.
To open the Stator Pole Data Properties window, double-click the Machine-Stator-Pole
Note
2.
Enter the ratio of the actual arc distance in relation to the maximum possible arc distance in the
Embrace field. This value is between 0 and 1.
3.
Enter the distance from the center of the stator to the magnet arc center in the Offset field.
Enter 0 for a uniform air gap.
Magnet
Radius Rotor OD
Radius
Offset
4.
5.
Enter the minimum pole width in the PoleWidth field.

Enter the yoke thickness in the Ty field.
6.
Enter the shoe-tip thickness in the Ts field.
7.
Enter the poles hole radius in the R1 field. If there is no hole in the design, enter 0.
8.
Enter the poles side fillet radius in the R2 field.
9.
Enter the radius of the poles center side fillet arcs in the R3 field.
10. Enter the radius of the shoe connecting arc in the R4 field. To auto-design this dimension,
enter 0. For a linear connection, enter 0.
11. Enter the inner radius of the screw hole between the two poles in the R5 field. If there is no
hole in the design, enter 0.
12. Enter the outer radius of the screw hole between the two poles in the R6 field. If there is no
hole in the design, enter 0.
Stator Pole Data for Universal Motors

The Stator Pole Data Properties window contains the following fields:
Embrace
Offset
PoleWidth
Ty
Ts
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
The pole embrace.

The pole-arc center offset from the stator center (0 for a uniform air gap).
The minimum pole width.
The yoke thickness.
The shoe-tip thickness.
The hole radius in the pole (0 for no hole).
The radius of the pole side fillet.
The radius of the center of the pole side fillet arcs.
The radius of the shoe connecting arc (0 for auto-design or for a linear
connection).
The inner radius of the screw hole between two poles (0 for no hole).
The outer radius of the screw hole between two poles (0 for no hole).
Defining the Stator Windings and Conductors for a Universal Motor

1. To open the Stator Winding Properties window, double-click the Machine-Stator-Winding
2. Enter the thickness of the insulation between the stator core and the field winding in the Insulation Thickness field.
3. Enter the end length adjustment of the stator coils in the End Adjustment field. The end
stator.
End
Adjustment
Stator
Coil
End of Stator
Stator
Pole
4.
Enter the number of parallel branches in the stator winding in the Parallel Branches field.
5.
Enter the number of turns per stator pole in the Turns per Pole field. To auto-design the number of turns, enter 0.
6.
7.
Insulation
Conductor
y
Wire Wrap = 2*y
8.
Select the Wire Size:

a.

b.
c.
options:
9.
Enter the thickness of the wedge insulation in the Wedge Thickness field.
Defining Different Size Wires for a Universal Motor Stator Winding

2.
3.

For a round wire:

diameter.

data.
4.
5.
6.
Note
Stator Winding Data for Universal Motors

tree.
Insulation
The thickness of the insulation between the stator core and the
field winding.
Thickness
stator.
Turns per Pole The number of turns per stator pole (0 for auto-design).
Number of
Strands
Wire Wrap
Wire Size
Defining the Rotor Data for a Universal Motor

2. Enter the stacking factor for the rotor core in the Stacking Factor field. This value relates to
the effective magnetic length of the core, and ranges from 0 to 1. It is defined as the total length
3.
minus the total insulation from the laminations, divided by the total length. A value of 1 indicates that the rotor is not laminated.
Enter the number of slots in the rotor core in the Number of Slots field.
4.
Select a Slot Type:

a.
b.
c.
Click the button.

Click a button to select the desired pole type (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6). Though slots 3 and 4 are
visually similar, they differ in how the edges are constructed. Slot 3 has a tapered edge
leading from the slot opening to the main slot body. Slot 4 has a rounded edge at the same
location, where the quantity Hr1 defines the radius of the corner slot. TIP: When you run
Slot Editor.
5.
Enter the outer diameter of the rotor core in the Outer Diameter field.
6.
Enter the inner diameter of the rotor core in the Inner Diameter field.
7.
8.

a.
b.
c.
9.

Enter the number of slots in the skew width in the Skew Width field.
Rotor Data for Universal Motors

Stacking Factor
Number of Slots
Slot Type
Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Steel Type
Skew Width
The effective magnetic length of the rotor core.

The number of slots in the rotor core.
The rotor core slot type. Click the button to open the Select Slot Type
window and select from the following types: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6.
Definition window.
Defining the Rotor Slots for Universal Motors

Design check box. Using this option causes the software to converge to a flux density value of
1.5 Tesla in the rotor teeth.
3. Enter the available slot dimensions. The following dimensions may be listed, depending on the
Slot Type selected and depending on whether or not Auto Design is selected.:
Hs0
Hs1
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
Rs
4.
Always available.
Always available.
Always available.
Always available. Rs is added when the slot type is 3 or 4.
Rotor Slot Data for Universal Motors

Parallel
Tooth
Hs0
Hs1
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
Rs
Rs
Defining the Rotor Windings and Conductors for a Universal Motor

3.

a.
b.

4.
Lap
Wave
Frog Leg
5.
Note
6.
7.
8.
9.
segments.
Insulation
Conductor
y
Wire Wrap = 2*y

a.
b.
c.

options:
d.

End
Adjustment
End of Stator
Stator
Coil
Slot
Insulation
Defining Different Size Wires for a Universal Motor Rotor Winding

1.
2.
3.
For a round wire:

diameter.

data.
4.
5.
6.
Note
Rotor Winding Data for Universal Motors

To access the stator winding data, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project
tree.
End/
Insulation
tab

Virtual Slots
Slot
Coil Pitch
Number of
Strands
Wire Wrap
Wire Size
Length
End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the rotor coils.
Tip Inner
Diameter
End Clearance
Slot Liner
Equalizer
Full.
Connection
Defining the Commutator and Brush for a Universal Motor

2.
Click the Commutator tab.
3.
Note
4.
5.
6.
commutator appears.

a.
b.

a.
b.
7.
8.

9.
11. Enter the angle of displacement from the neutral axis, in mechanical degrees, in the Brush Displacement field.
Note
Brush Press field.
Note
Commutator and Brush Data for Universal Motors

project tree.
tab
Pancake.
Commutator
Diameter
Commutator
Length
Outer Diameter

commutator.
commutator.
Inner Diameter
Commutator
Insulation
Brush tab
Brush Width
Brush Length
Brush Pairs
Brush
Displacement
Brush Drop
Brush Press
Frictional
Coefficient

Defining the Shaft Data for a Universal Motor

Shaft Data for Universal Motors

Magnetic Shaft
magnetic material.
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Universal Motor

Solution Setup.
type.
3.
Const Speed
Const Power

Const Torque
Linear Torque
Fan Load
speed.
speed.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Click the Universal Motor tab.
9. Enter the Frequency, and select the units.

Related Topics:
Solution Data for Universal Motors
Solution Data for Universal Motors

Operation Type
Load Type
Rated Output
Power
Rated Voltage
Rated Speed
Operating
Temperature
Frequency
General tab. The operation type is automatically set to Motor for this
machine type.
General tab. Select from Const Speed, Const Power, Const Torque,
Linear Torque, and Fan Load. The default is Const Power.
units.
Universal Motor tab. Enter a frequency in the Frequency field, and select
the units.
Related Topics:
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Universal Motor
General DC Machines
After you have selected DC Machine as your model type, enter the motor data to define the following:
General data, such as the output power, rated voltage, speed, and machine type (motor or generator).
Stator data, such as its associated pole dimensions, type of steel, and pole magnet specifications.
Stator field data, such as shoe and pole insulation, dimensions, and winding information.
Rotor data, such as the slot types and dimensions, rotor diameter, lamination, and wire specifications.
Commutator and brush data, such as the commutator type and dimensions and brush length.
Shaft data.
Solution data.
By option you can insert or remove the following to a DC machine.
Compensating data, added under the stator

Commutating data, added under the stator
Vent data, added under the rotor
Shunt data, added under the stator field.
Series data, added under the stator field.
Analysis Approach for General DC Machines

For a Direct-Current (DC) Electric Machine Design, either a generator or motor, the rotor is
equipped with a distributed winding -- called armature winding -- that is connected to a commutator revolving together with the rotor.
The stator is equipped with p pairs of poles, which are excited by p pairs of shunt and/or series
windings. A shunt winding may be separately excited or self-excited. The separately excited shunt
winding is excited by a separate DC voltage source. The self-excited shunt winding is excited by
the terminal voltage of the armature winding and is connected in parallel with the armature winding. A series winding is connected in series with the armature winding. If both self-excited shunt
and series windings are mounted on the stator poles, RMxprt assumes that the armature winding
connects the series winding in series first, then connects the shunt winding in parallel.
A system of brushes is kept in permanent electrical contact with the commutator. When DC current
is applied to the rotating armature winding via the brushes and commutator, a stationary magnetic
field distribution is created with the axis electrically perpendicular to the axis of the field produced
by the shunt and/or series windings. As a result, a torque is produced by the interaction of the fields
produced by the armature and exciting currents. For these brush commutating machines, the commutator together with the brushes acts as a mechanical rectifier.
The field produced by the armature current is called armature reaction field. The armature reaction
field causes poor commutating and poor voltage distribution along commutator bars. In order to
improve commutating, commutating poles and winding can be equipped between two adjacent
main poles and compensating winding can be equipped under main poles.
The performance of a DC machine is computed by DC analysis.
DC Machine Operating as a Motor

The voltage equation of a DC motor is
U = E + ( Ub + R1 Ia )
where, Ub is the voltage drop of one-pair brushes, R1 is the total series resistance of the armature
branch, E is the back emf as given below:
E = C Ef I f + C Es I a
where CEf and CEs, which depend on the saturation of the magnetic field, are the back-emf coefficients in ohm.s/rad, is the rotor speed in mechanical rad/s, and If and Ia are the exciting currents of
the shunt and series windings, respectively.
For a given speed, armature current can be computed based on the terminal voltage U, as shown
below:
U U b C Ef I f
I a = -------------------------------------------------R 1 + C Es
The shaft torque is computed from:
T 2 = ( C Tf I f + C Ts I a ) I a T fw
where CTf and CTs are the torque coefficients in Nm/A^2 which are numerically the same as CEf
and CEs, respectively. Tfw is the frictional and wind torque. The output power (mechanical power)
is
P2 = T2
The input power (electrical power) is
P 1 = P 2 + ( P fw + P Cua + P b + P Fe )
where Pfw, PCua, Pb, and PFe are the frictional and wind loss, armature branch copper loss, brush
drop loss, iron-core loss and shunt winding copper loss, respectively. The efficiency is:
P2
= ------ 100 %
P1
DC Machine Operating as a Generator

For a DC generator, the voltage equation is
U = E ( Ub + R1 Ia )
E = C Ef I f + C Es I a
The performance is analyzed as follows
U + U b C Ef I f
I a = --------------------------------------------------R 1 C Es
T 1 = ( ( C Tf I f + C Ts I a ) I a ) + T fw
P1 = T1
P 2 = P 1 ( P fw + P Cua + P b + P Fe )
P2
= ------ 100 %
P1
Defining a General DC Machine

The general procedure for defining a a general DC machine is as follows:
1. Insert a DC machine into a new or existing project.
2.
3.
4.
dimensions.
5. Double-click the Machine-Stator-Field entry in the project tree to define the stator windings,
conductors, and insulation data.
6. Double-click the Machine-Rotor entry in the project tree to define the general rotor geometry,
the pole data, and the insulation data.
7. Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Slot entry in the project tree to define the rotor slot dimensions.
8. Double-click the Machine-Rotor-Winding entry in the project tree to define the rotor conductors and windings.
9. Double-click the Machine-Commutator entry in the project tree to define the commutator
and brush data.
data.
Note
Refer to the DC Machine application note, on the technical support page of the ANSYS web site,
for a specific example of a problem using a DC machine. (IS THERE ONE?)
Defining the General Data for a General DC Machine

Use the General window to define the basic parameters of the DC motor, such as the power settings, speed, and rated voltage.
3.
4.
5.
field.
6.
General Data for General DC Machines

fields:
The machine type you selected when inserting a new RMxprt design (DC
Machine).
Frictional Loss
Wind Loss
Machine Type
Defining the Stator Data for a General DC Machine

2. Enter the maximum diameter for a polygon-type frame in the Frame Outer Diameter field.
3.
Enter the minimum outer width for a polygon-type frame in the Frame Overall Width field.
4.
Enter the Frame Thickness.
5.
Enter the Frame Length.

Select a steel type for the frame:
6.
a.
b.
Click the button for Frame Material.

c.
7.
Select a Pole Type:
a.
Click the button.

b.
c.
Click a button to specify the desired field type (either 1 or 2).

8.
Enter the length of the stator main pole in the Pole Length field.
9.
Enter the effective magnetic length for the stator main pole in the Pole Stacking Factor field.
10. Select a steel type for the stator main pole:

a.
b.
Click the button for Pole Material.

c.
11. Enter the thickness of the pole press boards in the Press Board Thickness field.
12. If the pole press board is made of magnetic material, then select the Magnetic Press Board
check box.
Stator Data for General DC Machines

Frame Outer
Diameter
Frame Overall
Width
Frame Thickness
Frame Length
Frame Material
Pole Type
Pole Length
Pole Stacking
Factor
Pole Material
Press Board
Thickness
Magnetic Press
Board
The maximum diameter for a polygon-type frame.

The minimum outer width for a polygon-type frame.
The thickness of the frame.
The length of the frame.
The steel type of the frame. Click the button to open the Select Definition
window.
The pole type of the stator. Click the button to open the Select Pole Type
window and select from the following two types: 1 and 2.
The length of the stator main pole.
The stacking factor of the stator main pole.
The steel type of the stator main pole. Click the button to open the Select
Definition window.
The thickness of the pole press boards.
Whether or not the pole press board is made of magnetic material.
Defining the Stator Pole for a General DC Machine

1.
To open the Stator Pole Data Properties window, double-click the Machine-Stator-Pole
Note
2.
Enter the inner diameter at the pole center in the Dmin field.
3.
4.
Enter the diameter at the pole tip in the Dmax field.

Enter the width of the pole arc with a uniform air gap in the Bp0 field. For an eccentric air gap,
enter 0.
5. Enter the width of the pole tip in the Bp1 field.
6. Enter the maximum width of the pole shoe in the Bp2 field. This field is only available for a
Pole Type of 1.
7. Enter the minimum width of the pole shoe in the Bp3 field. This field is only available for a
Pole Type of 1.
8. Enter the size of the pole shoe fillet in the Rp0 field. THis field is only available for a Pole
Type of 2.
9. Enter the fillet between the pole shoe and the pole body in the Rp1 field. THis field is only
available for a Pole Type of 2.
10. Enter the pole shoe height in the Hp field.
11. Enter the pole body width in the Bm field.
Stator Pole Data for General DC Machines

Dmin
Dmax
Bp0
Bp1
Bp2
Bp3
Rp0
The inner diameter at the pole center.

The diameter at the pole tip.
The width of the pole arc with a uniform air gap (0 for an eccentric air gap).
The width of the pole tip.
The maximum width of the pole shoe. For pole type 1.
The minimum width of the pole shoe. FOr pole type 1.
The pole shoe fillet. For pole type 2.
Rp1
Hp
Bm
The fillet between the pole shoe and the pole body. For pole type 2.
The height of the pole shoe.
The width of the pole body.
Defining the Stator Field Data for a General DC Machine

To define the stator windings and insulation data:
1. To open the Stator Field Properties window, double-click the Machine-Stator-Field entry in
the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the
2. Enter the thickness of the insulation under the pole shoe in the Shoe Insulation field.
3.
Enter the thickness of the insulation at the pole body side in the Pole Insulation field.
4.
Enter the minimum gap in the Winding Clearance field. The winding clearance is one of the
following: the minimum gap between two field windings, or the minimum gap between a field
winding and a commutating winding.
Enter the thickness of the insulation between the shunt winding and the series winding in the
Winding Insulation field.
Select the type of exciting of the series winding to the shunt winding from the Compound
Exciting Mode pull-down list. The options are Cumulative and Differential.
5.
6.
7.
Stator Field Data for General DC Machines

To access the stator field data, double-click the Machine-Stator-Field entry in the project tree.
The Stator Field Data Properties window contains the following fields:
Shoe Insulation
Pole Insulation
Winding
Clearance
Winding
Insulation
Compound
Exciting Mode
The thickness of the insulation under the pole shoe.

The thickness of the insulation at the pole body side.
The minimum air gap between two field windings, or the minimum gap
between a field winding and a commutating winding.
The thickness of the insulation between the shunt winding and the series
winding.
The cumulative exciting or differential exciting of the series winding to the
shunt winding. Select Cumulative or Differential from the pull-down list.
Shunt Data for General DC Machines

By option you can insert or remove a shunt from a General DC Machine. If you insert a shunt, it
appears in the project tree under the stator field data.
To insert a shunt.
1. Right click on the Field icon under the stator in the project tree to display the popup menu.
2.
Click Insert Shunt.
The Shunt icon appears under the field icon.

To Remove an existing shunt:
1.
2.
Right click on the Field icon under the stator in the project tree to display the popup menu.
Click Remove Shunt.
The shut is removed from the project tree.
The Shunt data for a General DC Machine contains the following fields.
Winding type
Specified as Round, Cylinder coil, or Edgewise coil, by clicking the button to

display the Winding Type selection window.
Parallel branches Number of parallel branches.

Conductors per
pole
Number of conductors per pole. 0 for auto-design. Odd number of strands for
the case where the input and output leads are on different sides.
Number of
strands
Number of strands (number of wires per conductor). 0 for auto-design.
Wire wrap
Double side wire wrap thickness. 0 for auto-pickup in the wire library.
Wire size.
Click the button to display the Wire Size selection window.
Axial Clearance
Axial gap between field winding and pole body on the inner coil.
Limited cross
width
Limited cross section width for winding design or arrangement. 0 for available
maximum area.
Limited cross
height
Limited cross section height for winding design or arrangement. 0 for

available maximum area.
Winding fillet.
Series Data for General DC Machines

By option, you can insert or remove a series from a General DC Machine. If you insert a series, it
appears in the project tree under the stator field data.
To insert a series:
2.
Click Insert Series.

The Series icon appears under the field icon.
To Remove an existing series:

2. Click Remove Series.
The series is removed from the project tree.
The Series data for a General DC Machine contains the following fields.
Winding type


Conductors per
pole
Number of
strands
Wire wrap
Wire size.
Axial Clearance
Limited cross
width
maximum area.
Limited cross
height

Winding fillet.
Compensating Data for General DC Machines

By option, you can insert or remove Compensating for a General DC Machine.
To insert compensating:
1. Right-click on the Stator icon to display the pop-up menu.
2. Click Insert Compensating.
To remove an existing Compensating:
1. Right click on the Stator icon to display the pop-up menu.
2. Click Remove Compensating.
To access the data for compensating inserted to a General DC Machine, double click on the
Machine-Rotor-Compensating item in the project tree.
The Compensating properties window contains the following fields.
Slots per pole
Number of slots per pole for the compensating winding.
Bc0
Opening width of the compensating slots.
Hc0
Opening height of the compensating slots.
Bc2
Width of the compensating slots.
Hc2
Height of the compensating slots.

Conductors per
slot
Number of conductors per slot for the compensating windings
Number of
strands
Number of strands (number of wires per conductor), 0 for auto-design.
Wire wrap
Double-side wire wrap thickness, 0 for auto pickup in the wire library
Rectangle wire
Whether to use round (the default) or rectangle wire.
Wire size
Click the button to display the Wire Size window to specify the wire diameter
and gauge.
Slot liner
Insulation slot liner thickness
End adjustment
one side end length adjustment of a conductor.
Commutating Data for General DC Machines

Commutating must be inserted under the stator by right-clicking on the stator icon to display the
pop-up menu, and click Insert Commutating command. This command also inserts an icon in the
project tree for an associated winding.
To remove an existing Commutating (and associated winding), right-click on the stator icon to display the pop-up menu and click Remove Commutating. This removes the commutating and the
associated winding.
Note: This is distinct from the general Commutator data associated with rotor.
Pole width
Width of the commutating poles
Pole height
Height of the commutating poles.
Pole length
Length of the commutating poles
Shoe width
Shoe width of the commutating poles
Shoe height
Shoe height of the commutating poles.
Second air gap
Length of the second air gap between the commutating pole and the frame.
Pole stacking
factor
Stacking factor for the commutating poles.
Pole material
Steel type of the commutating poles. Click the button to display the Select
Definition window.
Pole insulation
Thickness of insulation on the pole body side.
Winding Data for Commutating

If you have inserted commutating for a General DC machine, an additional winding icon appears in
the project tree for the associated winding.
Winding type


Conductors per
pole
Number of
strands
Wire wrap
Wire size.
Axial Clearance
Limited cross
width
maximum area.
Limited cross
height

Winding fillet.
Defining the Rotor Data for a General DC Machine

2. Enter the stacking factor for the rotor core in the Stacking Factor field. This value relates to
the effective magnetic length of the core, and ranges from 0 to 1. It is defined as the total length
3. Enter the number of slots in the rotor core in the Number of Slots field.
4.
Select a Slot Type:

a.
Click the button.
b.
c.

Click a button to select the desired slot type (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6). Though slots 3 and 4 are
visually similar, they differ in how the edges are constructed. Slot 3 has a tapered edge
leading from the slot opening to the main slot body. Slot 4 has a rounded edge at the same
location, where the quantity Hr1 defines the radius of the corner slot. TIP: When you run
Slot Editor.
5.
Enter the number of lamination sectors in the Lamination Sectors field.
6.
Enter the outer diameter of the rotor core in the Outer Diameter field.
7.
Enter the inner diameter of the rotor core in the Inner Diameter field.
8.
9.

a.
b.
c.

10. Enter the thickness of the pole press boards in the Press Board Thickness field.
11. Enter the number of slots in the skew width in the Skew Width field.
Rotor Data for General DC Machines

Stacking Factor
Number of Slots
Slot Type
Lamination
Sectors
Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
The effective magnetic length of the rotor core.

Type window.
Steel Type
Press Board
Thickness
Skew Width
Definition window.
The thickness of the pole press boards.
Defining the Rotor Slots for a General DC Machine

Design check box. Using this option causes the software to converge to a flux density value of
1.5 Tesla in the rotor teeth.
3. Enter the available slot dimensions. The following dimensions may be listed, depending on the
Slot Type selected and depending on whether or not Auto Design is selected.:
Hs0
Hs1
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
Rs
4.
Always available.
Always available.
Always available.
Always available.
Rotor Slot Data for General DC Machines

Select or clear this to enable or disable auto-design of slots Hs2, Bs1, and Bs2.
When this check box is selected, only two other fields appear in the window:
Hs0 and Bs0.
Parallel Tooth Select this to design Bs1 and Bs2 based on the tooth width. When this check
box is selected, the Bs1 and Bs2 fields are removed, and the Tooth Width field
is added.
Hs0
Hs1
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
Rs
Rs
Auto Design
Defining the Rotor Windings and Conductors for a General DC Machine

2.
Click the Winding tab.
3.

a.
b.

Lap
Wave
Frog Leg
4.
5.
Note
segments.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Insulation
Conductor
y
Wire Wrap = 2*y

a.
b.
c.

options:
d.

End
Adjustment
End of Stator
Stator
Coil
Slot
Insulation
Defining Different Size Wires for a General DC Machine Rotor Winding

1.
2.
3.
For a round wire:

diameter.

data.
4.
5.
6.
Note
Rotor Winding Data for General DC Machines

tree.
End/
Insulation
tab

Virtual Slots
Slot
Coil Pitch
Number of
Strands
Wire Wrap
Wire Size
Length
End Adjustment The end length adjustment of the rotor coils.
Tip Inner
Diameter
End Clearance
Slot Liner
Equalizer
Full.
Connection
Vent Data for General DC Machines

By option, you can insert or remove Vent data for general DC machines. If you have inserted a
Vent, the icon appears under the rotor winding in the project tree.
To insert a vent:
1. Right-click on the rotor icon to display the pop-up menu.
To remove an existing vent:
1. Right click on the Stator icon to display the pop-up menu.
The Vent Data Properties window contains the following fields.
Vent Ducts
Duct Width
Magnetic Spacer Width of magnetic spacer which hold vent ducts. 0 for non-magnetic spacer.
Width
Duct Pitch
Vent ducts
Holes per Row
Number of axial vent holes per row
Inner Hole
Diameter
Outer Hole
Diameter
Inner Hole
Location
Center-to-center diameter of inner row hole vents.
Outer Hole
Location
Center-to-center diameter of outer row hole vents.
Banding Slots
Number of axial banding slots to tight the rotor winding.
Width of Banding Width of axial banding slots

Slots
Depth of Banding Depth of axial banding slots
Slots
Defining the Commutator and Brush for a General DC Machine

2. Click the Commutator tab.
3.
Note
4.
5.
commutator appears.

a.
b.

a.
b.
6.
7.
8.
9.
11. Enter the angle of displacement from the neutral axis, in mechanical degrees, in the Brush Dis9-220 RMxprt Machine Types
placement field.
Note
Brush Press field.
Note
Commutator and Brush Data for General DC Machines

project tree.
tab
Pancake.
Commutator
Diameter
Commutator
Length
Outer Diameter

commutator.
commutator.
Inner Diameter
Brush tab
Commutator
Insulation
Brush Width
Brush Length
Brush Pairs
Brush
Displacement

Brush Drop
Brush Press
Frictional
Coefficient

Defining the Shaft Data for a General DC Machine

3. Select or clear the No Fan check box to specify whether or not the machine contains a ventilation fan.
4. If you cleared the No Fan check box, then do the following:
5.
a.
Enter the outer diameter of the ventilation fan in the Fan Diameter field.
b.
Enter the width of the fan blades in the Blade Width field.
Shaft Data for General DC Machines

Magnetic Shaft
No Fan
Fan Diameter
Blade Width
magnetic material. When it is selected, the shaft is magnetic.
Select or clear this check box to indicate whether or not the shaft has a
ventilation fan. When it is selected, no fan is being used. When it is cleared,
the design uses a fan, and two additional fields appear: Fan Diameter and
Blade Width.
The outer diameter of the ventilation fan.
The width of the ventilation fans blades.
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a General DC Machine

Solution Setup.
3.
type.
Const Speed
Const Power
Const Torque
Linear Torque
Fan Load

speed.
speed.
4.
Enter the output power in the Rated Output Power field.
5.
Enter the applied or output rated DC voltage in the Rated Voltage field.
6.
Enter the given rated speed in the Rated Speed field.
7.
8.
Click the DC Machine tab.
9.
Select one of the following from the Field Exciting Type pull-down list:
Separately Excited
Self Excited
10. Enter the Exciting Voltage, and select the units.

11. Enter the Series Resistance, and select the units.
12. To automatically obtained the Exciting Voltage and Series Resistance via the Rated Speed,
rather than entering their values, then select the Determined by Rated Speed check box.
Related Topics:
Solution Data for General DC Machines
Solution Data for General DC Machines


Operation Type
Load Type
Rated Output
Power
Rated Voltage
Rated Speed
Operating
Temperature
Field Exciting
Type
Determined by
Rated Speed
General tab. Select Motor or Generator from the pull-down list.

On the General tab. For a motor, select from Const Speed, Const Power,
Const Torque, Linear Torque, and Fan Load. The default is Const
Power. For a generator, select from Infinite Bus and Independent
Generator.
units.
DC Machine tab. Select Separately Excited or Self Excited from the pulldown list.
Select this check box to automatically calculate the Exciting Voltage and
the Series Resistance from the Rated Speed, rather than entering the
values.
Exciting Voltage Enter a voltage value in the field, and select the units from the pull-down
list.
Series Resistance Enter a resistance value in the field, and select the units from the pull-down
list.
Related Topics:
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a General DC Machine
Claw-Pole Alternators
After you have selected Claw-Pole Alternators as your model type, enter the motor data to define
the following:
General data, such as the output power, rated voltage, and speed.
Stator data.
Stator slot data.
Stator winding data.
Rotor data, such as the slot types and dimensions, rotor diameter, and lamination.
Rotor pole data.
Shaft data.
Solution data.
Analysis Approach for Claw-Pole Alternators

Claw-pole alternators (or claw-pole synchronous generators) are widely used in auto industry. They
receive mechanical energy at the shaft and transform it into electrical energy.
The stator of a claw-pole alternator is equipped with a polyphase winding. The rotor is comprised
of claw poles with the same pole number as the stator winding. The claw poles of the rotor are magnetized by a cylinder winding and/or a cylinder permanent magnet. The spinning rotor creates a
rotating magnetic field in the air gap, which produces induced voltage in the stator winding.
The performance of a claw-pole alternator is analyzed based on the frequency-domain phasor diagram, as shown in the figure below.
jI Xaq
M
E0
jI X1
jI d Xad
jI q Xaq
IR1
U
I
Iq
Id
If a claw-pole alternator is equipped with a permanent magnet, the d-axis armature reactance Xad
and q-axis armature reactance Xaq are about constant. Otherwise, Xad is a linearized nonlinear
parameter, and Xaq is a linear parameter. The d-axis synchronous reactance Xd and q-axis synchronous reactance Xq are calculated directly from the following:
X d = X 1 + X ad
X q = X 1 + X aq
Rotor Equipped with an Excitation Winding
If the rotor is equipped with an excitation winding, the exciting current can be adjusted, and the dand the q-axis currents are obtained based on the following process.
Take the input voltage U as the reference phasor, let the power factor angle be f, then the current
phasor is
The phasor represented by OM can be expressed as
OM = U + I ( R 1 + jX q )
The phasor represented by OM can be used to determine the direction of E0.
denote the power angle (the angle that U lags E0), then the angle that I lags E0 is
Let
= +
The d- and the q-axis currents are obtained as follows
I d = I sin
I q = I cos
In the phasor diagrams, the phasor length ON represents the d-axis back emf due to the d-axis
resultant flux linkage and is used to determine the d-axis field saturation. From the no-load characteristic curve of the magnetic circuit, E0, Xad and the excitation current If can be determined based
on the frozen method.
Rotor Equipped with a Permanent Magnet Only

If the rotor is equipped with a permanent magnet only, the field excitation can not be adjusted, and
the d- and the q-axis currents are obtained based on the following process.
For a given power angle (the angle that U lags E0), we have
I d X d + I q R 1 = ( U cos E 0 )
Solving for Id and Iq yields.
I d = ---------------------------------------------------------------------2
R 1 + Xd Xq
R 1 ( U cos E 0 ) + X d U sin
I q = ----------------------------------------------------------------------2
R 1 + Xd Xq
Let the angle that I lags E0 be , we have
Id
= tanh ----Iq
The power factor angle f (the angle that I lags U) is
=
Power and Efficiency
The output electric power is
P 2 = 3UI cos
The input mechanical power is
P 1 = P 2 + P fw + P Cua + P Fe + P Cuf
where Pfw, PCua, PFe, , and PCuf are the frictional and wind, the armature copper, the iron-core,
the excitation winding copper (if an excitation winding is equipped) losses, respectively.
The input mechanical torque is
P1
T 1 = -----
The efficiency of the generator is:
P2
= ------ 100 %
P1
Defining a Claw-Pole Alternator

The general procedure for defining a claw-pole alternator is as follows:
1.
2.
Create the alternator project.

3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
data.
9.

Note
new Maxwell 2D project, and new Maxwell 3D design.
Refer to the Claw-Pole Alternator Problem application note, on the technical support page of the
ANSYS web site, for a specific example of a permanent-magnet DC motor problem.
Defining the General Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator

Use the General window to define the basic parameters of the alternator, such as the power settings, speed, and rated voltage.
3. Enter or select the Number of Phases (2, 3, or 4).
4.
5.
6.
field.
7.
General Data for Claw-Pole Alternators

fields:
(Claw-Pole Synchronous Machine).
Frictional Loss
The frictional energy loss (due to friction and air resistance) measured at
the reference speed.
Number of Phases The number of phases.
Wind Loss
The wind loss measured at the reference speed.
Machine Type
Defining the Stator Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator


3.
4.
5.
Enter the stacking factor for the stator core in the Stacking Factor field. This value is a ratio of
he effective magnetic length of the core, and ranges from 0 to 1. The stacking factor is defined
as the total length minus the total insulation from the laminations, divided by the total length.
A value of 1 indicates that the rotor is not laminated.
6.
a.
b.
c.

7.
8.

a.
b.
Note

Slot Editor.
c.
9.
Stator Data for Claw-Pole Alternators

Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Stacking Factor

Steel Type
Number of Slots
Slot Type
Skew Width
Definition window.
Type window.
Defining the Stator Slot Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator

Design check box.
Hs0
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
Rs
5.
Always available.
Always available.
Tooth Width field.
Tooth Width field.
Stator Slot Data for Claw-Pole Alternators

Parallel
Tooth
Hs0
Hs1
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
Rs
Defining the Stator Winding Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator

3.
4.

a.
b.

5.
Whole Coiled
Half Coiled
Editor
Branches field.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Insulation
Conductor
y
Wire Wrap = 2*y

a.
b.
c.

options:
End
Adjustment
End of Stator
Stator
Coil
Slot
Insulation
Winding Editor for a Claw-Pole Alternator

For a claw-pole alternator, you may want to specify a different number of conductors for each stator
slot. The Winding Editor makes this possible by enabling you to specify the number of turns for
each coil.
3.
4.
5.
Defining Different Size Wires for a Claw-Pole Alternator

size wires.
2.
3.
For a round wire:

diameter.

data.
4.
5.
6.
Note
Stator Winding Data for Claw-Pole Alternators

tree.
Winding Type
Editor.
Conductors per
Slot
Coil Pitch
Number of
Strands
Wire Wrap
End/
Insulation
tab
The number of conductors per stator slot (0 for auto-design).


Wire Size
Length
stator.
Base Inner
Radius
Tip Inner
Diameter
Slot Liner

Limited Fill
Factor
Defining the Rotor Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator

the stator windings. In the project tree, double-click Machine-Rotor and Machine-Rotor-Pole to
3.
4.
5.

a.
b.
c.
6.
7.

Enter the diameter of the rotor yoke in the Yoke Diameter field.
Rotor Data for Claw-Pole Alternators

Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Steel Type
Yoke Diameter

Definition window.
The diameter of the rotor yoke.
Defining the Rotor Pole for a Claw-Pole Alternator

Note

1. To open the Rotor Pole Data Properties window, double-click the Machine-Rotor-Pole
2. Enter the pole embrace at the pole tip in the Tip Embrace field. This value must be between 0
and 1, exclusive.
3. Enter the pole embrace at the pole root in the Root Embrace field. This value must be between
0 and 2, exclusive.
4. Enter the pole thickness at the pole tip in the Tip Thickness field.
5.
Enter the pole thickness at the pole root in the Root Thickness field.
6.
Enter the Pole Length.
7.
Enter the Slot Depth.
8.
Enter the Shoe Thickness.
9.
10. If a magnet is being used, enter its length in the Magnet Length field.
11. Enter the width of the second air gap in the Second Air Gap field.
Rotor Pole Data for Claw-Pole Alternators

Tip Embrace
Root Embrace
Tip Thickness
Root Thickness
Pole Length
Slot Depth
Shoe Thickness
Magnet Type
Magnet Length
Second Air Gap
The pole embrace at the pole tip. Must be > 0 and < 1.
The pole embrace at the pole root. Must be > 0 and < 2.
The pole thickness at the pole tip.
The pole thickness at the pole root.
The length of the pole.
The slot depth.
The shoe thickness.
For all pole types.
The length of the magnet (if a magnet is used).
The width of the second air gap.
Defining the Shaft Data for a Claw-Pole Alternator

Shaft Data for Claw-Pole Alternators

Magnetic Shaft
magnetic material.
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Claw-Pole Alternator

Solution Setup.
2. Click the General tab. The Operation Type is automatically set to General for this machine
type.
3.
Select the Load Type used in the machine from the following options:
Infinite Bus
Independent
Generator
4.
5.
Enter the output power developed at the shaft of the generator in the Rated Output Power
field.
6.
Enter the desired output speed of the alternator at the load point in the Rated Speed field.
7.
8.
Click the Claw-Pole Synchronous Machine tab.
9. Enter a value in the Rated Power Factor field.

10. To enter an Input Exciting Current, select the check box, enter a value, and select the units.
Related Topics:
Solution Data for Claw-Pole Alternators
Solution Data for Claw-Pole Alternators

Operation Type
Load Type
Rated Output
Power
Rated Voltage
Rated Speed
Operating
Temperature
Rated Power
Factor
Input Exciting
Current
General tab. Select Motor or Generator from the pull-down list.

Generator is automatically selected for this machine type
On the General tab. Select from Infinite Bus and Independent
Generator.
units.
Claw-Pole Synchronous Machine tab. Type a value in the field.
Select this check box, enter a value, and select the units. If this check box is
cleared, the value will be calculated automatically rather than entered.
Related Topics:
Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Claw-Pole Alternator
Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines (NSSM)

After you have selected Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machine as your model type, enter
the data to define the following:
General data, such as the number of poles, frictional loss, and reference speed.
Rotor data, such as the slot types and dimensions, rotor diameter, laminations, and windings
and conductors.
Stator pole and winding data, such as its associated pole dimensions, type of steel, and wire
definitions.
Shaft data.
Solution data.
Also see Analysis Approach for the Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machine
Analysis Approach for Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines

The three-phase non-salient-pole synchronous electric machine has two types: the generator and
the motor. Their basic structures are the same. The three-phase non-salient-pole synchronous generators are the main Thrat the shaft and transform it into the electrical energy. The rotor is equipped
with a non-salient-pole winding excited by a DC source. The stator is equipped with a three-phase
winding that has a sinusoidal spatial distribution. The spinning rotor produces a rotating magnetic
field in the air gap of the machine. The frequency of the voltage induced in the stator is given by:
f = ( pn ) 60
where p is the number of pairs of poles, and n is the mechanical speed of the rotor in rpm, which is
called the synchronous speed. The machine is capable of producing both the active and the reactive
power as required by the load connected at the stator terminal.
Usually the frequency-domain phasor diagram is adopted to analyze the characteristics. The phasor
diagrams for a generator and a motor are shown.
Generator
Motor
In the figure, R1, X1, and Xa are the armature resistance, the armature leakage reactance, and the
armature reactance, respectively. In a non-salient-pole synchronous machine, Xad Xaq and they
are both expressed by Xa. Taking the input voltage U as the reference phasor, for a given current:
I = I
where is the angle I lags U , which is called the power factor angle.
The internal back EMF induced by the resultant air gap field considering the effects of armature
reaction Ei can be derived from:
U + ( R 1 + jX 1 ) I
Ei =
U ( R 1 + jX 1 ) I
for Generator
for motor
Based on Ei, the resultant air gap flux considering the effects of armature reaction can be computed, and therefore, the magnetic circuit can be solved. With solved magnetic saturation factor,
saturated Xa is derived, and therefore, the no-load induced voltage E0 with the same magnetic saturation (frozen magnetic circuit) can be calculated from:
E + ( jX a ) I
i
E0 =
E i ( jX a ) I
for Generator
for motor
Let the angle U legs E0 be , which is called the power angle for the generator or the torque angle
for the motor, then the angle I lags E0 is
= +
The d- and the q-axis currents can be obtained respectively as follows:
I =
Id
= I sin
Iq
cos
Based on the magnetic circuit solution and E0, Xa and the excitation current If can be determined
based on the frozen method.
1. For the generator:
The output power (electric power) is directly computed from the voltage and the current as:
P 2 = 3UI cos
The input power (mechanical power) is defined as:
P 1 = P 2 + P fw + P Cua + P Fe + P add + P cuf + P ex

where Pfw, PCua, PFe, Padd, Pcuf and Pex are the frictional and wind loss, the armature copper
loss, the iron-core loss, the additional loss, the field winding copper loss, and the exciter loss,
respectively.
The input mechanical shaft torque is:
P1
T 1 = -----
2. For the motor:
The input power (electric power) is directly computed from the voltage and the current as:
P 1 = 3UI cos
The output power (mechanical power) is defined as:
P 2 = P 1 ( P fw + P Cua + P Fe + P add + P cuf + P ex )

where Pfw, PCua, PFe, Padd, Pcuf and Pex are the frictional and wind loss, the armature copper
loss, the iron-core loss, the additional loss, the field winding copper loss, and the exciter loss,
respectively.
The output mechanical shaft torque is:
P2
T 2 = -----
The efficiency is computed for both the generator and the motor by:
P2
= ------ 100 %
P1
Related Topics:
Defining Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines
Defining Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines

The general procedure for defining a three-phase non-salient synchronous machine is as follows:
1. Create the non-salient synchronous machine project.
2.
After you have selected Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machine as your model type,
you must define the following:
General data, such as number of poles, losses, and reference speed.

Stator data, such as dimensions, slot type, skew, and laminations.
Define the Stator slot dimensions.
Winding data, such as the parallel branches, conductors, and wire dimensions and insulation.
Rotor data, such as the rotor dimensions, lamination and slot type.
Define the Rotor slot data.
Define the Shaft Data.
Solution data, such as specifying motor or generator application, and rated output voltage and
frequency.
You may also use the following options:
Add a damper to or remove an existing damper from the rotor;

Add vents to and remove existing vents from the stator.
Defining the General Data for a Three-Phase NSSM

The Properties window for a three-phase non-salient synchronous machine contains the following
fields to be entered:
Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machine).
Number of Poles The number of poles the machine contains. This value is the total number
of poles in the stator (or the number of pole pairs multiplied by two).
Frictional Loss
Windage Loss
The windage loss (due to air resistance) measured at the reference speed.
Machine Type
Related Topics:
Defining the Stator for Three-Phase NSSM
Defining the Stator for Three-Phase NSSM

The stator is the outer lamination stack where the three-phase windings reside.
Double-click the icon Machine>Stator in the project tree to display the Properties dialog box.
The Properties window contains the following fields:
Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Stacking Factor
Steel Type
Number of Slots
Slot Type
Lamination
Sectors
Pressboard
Thickness
Skew Width
The outer diameter of the stator.

The inner diameter of the stator.
Definition window.
Type window.
The magnetic press board thickness (enter 0 for a non-magnetic press
board).

3.
4.

5.
6.
a.
b.

c.
7.
8.

a.
b.
Note
c.

Select a slot type (available types include 1 through 6). Slot types 1 though 4 are filled
with round wire. Slot types 5 and 6 are filled with rectangular wire. If Auto Design is
enabled, the software designs an optimum slot geometry; in this case, you can input the
tooth width dimension, and the software determines the slot width accordingly.
Slot Editor.
9.

10. Enter the thickness of the magnetic pressboard in the Pressboard Thickness field. Enter 0 for
a non-magnetic pressboard.
Related Topics:
Defining Stator Slots for a Three-Phase NSSM
Defining Stator Slots for a Three-Phase NSSM

To define the slot dimensions:
1. To open the Stator Slot Data Properties window, double-click the Machine>Stator>Slot
Design check box.
3.

Hs0
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
4.
Always available.
Always available.
Related Topics:
Defining Stator Windings and Insulation for a Three-Phase NSSM
Defining Stator Windings and Insulation for a Three-Phase NSSM

Double-click the icon Machine>Stator>Winding in the project tree to display the Properties dialog box, which has two tab sheets: Winding and End/Insulation.
Define Wires, Conductors and Windings of NSSM Stator

In the Winding tab, define the wire, conductor and winding of the stator.
Winding Layers
Winding Type
Parallel Branches
Conductors per Slot
Coil Pitch
Number of Strands
Wire Wrap
Wire Size
The number of layers in the stator winding. Select the winding

layers from the pull-down list (available choices 1 and 2).
The type of the stator winding. Set the winding type to Editor to
use the Winding Editor dialog to design the coil windings
The number of parallel branches in one phase of the stator winding.
The total number of conductors in each stator slot. This value is the
number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. Enter 0
to have RMxprt auto-design this value.
The coil pitch measured in number of slots. The coil pitch is the
number of slots separating one winding. For example, if a coil starts
in slot 1 and ends in slot 6, it has a coil pitch of 5.
The number of wires per conductor. Enter 0 to have RMxprt autodesign this value.
The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap. Enter 0 to
automatically obtain this value from the wire library.
Wire size (0 for auto-design). You can assign wire size of round
wires or rectangle wires. When the slot type you selected is 1 to 4,
round wires are used. When the slot type you selected is 5 or 6,
rectangle wires are used.
Related Topics:
Define End Windings and Insulation of NSSM Stator

Winding Editor
Define End Windings and Insulation of NSSM Stator

In the tab sheet End/Insulation, define the end winding and the insulation of the stator.
Input Half-turn Length Select or clear this check box to specify whether or not you want to
enter the half-turn length. When this check box is selected, the row
Half Turn Length appears the next time you open the Properties
dialog box. When this check box is cleared, the row End
Adjustment appears instead.
Half-turn Length
The half-turn length of the armature winding. It is available when
Input Half-turn Length is selected.
End Adjustment
The end length adjustment of the stator coils, which is the distance
of one end of the conductor extending vertically beyond the end of
the stator. It is available when Input Half-turn Length is cleared.
Base Inner Radius
Tip Inner Diameter
End Clearance
The end clearance between two adjacent stator coils.
Coil Wrap
Single-side coil wrap insulation thickness.
Slot Liner
Wedge Thickness
The thickness of the wedge insulation.
Layer Insulation
The thickness of the insulation layer.
Bottom Insulation
Bottom insulation thickness.
Related Topics:
Define Wires, Conductors, and Windings of NSSM Stator
Winding Editor
For a non-salient synchronous motor, you may want to specify a different number of conductors for
turns for each coil. To enable the Winding Editor, you must have set the Winding Property for
the Winding Type to Editor.
Stator Vent Data for Three-Phase NSSM

To insert a vent on a stator for a three phase synchronous machine:
1. Right click on the stator icon in the project tree to display the shortcut menu.
2.
Click Insert Vent.

To remove an existing vent item,

1. Right-click on the stator icon in the project tree to display the shortcut menu.
This removes the vent item from the project tree.

To access the Vent properties for a vent, double click on a vent item. The Vent Properties window
contains the following fields.
Vent Ducts
The number of radial vent ducts.
Duct Width
The width of the radial vent ducts.
Magnetic spacer
width
Width of magnetic spacer which holds vent ducts. O for non-magnetic spacer.
Duct pitch.
Define NSSM Rotor Data

Double-click the icon Machine>Rotor in the project tree to display the Properties dialog box,
which has one tab sheet: Rotor. In the Rotor tab, define the rotor general data.
Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Stacking Factor
Steel Type
Press Board Thickness
Indexing Slots
Real Slots
Slot Type

Stacking factor of the rotor core.
Select a steel type for the rotor core material.
Magnetic press board thickness, 0 for non-magnetic press board.
Number of indexing slots of the rotor core used to determine slot
pitch.
Number of Slots of the rotor core.
Slot type of the rotor core. There are six types of rotor slots.
Define NSSM Rotor Slot

Double-click the icon Machine>Rotor>Slot in the project tree to display the Properties dialog
box.
In the Slot tab, define the available rotor slot dimensions as illustrated . There are in total six types
of slots that are available:
Type 1 Slot
Type 2 Slot
Type 5 Slot
Type 3 Slot
Type 6 Slot
Type 4 Slot
Related Topics:
Define NSSM Rotor Winding
Define NSSM Rotor Winding

The rotor winding is equipped on the rotor pole to provide the excitation for the magnetic field.
Double click the icon Machine>Rotor>Winding in the project tree to display the Properties dialog box, where you define the wires and physical dimensions of the rotor winding.
In the Winding tab, the following are defined:.

Parallel Branches
Conductors per Slot
Number of Strands
Wire Wrap
Wire Size
The number of parallel branches in the rotor winding.

The number of conductors per slot (0 for auto-design).
Wire size (0 for auto-design). You can assign wire size of round
wires or rectangle wires. When you select Round Wire for Winding
Type, round wires are used ((refer to section 8.4.1 Assign Round
Wire Sizes). Otherwise, rectangle wires are used (refer to section
8.4.2 Assign Rectangular Wire Size).
In the End/Insulation tab the following are defined:

Input Half-turn Length Select or clear this check box to specify whether or not you want to
enter the half-turn length. When this check box is selected, the row
Half Turn Length appears the next time you open the Properties
dialog box. When this check box is cleared, the row End
Adjustment appears instead.
Half-turn Length
The half-turn length of the armature winding. It is available when
Input Half-turn Length is selected.
End Adjustment
One-side end extended length.
Inner Fillet Radius
Inner fillet radius at the span corner.
End Clearance
End clearance between two adjacent coils.
Coil Wrap
Insulation: single-side coil wrap thickness.
Slot Liner
Insulation: slot liner thickness.
Wedge Thickness
Insulation: wedge thickness.
Bottom Insulation
Insulation: bottom insulation thickness.
Limited Cross Height
The limited cross-section height for the winding design or
arrangement, or Overall Height as shown in Figure 12.12 (0 for
available maximum area).
Winding Fillet
The size of the winding fillet.
Related Topics:
Define NSSM Shaft Data
Rotor Vent Data for NSSMs

By option, you can add vents to a rotor in a three-phase NSSM.
To add a vents to the rotor:
1.
2.
Select the rotor icon in the project tree.

Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Insert Vent.
1.
2.
Select the rotor icon in the project tree.

Right-click to display the pop-up menu and select Remove Vent.
The Vent data for the NSSM rotor includes the following fields.
Surface Ducts
Number of surface tangential vent ducts
Surface Duct Width
Width of surface tangential vent ducts
Surface Duct Depth
Depth of surface tangential vent ducts
Surface Duct Pitch
Pitch of surface tangential vent ducts
Axial Ducts
Number of axial vent ducts per pole
Axial Duct Width
Width of axial vent ducts in main teeth
Axial Duct Depth
Depth of axial vent ducts in main teeth
Define NSSM Shaft Data

1. Click the icon Machine>Shaft in the project tree to display the Properties dialog box.
2.
3.
In the tab sheet Shaft, select or clear the check box Magnetic Shaft to specify whether or not
the shaft is to be made of the magnetic material.
Analysis Setup for Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines

Add Solution Setup for NSSM
To set up the solution data:
1. Right click the icon Analysis in the project tree, then click Add Solution Setup from the shortcut menu to display the dialog box Properties. There are two tab sheets.
2. On the General tab, define the solution setup data.
Two options from the pull-down list: Generator and Motor.
Select a load type for the motor or generator from the pull-down list
(refer to section 7.8 Assign Load Types).
Rated Apparent Power The output electric apparent power in kVA developed at the
terminal for the generator, or
Operation Type
Load Type
Rated Output Power: The output mechanical power in kW

developed at the shaft for the motor.
Rated Voltage
The RMS line-to-line voltage.
Rated Speed
The desired synchronous speed.
Operating Temperature The temperature at which the system functions, and select the units.
The Operating Temperature will affect all winding resistances and
therefore affect all ohmic losses.
3.
On the NSSM tab, define the connection data:

The rated power factor. For generators, the rated output power is
determined by the rated apparent power mutiplying the rated power
factor.
Winding Connection
Select Wye or Delta from the pull-down list.
Exciter Efficiency
The percentage efficiency of the exciter used to supply the rotor
winding with the DC current if it is mechanically connected to the
shaft of the generator. The efficiency value ranges between 0% and
100% and will only affect the total efficiency result.
Input Exciting Current If the check box is selected, the companying edit box is enabled.
You need to input the exciting current value and select the units if
needed.
Exciting Current
Exciting current for rated operation.
Rated Power Factor
4.
Click OK to close the pop-up dialog box
Validate NSSM Solution Setup

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click RMxprt>Validation Check to display the information box Validation Check.

If any items do not pass validation, use the diagnostic information in the window to resolve
any issues.
Click Close to close the information box Validation Check.
When the design has been validated, click RMxprt>Analyze All.
The analysis progress is shown in the Progress window and the analysis message is shown in
the Message Manager.
Design Output for Non-Salient Synchronous Machines

When RMxprt has completed a solution, you can display and analyze the results in the following
ways:
View Performance
To view the solutions:
Click RMxprt>Results>Solution Data to display the information box Solutions. It has three tab
sheets.
In the tab sheet Performance, from the pull-down list Data, as shown in Figure 12.15, you have 13
different data tables for the line start permanent magnet motor, which can be used to define Output
Variables for design optimization:
FEA input Data

Field Winding
Full-load Magnetic Variables
Important Factors
No-load Magnetic Variables
Rated Operation
Stator Slot
Stator Winding
Steady State Parameters per Unit
Transient Data
Transient Data per Unit
Unsaturated Steady State Parameters
View Design Sheet

In the tab sheet Design Sheet, you have 12 sets of information, as follows:
General Data
Stator Data
Stator Winding Data
Rotor Data
Field Winding Data
Some Factors and Material Consumption
Unsaturated Steady State Parameters
No Load Magnetic Data
Full Load Magnetic Data
Full Load Electric Data
Transient Parameters and Time Constants
Transient FEA Input Data
Note
To print the Design Sheet: Right click the Design Sheet, select Print from the shortcut
menu, select the printer and other parameters from the dialog box Print, and click OK to
print.
View Curves
In the tab sheet Curves, from the pull-down list Name, you have 10 curves as shown:
Phase Voltage vs Exciting Current
Power Factor vs Torque Angle
Armature Phase Current vs Torque

Angle
Efficiency vs Torque Angle
Output Power vs Torque Angle
Armature Current vs Exciting

Current
Induced Coil Voltages at No Load
Air-Gap Flux Density at No-Load
Induced Winding Voltages at

No-Load
Note
To print the plots from the Curve: Right click on the plot, select Print from the shortcut
print.
Create Reports
1.
Click RMxprt>Results>Create RMxprt Report>Rectangular Plot.

The dialog box Report appears as shown:
2.
Under the tab sheet Trace, there are Variables, Output Variables, Current, Misc, Percentage, and Power under the Category column. Select one from the Category column, select the
traces that belong to it from the Quantity column, and click the button Add Trace to add them
one by one. Finally click the button New report to create the plot. You can always add additional curves to the same plot by repeating the process.
3.
Double click the icon Results>XY Plot1 to display the graph with multiple traces in a new
window.
Note
To print the plots from the Curves: Right click on the plot, select Print from the shortcut
print.
To get a screen shot of from the Curves: Right click ont the plot, select Copy Image,
then paste to a destination file.
Transient FEA of the Non-Salient Synchronous Machines

If you expect to continue the transient or electromagnetic-field FEA with Maxwell2D, you can create Maxwell2D design directly from RMxprt, or export Maxwell2D project based on the .sm2
geometry file and then import the .sm2 file to a Maxwell2D design. For transient FEA, RMxprt can
create a Maxwell2D design with all setups completed.
Create Maxwell 2D Design

Click the command RMxprt>Analysis Setup>Create Maxwell Design in RMxprt to create a
Maxwell2D design with Auto setup checked (refer to subsection 5.2.1 Create Maxwell 2D Design).
A Maxwell2D design called Maxwell2DDesign1 is created with the displayed geometry as shown
below. All setups are automatically completed by RMxprt.
Review Maxwell2D Design Setups

This section reviews all setups automatically completed by RMxprt. For detailed setup process,
please refer to APPENDIX Setup Maxwell 2D Designs.
Solution Type Setup

Click Maxwell 2D>Solution Type in Maxwell2D, you can review that the Solution Type is set
as Magnetic Transient.
Model Setup
1.
2.
Model Depth
Click Maxwell 2D>Design Setting in Maxwell2D and click Set Model Depth tab to
review the Model Depth: 3590 mm.
Motion Type
Double click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Model>MotionSetup1 in the Project Manager window.
In the Type tab you can review the Motion Type being set as Rotation, and the Moving Vector as Positive Global: Z.
3.
4.
5.
Initial Position
In the Data tab of the Motion Setup panel you can review the Initial Position being set as 100
deg with Rotate Limit unchecked. The rotor initial position is set to such a position that the
initial flux linkage of the phase-A winding is at its negative maximum value.
Mechanical Load
In the Mechanical tab of the Motion Setup panel you can review the Angular Velocity being
set as 3000 rpm with Consider Mechanical Transient unchecked.
Symmetry Multiplier
Right click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Model in the Project Manager window, and select Set
Geometry Multiplier in the pop-up panel, you can review that the Symmetry Multiplier is
set as 2.
Boundary Setup
1.
2.
3.
Vector Potential Boundary

Double click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Boundaries>VectorPotential1 in the Project Manager
window, you can review that the highlighted outer half circle in the geometry is set as the Vector Potential Boundary, and its value is set as 0.
Master Boundary
Click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Boundaries>Master1 in the Project Manager window, you can
review that the highlighted arrowhead line from left to right in the geometry is set as the Master Boundary.
Slave Boundary
Double click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Boundaries>Slave1 in the Project Manager window,
you can review that the highlighted arrowhead line from right to left in the geometry is set as
the Slave Boundary, and the relation of the slave boundary to the master boundary is set as
Bs = -Bm. This is because the geometry includes only 1 magnetic pole of the machine.
Material Assignment
In the Maxwell2D modeler windows history tree, you can see that all stator and rotor coil terminals
are assigned to material copper by default. Band, InnerRegion and OuterRegion are assigned as
vacuum as shown:
Two new materials called DW540_50_SF0.932, and DW540_50_SF0.946 are automatically created for Stator and Rotor, based on the original material of DW540_50 used in RMxprt and the
equivalent stacking factors of 0.932 and 0.946. Shaft is also assigned as DW540_50_SF0.946,
because the shaft is defined as magnetic in RMxprt.
Excitation Setup
1.
Windings
Click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Excitations>PhaseA in the Project Manager window, all
objects assigned to this phase are highlighted in the modeler window. In the Properties window, you can review all winding properties: Voltage for Winding Type; Stranded for
IsSolid; 0.00226117 ohms for Resistance; 8.87325e-005 H for Inductance; 1 for Number of
Parallel Branches; 11267.7 * sin(2*pi*50*time-43.4944*pi/180) for Voltage, where 50 is the
frequency in Hz, 11267.7 is the phase peak voltage in Volts, pi is a predefined constant, and
time is a predefined variable for time. By using sin function instead of cos function, the
applied voltage and back EMF are in phase. Therefore, a phase shift in the applied voltage
source will be the power angle of the motor. 43.4944 degrees is the power angle at full load
operation. The values for resistance, inductance and number of parallel branches are obtained
from the TRANSIENT FEA INPUT DATA section in RMxprt design sheet.
Clicking on PhaseB, PhaseC, or Field, you can review all objects assigned to this winding in
the modeler window, and winding properties in the Properties window.
2.
Coil Terminals
A winding consists of several coil terminals, and two coil terminals represent a coil in a complete 2D model. Since we are working with only one-half of the motor structure, one coil terminal can represent one complete coil with master/slave boundary conditions provided. A coil
terminal has properties of Number of Conductors and Polarity Type. Number of Conductors is the number of turns per coil, and it is equal to the Number of Turns given in RMxprt
divided by number of coils per phase. Polarity Type defines the direction of the current in the
coil; it can be either positive or negative. Expand a winding and click on a coil terminal, you
can review the object corresponding to this coil terminal in the modeler window and all coil
terminal properties in the Properties window. In this example, Number of Conductors of A,
B, and C coil terminals is assigned as 1, and it is 12 for the Field windings. Click on PhaseB,
PhaseC, or Field, you can review all objects assigned to this winding in the modeler window,
and winding properties in the properties window.
3.
Y Connection for Three-Phase Windings

Right click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Excitations in the Project Manager Window, and click
Setup Y Connection in the pop-up panel, you can review the Y -connection setup.
Mesh Operation Setup

Maxwell2D mesh maker can create meshes according to predefined mesh operations. A mesh operation defines one or more conditions for some selected objects for mesh maker to create meshes
that satisfy the conditions. RMxprt automatically sets up some mesh operations for different
machine parts based on geometry sizes. For this example, mesh operations include Length_Coil
(set maximum mesh length as 18 mm for all coils), Length_Field (set maximum mesh length as 19
mm for field winding coils), Length_Main (set the maximum mesh length as 135 mm for all other
parts), SurfApprox_Main (set the limited Surface Deviation as 1.175 mm and the limited Normal
Deviation as 30 deg for all parts with true-surface arcs).
Click on one of the mesh operations under Maxwell2DDesign1>Mesh Operations in the Project
Manager window, you can review its properties in the Properties window.
Solution Setup
Click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Analysis>Setup1 in the Project Manager window, you can review
its properties in the Properties window: 0.2s for Stop time, that is 10 periods; 0.0002s for Time step
with 100 steps per period.
Analyze Maxwell 2D Design

Before analyzing the Maxwell2D design, you may want to Apply Mesh Operations and Plot Mesh .
You may also want to create several Quick Reports to display results.
To analyze the Maxwell2D design: right click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Analysis>Setup1 in the
project tree, and click Analyze. While the design is being analyzed, you can update one or all result
reports and view the reports.
To update all reports: right click on Maxwell2DDesign1>Results in the project tree, and select
Update All Reports.
To update one report: right click on the report under Maxwell2DDesign1>Results in the project
tree, and select Update Report.
To view all traces of a report: when you double click on the report under
Maxwell2DDesign1>Results in the project tree, the Modeler window changes to the Results window, and all traces (a curve in a report is a trace) of the selected reports are displayed in the Results
window.
To view a trace of a report: when you click on a trace of a report under
Maxwell2DDesign1>Results in the project tree, the selected trace is highlighted in the Results
window.
To cancel the simulation: right click on the progress bar in the progress window, and pick up Abort
in the pop-up panel.
To stop the simulation so that you can continue the simulation later: right click on the progress bar
in the progress window, and pick up Clean Stop in the pop-up panel.
For this example, the simulated three-phase currents and the electro-magnetic torque are shown in
Figure 12.24 and 12.25, respectively.
Right click on the Winding Quick Report in the Results window, and pick up Marker>Add X
Marker in the pop-up panel, yellow-shaded boxes are added in the report to indicate X and all Y
values. Click on the X box (or the vertical line), and drag it to some place where you see the steadystate peak value of a phase current as shown:
W i nd i ng Q u i c k R e p o r t
A n s o ft C o rp o ra t io n
30 .0 0
M a xw e ll2 D D e s ig n 1
C u rve I n fo
C u rr en t (P h as e A )
S e t u p 1 : T r an s i e nt
C u rr en t (P h as e B )
C u rr en t (P h as e C )
20 .0 0
13 .7 7 17
Y 1 [ A]
10 .0 0
0 .0 0
- 7.2 36 6
- 9.1 10 0
- 10 .0 0
- 20 .0 0
- 30 .0 0
0. 00
50 .00
10 0 .0 0
T im e [m s ]
15 0.0 0
2 00 .0 0
M X 1: 1 50 .86 0 7
Add X makers in Torque Quick Report to indicate the steady-state maximum and minimum values
of torque as shown below. The average torque can be approximately obtained from the maximum
and minimum values as Tav = (Tmax + Tmin) / 2 = (10.63 + 7.33) / 2 = 8.98 Nm.
Torque
Ansoft Corporati on
25.00
Maxwell2DDesign1
Curve Info
20.00
Moving1.Torque [NewtonMeter]
15.00
10.6253
10.00
7.3317
5.00
0.00
-5.00
-10.00
-15.00
-20.00
0.00
50.00
100.00
Time [ms]
150.00
200.00
MX1: 127.3865
MX2: 111.4241

After you have selected Generic Rotating Machine as your model type, the following machine
data must be defined to configure the machine:
General data, such as the source type (AC or DC), structure (inner or outer rotor), and rotor and
stator types.
Stator and rotor data, such as numbers of poles and slots, and circuit and slot types.
Stator and rotor core data, such as dimensions, composition, lamination, and other physical
characteristics.
Stator and rotor slot design dimensions.
Stator and rotor pole data, such as magnet type, length, and thickness.
Stator and rotor winding data, such as winding type, number of layers and branches, conductor
and coil data, and wire and insulation specifications.
Shaft data.
Solution data.
Optionally you can insert or remove the following for a Generic Rotating Machine.
Vent data, added under a stator or rotor.

Circuit data, added under a stator or rotor for DC source type machines.
Brush data, added under an Axial AC rotor structure.
Analysis Approach for Generic Rotating Machines

Generic Rotating Machines can be configured to operate as any of the following types:
Generator
Generic Rotating Machine Operating as a Generator

Doubly-fed induction generators (DFIGs) are widely used in wind power systems. A DFIG works
as a component of a wind power system, as shown below, where the wind turbine transforms wind
energy into mechanical energy, and the DFIG transforms mechanical energy into electrical energy.
For a DFIG, both the stator and the rotor are equipped with poly-phase AC windings. The stator and
rotor windings may, or may not, have the same number of phases, but they must have the same
number of poles p. In order to produce terminal voltages with desired frequency f in the stator
winding, the rotor winding must be excited by balanced poly-phase currents with the slip frequency
sf via an AC-DC-AC convert. Slip s is defined as:
s = 1 n n0
where n is the rotor speed, and n0 is the synchronous speed as given below:
n 0 = 60 f p
When the rotor speed is lower than the synchronous speed, the rotor currents have the same phase
sequence as the stator currents, and the rotor winding gets power from the converter. However,
when the rotor speed is higher than the synchronous speed, the phase sequence of the rotor currents
is different from that of the stator currents, and the rotor winding outputs power to the converter.
For a given wind turbine, the power coefficient (the ratio of turbine power to the wind power), is a
function of the tip speed ratio (the ratio of the blade tip speed to the wind speed). In order to track
the maximum power point, the tip speed ratio must keep constant - at its optimal value. The input
mechanical power with Maximum Power Point Tracking (MPPT) must satisfy:
P mech = P m_ref ( m ref )
where Pm_ref is the turbine power with MPPT at a reference speed of ref based on the optimal tip
speed ratio, and m is the rotor speed in rad/s.
The rotor mechanical loss is:
P f = P f_ref ( m ref )
where Pf_ref is mechanical loss measured at a reference speed of ref .

The electro-magnetic power in the air gap is:
P em = ( P mech P f ) ( 1 s )
Therefore, the stator output electrical power at rated operation is:
2
P 1 = P em m 1 I 1 R 1 = m 1 V 1 I 1 cos
where m1 is the number of phases of the stator winding, R1 is the stator phase resistance, V1 is the
stator rated phase voltage, I1 is the rated stator phase current to be determined, and cos is the
rated power factor. Solving for I1 , one obtains:
2 P em m 1
I 1 = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2
V 1 cos + ( V 1 cos ) + 4 R 1 P em m 1
Then, based on the equivalent circuit shown below, one obtains:
V 1 = V 1 0
I 1 = I 1
E m = V1 + I 1 ( R 1 + jX 1 )
Im = ( Em Xm ( Em ) )
I 2 = I 2 2 = I 1 + I m
Now, rotor input electrical power can be computed as:

2
P 2 = sP em + m 2 I 2 R 2
where m2 is the number of phases of the rotor winding.
The electromagnetic torque Tem is:
P em
T em = -------
where ? denotes the synchronous speed in rad/s.
The input mechanical torque on the shaft is:
T mech = T em + T f
where Tf denotes the frictional torque.
The total electrical output power is:
P elec = P 1 P 2 p Fe
where pFe is the core loss.
The efficiency is defined as:
P
P mech
elec
- 100%
= -------------
Defining a Generic Rotating Machine

The general procedure for defining a a generic rotating machine is as follows:
1. Insert a Generic Rotating Machine into a new or existing project.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Double-click the Machine>Stator entry in the project tree to define the stator geometry, pole
data, and circuit type.
Double-click the Machine>Stator>Core entry in the project tree to define the stator core
dimensions, composition, and other material characterisitcs.
Double-click the Machine>Stator>Core>Slot entry in the project tree to define the stator slot
dimensions. (Not applicable to AXIAL_PM stator type.)
For AXIAL_PM stator type, double-click the Machine>Stator>Core>Pole entry in the project tree to define the AXIAL_PM stator core pole properties.
Double-click the Machine>Stator>Winding entry in the project tree to define the stator windings, conductors, and insulation data. (Not applicable to AXIAL_PM stator type.)
For DC Source Type machines, double-click the Machine>Stator>Circuit entry in the project
tree to define the stator circuit properties. (Not applicable to AXIAL_PM stator type.)
Double-click the Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree to define the rotor geometry, the
pole data, and circuit type.
Double-click the Machine>Rotor>Core entry in the project tree to define the rotor core
dimensions, composition, and other material characterisitcs.
Double-click the Machine>Rotor>Core>Slot entry in the project tree to define the rotor slot
dimensions. (Not applicable to AXIAL_PM or PM_INTERIOR rotor types.)
For AXIAL_PM or PM_INTERIOR rotor types, double-click the
Machine>Rotor>Core>Pole entry in the project tree to define either the AXIAL_PM rotor
core pole properties or the PM_INTERIOR rotor core pole properties.
Double-click the Machine>Rotor>Winding entry in the project tree to define the rotor conductors, windings, and insulation data. (Not applicable to AXIAL_PM or PM_INTERIOR
rotor types.)
For DC Source Type machines (Inner and Outer Structure only), double-click the
Machine>Rotor>Circuit entry in the project tree to define the rotor circuit properties. (Not
applicable to PM_INTERIOR rotor type.)
15. Optionally, you can insert or remove Vent data.

16. Optionally, you can insert or remove Brush data for generic rotating machines that have an
Axial AC rotor defined.
17. Double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the project tree to define the magnetism, frictional
and windage losses,and reference speed of the shaft.
data.
20. Choose RMxprt>Analyze All to analyze the design.

Note
Refer to the Generic Rotating Machine application note, on the technical support page of the
ANSYS web site, for a specific example of a problem using a Generic Rotating Machine.
Defining the General Data for a Generic Rotating Machine

Use the Machine tab in the Properties dialog box (or Propertieswindow) to define the basic parameters of the Generic Rotating Machine, such as the source type, structure, and rotor and stator types.
1. To open the Properties dialog box, double-click the Machine entry in the project tree on the
desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties window of the desktop without opening
the dialog box.)
2. Select the source type for the machine from the drop-down list in the Source Type Value field.
The default value is AC.
3. Select the structure for the machine from the drop-down list in the Structure Value field. The
default value is Inner Rotor.
a. Optionally, if the selected Structure is Axial-Flux Rotor, choose if either the rotor, stator, or neither is to be Double-Sided. The default value is None.
b. Optionally, if the selected Structure is Axial-Flux Rotor, set the Air Gap Length.
5.
4.
Select the stator type for the machine from the drop-down list in the Stator Type Value field.
Select the rotor type for the machine from the drop-down list in the Rotor Type Value field.
6.
General Data for Generic Rotating Machines

The General Data Properties window for a generic rotating machine contains the following
fields:
Source Type
Structure
Stator Type
The source to deliver electric power. (AC or DC) Default is AC.

The type of rotor structure for the machine. (Inner Rotor, Outer Rotor, or
Axial-Flux Rotor) Default is Inner Rotor.
The stator core type. (AXIAL_AC, AXIAL_PM, or SLOT_AC)
If Structure type is Axial-Flux Rotor, then stator can be either

AXIAL_AC or AXIAL_PM. Default is AXIAL_AC.
If Structure type is Inner Rotor or Outer Rotor, stator type is
SLOT_AC.
Rotor Type
The rotor core type. (AXIAL_AC, AXIAL_PM, SLOT_AC, or

PM_INTERIOR)
If Structure type is Outer Rotor, then rotor type is SLOT_AC.
If Structure type is Axial-Flux Rotor, then rotor type can be either
AXIAL_AC or AXIAL_PM.
Double-Sided
If Structure type is Inner Rotor, then rotor type can be either

SLOT_AC or PM_INTERIOR.
Present only if Structure type is Axial-Flux.
Air Gap Length
Choose Rotor, Stator, or None.
Default is None.
Present only if Structure type is Axial-Flux.
Set the air gap length. Default is 0.
Defining the Stator and Rotor Data for a Generic Rotating Machine
Use the Stator Properties and Rotor Properties dialog boxes to define the stator and rotor poles,
slots, windings, and optional position control.
To define the general stator and rotor data:
1. To open the Stator or Rotor Properties dialog box, double-click the Machine>Stator (or
Machine>Rotor) entry in the project tree on the desktop. (You can also enter values in the
corresponding Properties window of the desktop without opening a separate dialog box.)
2. Enter the number of poles in the Number of Poles field.
3.
4.
Depending on the rotor or stator type being used, do one of the following:
a. If the rotor or stator type is AXIAL_AC or SLOT_AC, continue with step 4.
b. If the rotor or stator type is AXIAL_PM, there are no additional settings. Click OK to
close the dialog.
c. If the rotor type is PM_INTERIOR, there are no additional settings. Click OK to close the
dialog.
Enter the number of slots in the Number of Slots field.
5.
Select a circuit type for the stator (or rotor):

a.
Click the button for Circuit Type.

The Circuit Type dialog box appears.
6.
b.
Click a button to specify the desired circuit type.
c.
Click OK to close the Circuit Type dialog box and return to the Properties dialog box.
Select a Slot Type:

a.
Click the Slot Type button.

The Select Slot Type dialog box appears.
b.
Note
7.
8.
Select a slot type (available types may include 1 through 6).

Slot Editor.
c. Click OK to close the Select Slot Type dialog box and return to the Properties dialog
box.
If the drive circuit is to be controlled by position signals from a position sensor, select the Position Control check box.
Stator and Rotor Data for Generic Rotating Machines

To access the general stator or rotor data, double-click the Machine>Stator or
Machine>Rotor entry in the project tree.
The Stator (or Rotor) Properties window contains the following fields:
Number of Poles The number of poles on which the winding is wound. Default is 2.
For AXIAL_PM core type: the number of permanent magnet poles. Default
is 2.
For PM_INTERIOR rotor core type: the number of permanent magnet
poles. Default is 4.
Number of Slots The number of slots of the iron core. Default is 18.
Invisible for AXIAL_PM and PM_INTERIOR core types.
Circuit Type
The drive circuit type. Default is Y3.
Slot Type
The slot type of the iron core. Default is Type 1.
Position Control Determines if the drive circuit is controlled by postion signals from a
position sensor. Default is unchecked (not controlled by signals from a
position sensor.
Defining Stator and Rotor Core Data for a Generic Rotating Machine
1.
To open the stator or rotor core Properties dialog box, double-click the
Machine>Rotor>Core or Machine>Stator>Core entry in the project tree on the desktop.
(You can also enter values in the corresponding Properties windor of the desktop without
opening a separate dialog box.)
2.
Enter the outer diameter of the core in the Outer Diameter field.
3.
Enter the inner diameter of the core in the Inner Diameter field.
4.
5.
6.
Enter the length of the core in the Length field.

Enter the stacking factor for the core in the Stacking Factor field. This value relates to the
effective magnetic length of the core, and ranges from 0 to 1. It is defined as the total length
Select a Steel Type for the core:
a.

The Select Definition dialog box appears.
b.
c.
7.
8.
Click OK to close the Select Definition dialog box and return to the Properties dialog
box.
Depending on the rotor or stator type being used, do one of the following:
a. If the Machine Rotor Type is PM_INTERIOR, continue with step 8.
b. If the Machine Rotor or Stator Type is SLOT_AC, AXIAL_AC, or AXIAL_PM, continue
with step 9.
If the Machine Rotor Type is PM_INTERIOR, select a Pole Type for the core:
a.
Click the button for Pole Type.

b.
c.
Note
9.
Select the desired pole type (1 through 6). You can hover over the numbered buttons to
view the pole type configuration in the window. The default type is 3.
Click OK to close the Select Pole Type window.
When Machine>Rotor>Core>Pole is selected in the Project Manager tree, the selected
pole type diagram displays on the machine editor window Diagram tab. The Main tab
also shows the pole drawing, which is dynamically updated as the pole properties are
defined.
d. There are no additional settings for the PM_INTERIOR rotor type. Continue with step 11.
Enter the skew width (measured in degrees) in the Skew Width field.
Note
The Skew Width field is not available if the Machine Rotor Type is PM_INTERIOR.
10. If the Machine Structure type is either Inner Rotor or Outer Rotor and the Stator or Rotor Type
is SLOT_AC:
a. Enter the thickness of the press boards in the Press Board Thickness field.
b.
c.
Note
If the press board is made of magnetic material, check the Magnetic Press Board checkbox.
Enter the number of lamination sectors in the Lamination Sectors field.
The above settings are not available if the Machine Rotor Type is PM_INTERIOR.
11. Click OK to close the Properties dialog box.
Stator and Rotor Core Data for Generic Rotating Machines

To access the stator or rotor core data, double-click the Machine>Rotor>Core or
Machine>stator>Core entry in the project tree.
The core data Properties dialog box contains the following fields:
The outer diameter of the core.
The inner diameter of the core.
The length of the core.
The effective magnetic length of the core.
The steel type of the core. Click the button to open the Select
Definition window.
Pole Type
The pole type for PM_INTERIOR rotor type only.
Default type is 3.
Invisible for all other stator and rotor core types.
Press Board Thickness The thickness of the pole press boards.
Invisible for AXIAL_PM and AXIAL_AC rotor and stator types.
Invisible for PM_INTERIOR rotor type.
Magnetic Press Board Defines if the press board is made of magnetic material.
Skew Width
The skew width measured in degrees.
Invisible for AXIAL_AC rotor and stator types.
Lamination Sectors
Outer Diameter
Inner Diameter
Length
Stacking Factor
Steel Type
Defining the Stator and Rotor Core Slots for a Generic Rotating Machine
Note
This section is not applicable to:
AXIAL_PM type stators or rotors.

PM_INTERIOR type rotors.
To define the physical dimensions of the stator and rotor core slots:
1. To open the stator or rotor core slot data Properties dialog box, double-click theMachine>Stator>Core>Slot or Machine>Rotor>Core>Slot entry in the project tree on the
2.
3.
4.
a separate dialog box.)

Optionally, to automatically design the dimensions of slots Hs2, Bs1, and Bs2, select the Auto
Design check box. Selecting Auto Design also disables the Parallel Tooth option.
Optionally, to automatically design Bs1 and Bs2 based on Tooth Width, select the Parallel
Tooth check box. Selecting Parallel Tooth also enables the Tooth Width field.
Enter the available slot dimensions. The following dimensions may be listed, depending on the
Slot Type selected and depending on whether or not Auto Design or Parallel Tooth is
selected.:
Hs0
Hs1
Hs2
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
Rs
5.
Always available.
Available only when the slot type is 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.
Available only when the slot type is 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.
Available only when the slot type is 3 or 4.
Core Slot Data for Generic Rotating Machines

To access the core slot data, double-click either the Machine>Rotor>Core>Slot or the
Machine>Rotor>Core>Slot entry in the project tree.
The core slot data Properties dialog box contains the following fields:
Select or clear this to enable or disable auto-design of slots Hs2, Bs1, and Bs2.
When this check box is selected, only Hs0 , Hs1, Bs0 and Rs are present.
Parallel Tooth Select this to design Bs1 and Bs2 based on the tooth width. When this check
box is selected, the Bs1 and Bs2 fields are removed, and the Tooth Width field
is added.
Hs0
Machine>Stator (or Rotor)>Core>Slot is selected).
Hs1
Hs2
Auto Design
Bs0
Bs1
Bs2
Rs
Rs
Machine>Stator (or Rotor)>Core>Slot is selected). Rs is added when the
slot type is 3 or 4.
Defining AXIAL_PM Type Stator and Rotor Core Poles for a Generic Rotating
Machine
Note
This section is applicable only to core poles for AXIAL_PM type stators or rotors.
To define core poles for PM_INTERIOR type rotors, refer to Defining PM_INTERIOR
Type Rotor Core Poles for a Generic Rotating Machine.
To define the properties of AXIAL_PM type stator and rotor core poles:
1.
To open the stator or rotor core pole data Properties dialog box, double-click theMachine>Stator>Core>Pole or Machine>Rotor>Core>Pole entry in the project tree on the
2.
a separate dialog box.)

Set the pole Embrace value.
3.
Set the Magnet Thickness and Magnet Length.
4.
Select the Magnet Type.
5.
AXIAL_PM Core Pole Data for Generic Rotating Machines

To access the core pole data for AXIAL_PM type stators and rotors, double-click either the
Machine>Stator>Core>Pole or the Machine>Rotor>Core>Pole entry in the project tree.
The core pole data Properties dialog box contains the following fields:
Embrace
Pole embrace value.
Magnet Thickness Axial thickness of the magnet, per side.
Magnet Length The Radial length of the magnet.
Magnet Type
Magnet material type.
Click the button to open the Select Definition window and select the magnet
material type from the list.
Defining PM_INTERIOR Type Rotor Core Poles for a Generic Rotating

Machine
Note
1.
This section is applicable only to core poles for PM_INTERIOR type rotors.
To define core poles for AXIAL_PM type stators and rotors, refer to Defining
AXIAL_PM Type Stator and Rotor Core Poles for a Generic Rotating Machine.
To define the properties of PM_INTERIOR type rotor core poles:

Either open the rotor core pole data Properties dialog box by double-clicking the
Machine>Rotor>Core>Pole entry in the project tree on the desktop;
or simply select the Pole entry to enter values directly in the Properties window of the desktop without opening a separate dialog box.)
Note
The currently selected pole type diagram displays on the machine editor window
Diagram tab. The Main tab also shows the pole drawing, which is dynamically
updated as the pole properties are defined.
Undo and Redo of property changes is supported.
If you wish to change the pole type, select the Machine>Rotor>Core entry in the project
tree, then click the Pole Type button in its Properties window to open the Select Pole
Type window.
Select the desired pole type (1 through 6). You can hover over the numbered buttons to
view the pole type configuration in the window. The default type is 3.
2.
Click OK to close the Select Pole Type window

Set the D1 diameter for magnet ducts.
3.
Set the O1, O2, B1, Rib, and HRib magnet duct dimensions.
Note
Dimension O1 is invisible for pole types 1 and 2.

Dimension HRib is invisible for pole types 1, 2, and 6.
4.
Set the number of duct Layers. Default value is 1.
5.
6.
Set the Layer Pitch value (pitch value between two layers).
Set the Magnet Thickness value.
7.
Set the Magnet Width value (total width of all magnets per pole).
8.
Select the Magnet Type by clicking the button to open the Select Definition window Materials tab and selecting the desired magnet material type. Use the Material Filter tab settings to
filter for Magnet materials. Click OK to close the window.
9.
PM_INTERIOR Rotor Core Pole Data for Generic Rotating Machines

To access the core pole data for PM_INTERIOR type rotors, double-click the
Machine>Rotor>Core>Pole entry in the project tree.
The core pole data Properties dialog box contains the following fields:
D1
O1
O2
B1
Rib
HRib
Limited diameter for magnet ducts.

Magnet duct dimension.
Invisible when pole type is 1 or 2.
Invisible when pole type is 1,2, or 6.
Layers
Number of duct layers.
Layer Pitch
Pitch between two duct layers.
Magnet Thickness Magnet thickness, or duct thickness.
Magnet Width
Total width of all magnets per pole.
Magnet Type
Magnet material type.
Click the button to open the Select Definition window and select the magnet
material type from the list. Use the Material Filter tab settings to filter for
Magnet materials.
PM_INTERIOR Rotor Core Pole Types

The PM_INTERIOR rotor core type supports six pole types. You can choose the pole type by
selecting the Machine>Rotor>Core entry in the project tree, then clicking the Pole Type button in its Properties window to open the Select Pole Type window.
The six available pole types are shown below. Refer to Defining PM_INTERIOR Type Rotor
Core Poles for a Generic Rotating Machine for details on defining the various pole properties.
Pole Type 1
Pole Type 3
Pole Type 2
Pole Type 4
Pole Type 5
Pole Type 6
Defining the Stator and Rotor Windings for a Generic Rotating Machine
Note

To define the wires, conductors, insulation, and windings of a stator or rotor:

1. To open the rotor or stator slot winding Properties dialog box, double-click the
Machine>Stator>Winding or Machine>Rotor>Winding entry in the project tree on the
desktop. (You can also enter values in the Properties section of the desktop without opening a
separate dialog box.)
3.
Choose the desired number of layers in the winding from the drop-down list in the Winding
Layers field.
4.

a.

b.
Whole Coiled
Half Coiled
Editor
Type
Description
A user-defined one-layer winding arrangement. You need to set up the
Winding Editor
winding arrangement for each slot in the Winding Editor.
(one-layer)
Whole-Coiled
(one-layer)
Slot 123
Half-Coiled
(one-layer)
Slot 123
Winding Editor
(two-layer)
Whole-Coiled
A user-defined two-layer winding arrangement. When you select for

winding layers you can specify a different winding arrangement for
each slot in the Winding Editor.
A two-layer whole-coiled winding:
(two-layer)
Slot 123
Half-Coiled
The phase belt for this winding configuration is equal to 360/2m, where
m is the phase number.
(two-layer)
Slot 1 2 3

Note
c.
layer needs to be defined; the bottom layer is determined according to the coil pitch.
5.
6.
7.
dialog box and return to the Properties window.

Enter the number of parallel branches in one phase of the winding in the Parallel Branches
field.
Enter the total number of conductors in each slot in the Conductors per Slot field. This value
is the number of turns per coil multiplied by the number of layers. Enter 0 to have RMxprt
auto-design this value.
This field is not displayed when the number of Winding Layers is 1.
8.
9.
Insulation
Conductor
y
Wire Wrap = 2*y

a.

The Wire Size dialog box appears.
b.
c.
options:
<number> You can select a specific gauge number. When you select a gauge number, the
Wire Diameter field is automatically updated.
USER
AUTO
MIXED
you want to enter a diameter that does not correspond to a particular wire gauge.
the optimal value. The diameter information is then written to the output file
For example, a single conductor may consist of 5 wires, 3 wires with a diameter
d. When you are done setting the wire size, click OK to close the Wire Size dialog box and
return to the Properties dialog box.
If you cleared Input Half-turn Length, then enter the end length adjustment of the stator/
rotor coils in the End Extension field. The end extension is the distance one end of the
conductor extends vertically beyond the end of the stator or rotor.
End
Extension
End of Stator/Rotor
Stator/Rotor
Coil
16. Enter the distance between two adjacent coils in the End Clearance field.
17. Enter the thickness of the single-side coil wrap insulation in the Coil Wrap field.
This field is applicable and displayed only for slot types 5 and 6.
This field is applicable and displayed only when the Winding Layers value is 2.
21. Enter the bottom insulation thickness in the Bottom Insulation field.
This field is applicable and displayed only for slot types 5 and 6.
This field is applicable and displayed only for slot types 1, 2, 3, and 4.
23. Enter the span lenght correction factor to scale the end span length in the Correction Factor
field.
24. Enter the top spare slot space for a dual-winding machine in the Top Spare Space field.
25. Enter the bottom spare slot space for a dual-winding machine in the Bottom Spare Space
field.
26. Click OK to close the Properties dialog box.
Stator and Rotor Winding Data for Generic Rotating Machines

Note

To access the core slot data, double-click either the Machine>Rotor>Core>Slot or the
Machine>Rotor>Core>Slot entry in the project tree.
The winding data Properties dialog box contains the following fields:
Winding tab
Winding Layers
The number of winding layers. (The bottom layer is

for another side slot if the core is double-sided.)
Select 1 or 2 in the pull-down list. Default value is 2.
Winding Layers is always 2 if the core is doublesided.
Winding Type
The type of stator winding. Click the button to open

the Winding Type window and choose from WholeCoiled, Half-Coiled, and Editor.
Default value is Whole-Coiled.
Parallel Branches
The number of parallel branches in the winding.

Default value is 1.
Conductors per Slot
The number of conductors per slot (0 for auto-design).
Coil Pitch
The coil pitch measured in number of slots. This field

is displayed only when the number of Winding
Layers is 2.
Coil Pitch is always 0 if the core is double-sided.
Number of Strands
The number of wires per conductor (0 for autodesign). Default value is 1.
Wire Wrap
The thickness of the double-sided wire wrap (0 to

automatically obtain this value from the wire library).
Wire Size
The diameter of the wire (0 for auto-design). Click the

button to open the Wire Size dialog box where you
can specify units, wire type, diameter, and gauge.
End/Insulation Input Half-turn Length Select or clear this check box to specify whether or
not you want to enter the half-turn length. When this
tab
check box is selected, the Half Turn Length field
appears the next time you open the Properties
window. When this check box is selected, the End
Extension field appears instead. Default value is
unchecked.
Half Turn Length
The average half-turn length of the armature winding.

Visible only when Input Half Turn Length is
checked.
End Extension
The end length adjustment of the coils, which is the

distance one end of the conductor extends vertically
beyond the end of the stator or rotor.
Invisible when Input Half Turn Length is checked.
Correction Factor
End span length correction factor to scale the end span

length. Must be > 0. Defaul value is 1.0.
Invisible when Input Half Turn Length is checked
Base Inner Radius
Tip Inner Diameter

Invisible if the core is double-sided.
End Clearance
Coil Wrap
The thickness of the single-side coil wrap. This field

is displayed only when the Slot Type is 5 or 6.
Slot Liner
Wedge Thickness
The thickness of the wedge insulation.
Layer Insulation
The thickness of the insulation layer.

Invisible when number of winding layers is 1 or the
core is double-sided.
Bottom Insulation
Thickness of the bottom insulation. This field is

displayed only when the Slot Type is 5 or 6.
Limited Fill Factor
The limited slot fill factor for the wire design. This
field is displayed only for Slot Types 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Top Spare Space
The top spare slot space for a dual-winding machine.

The value must be greater-than or equal-to 0 and lessthan 1.
Bottom Spare Space
The bottom spare slot space for a dual-winding

machine. The value must be greater-than or equal-to
0.
Also, the sum of the Top Spare Space and Bottom
Spare Space values must less-than 1.
Conductor Type
Conductor material type of the Stator/Rotor Winding.
Winding Editor for a Generic Rotating Machine

For a generic rotating machine, you may want to specify a different number of conductors for
each stator or rotor slot. The Winding Editor enables you to specify the number of turns for
each coil. To enable the Winding Editor, you must have set the Winding Property for the
Winding Type to Editor.
1.

The Winding Editor dialog box appears.
2.
In the table in the upper left, set which Phase you want for each coil and which slot is the
In and Out slot for the current in each coil.
If you are working on a quarter or half model, you may want to specify a multiplier by
selecting a value from the Periodic Multiplier drop-down menu.
Select or deselect the Constant Turns or Constant Pitch check boxes, depending on
whether you want to be able to change these setting in the table above. When these options
are selected, you cannot change the turns or pitch.
3.
4.
5.
When you are satisfied with the coil settings, click OK to close the Winding Editor dialog box.
Defining Different Size Wires for a Generic Rotating Machine

2.
3.
For a round wire:
Note

Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have
this diameter.
4.
5.
Click Add to add the new wire datat.

Enter the Width of the wire in the table. The width should be greater thatn the
thickness.
Enter a Number in the table to specify how many of the conductors wires have
this data.
Repeat step 3 for each size wire you want to add.
Defining the Stator and Rotor Circuits for a Generic Rotating Machine
You can define stator and rotor Circuit parameters for generic rotating machines whose Source
Type is DC.
Note
This procedure is not applicable to:

AXIAL_AC type rotors.
To define the circuit parameters of a stator or rotor:

1. To define the circuit parameters click either the stator or rotor Circuit icon in the project tree.
You can then edit the brush parameters directly in the Properties window. (You can also open
the rotor or stator circuit Properties dialog box by double-clicking the Machine>Stator>Circuit or Machine>Rotor>Circuit entry in the project tree on the desktop.)
2. Select the Control Type from the drop down menu. Choices are: DC, CCC, PWM, and HCC.
3.
5.
If the stator or rotor Position Control has been enabled, set the Lead Angle of Trigger value.
If the Control Type chosen is either DC or CCC, set the Trigger Pulse Width. The default
value is 120.
Set the Transistor Drop (voltage drop of one transistor).
6.
Set the Diode Drop.
7.
If the Control Type is CCC, set the Maximum Current and Minimun Current values.
8.
If the Control Type is PWM, set the Modulation Index and Carrier Frequency Times.
9.
If the Control Type is HCC, set the Reference Amplitutde and Hysteresis Band.
4.
Stator and Rotor Circuit Data for Generic Rotating Machines

To access the stator or rotor circuit data, double-click either the Machine>Stator>Circuit or the
Machine>Rotor>Circuit entry in the project tree.
The circuit data Properties dialog box contains the following fields:
Control Type: DC, CCC (chopping current control ), PWM, HCC
(hysteresis current control). Default is DC.
Lead Angle of Trigger Lead angle of trigger in electrical degrees.
Visible only when Position Control is enabled.
Trigger Pulse Width Trigger pulse width in electrical degrees.
Visible only when Control Type is DC or CCC. Default value is 120.
Transistor Drop
Voltage drop of one transistor.
Diode Drop
Voltage drop of one diode, or the total voltage for star-type circuits in
the discharge loop.
Control Type
Maximum current for chopping current control.

Visible only when Control Type is CCC.
Minimum Current
Minimum current for chopping current control.
Visible only when Control Type is CCC.
Modulation Index
Modulation index (the ratio of the sine-wave amplitude to the triangular
amplitude).
Visible only when Control Type is PWM.
Carrier Frequency
Carrier frequency times (the ratio of the triangular frequency to the sinewave frequency).
Times
Visible only when Control Type is PWM.
Reference Amplitude The amplitude of the sine-wave reference current.
Visible only when Control Type is HCC.
Hysteresis Band
The difference between the upper and lower hysteresis limits.
Visible only when Control Type is HCC.
Maximum Current
Defining the Axial AC Rotor Brush for a Generic Rotating Machine

Optionally, you can insert or remove brush data for generic rotating machines that have an Axial
AC Rotor Structure. If you have inserted a brush, the icon appears under the core slot in the project
tree.
To insert a brush:
1. Right-click on the rotor core icon to display the pop-up menu.
2. Click Insert Brush.
3.
To edit the brush data, double-click the brush icon to open the brush properties dialog.
The brush data Properties dialog box contains the following fields:
Diameter
Brush Width
Brush Lenght
Brush Drop
Contact Resistance
Brush Press
Frictional Coefficient
Brush surface diameter.

Brush width.
Brush lenght.
Voltage drop of a brush.
Contact resistance of a brush.
Brush pressure per unit area.
Frictional coefficient of a brush.
To remove an existing brush:

1.
2.
Right click on the rotor icon to display the pop-up menu.

Click Remove Brush.
Vent Data for Generic Rotating Machines

Optionally, you can insert or remove Vent data for generic rotating machines that have either an
Inner Rotor or Outer Rotor Structure. If you have inserted a Vent, the icon appears under the core
slot in the project tree.
To insert a vent:
1. Right-click on the stator or rotor core icon to display the pop-up menu.
To remove an existing vent:
1.
2.
Right click on the stator or rotor icon to display the pop-up menu.
Click Remove Vent.
The vent data Properties dialog box contains the following fields.
Vent Ducts
Number of radial vent ducts. Default is 0.
Duct Width
Width of radial vent ducts.
Magnetic Spacer
Width
Width of magnetic spacer which hold vent ducts.

0 for non-magnetic spacer.
Duct Pitch
Vent ducts
Holes per Row
Number of axial vent holes per row
Inner Hole Diameter
Outer Hole Diameter Diameter of vent holes in outer row.

Inner Hole Location
Center-to-center diameter of inner row hole vents.
Outer Hole Location
Center-to-center diameter of outer row hole vents.
Defining the Shaft Data for a Generic Rotating Machine

1. To open the shaft data Properties dialog box, double-click the Machine>Shaft entry in the
2.
Select or clear the Magnetic Shaft check box to specify whether or not the shaft is to be made
3.
Enter the frictional loss in the Frictional Loss field.
4.
Enter the windage loss (or power for wind power generators) measured at the Reference
Speed in the Windage Loss or Power field.
5.
Enter the reference speed at which frictional and windage losses are measured in the Reference Speed field.
6.

Shaft Data for General DC Machines

magnetic material. When selected, the shaft is magnetic. Default is
unchecked for PM_INTERIOR rotor type.
Frictional Loss
The frictional loss measured at the Reference Speed.
Windage Loss or The Windage Loss (or Power for wind power generators) measured at the
Reference Speed.
Power
Reference Speed The speed at which the friction and windage losses are measured. Default is
3600 rpm for PM_INTERIOR rotor type.
Magnetic Shaft

To define solution parameters for a generic rotating machine:
1. Right-click Analysis in the project tree, and click Add Solution Setup.
The Solution Setup dialog box appears.
2.
Click the General tab.

a.
b.
c.
d.
If you wish to change the automatically assigned setup name, enter a name for the setup in
the Setup Name field.
The solution setup is enabled by default. Un-check the Enabled box to disable the setup,
if desired.
Select an operation type from the Operation Type pull-down list. The Operation Type is
set to Motor by default.
Select the Load Type used in the machine.
If the Operation Type is Motor, select one of the following Load Type options:
Const Speed
Const Power
Const Torque
Linear Torque
Fan Load

speed.
speed.
If the Operation Type is either Generator or Wind Generator, select one of the fol-
lowing Load Type options:

Infinite Bus
Independent
Generator
3.

e.
Enter the output power in the Rated Output Power field.
f.
g.
Enter the applied or output rated voltage in the Rated Voltage field.
Enter the given rated speed in the Rated Speed field.
h.
Click the Generic Rotating Machine tab.

a.
4.
For AC source type machines, enter the rated power factor in the Rated Power Factor
field. The default value is 0.8
b. For AC source type machines, if you wish to determine load impedance when the phase
current leads the phase voltage, enable the Capacitive Power Factor check box.
c. Enter the source frequency in the Frequency field and select the appropriate unit of measure. The default value is 60 Hz.
d. Optionally, you can click the Use Defaults button to restore the tab settings to default values.
Optionally, click the Defaults tab. This tab contains two buttons:
Click the Save Defaults button to save the currently-defined settings as defaults for future
setups.
5.
Click the Revert to Standard Defaults button to clear existing user-defined defaults and
revert to the standard settings.
Related Topics:
Solution Data for Generic Rotating Machines
Solution Data for Generic Rotating Machines

To access the solution data, double-click the solution setup located under Analysis in the project
tree to open the solution Properties dialog box. Solution data is also accessible in the desktop
Properties window for the selected setup.
The solution setup Properties contains the following fields:
General tab:
Name
Enabled
Operation Type
Load Type
Rated Output
Power
Rated Voltage
Rated Speed
Operating
Temperature
The name of the setup. Not editable.

Check box that enables/disables the solution setup.
Default is checked (enabled)
Set the type of operation for the machine analysis. Pull-down list selections
are: Motor, Generator, Wind Generato. Default is Motor.
Select the mechanical or electrical load type from the pull-down list.
For Motor Operation Type the selections are: Const Speed, Const Power,
Const Torque, Linear Torque, Fan Load. Default is Const Power.
For Generator and Wind Generator Operation Type the selections are:
Infinite Bus and Independent Generator. Default is Infinite Bus.
Enter the rated mechanical or electrical output (apparent) power, and select
the unit.
Enter a value for the rated voltage and select the unit.
Type a value for the rated speed, and select the unit.
Type a value for the operating temperature, and select the unit.
GRM tab:
Rated Power
Factor
Capacitive Power
Factor
Frequency
Enter the rated power factor for AC Source Type. This field is displayed
only for AC Source Type. Default value is 0.8.
Check box that enables/disables use of a capacitive power factor. Used
together with the Rated Power Factor when the phase current leads the
phase voltage, to determine load impedance. Default is unchecked.
Enter a value for the frequency, and select the unit.
Related Topics:
Stator Vent Data

Select a Machine Type to get more information of Stator Vents:

Three-Phase Synchronous Machines
Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines
Rotor Vent Data

Select a Machine Type to get more information of Rotor Vents:

Three-Phase Non-Salient Synchronous Machines
Index
aborting analyses 6-2

add array
variables 2-39
adjustable-speed permanentmagnet synchronous
motors
general data 9-54
general procedure 9-53
stator data 9-56, 9-180, 9203
winding type 9-61
adjust-speed synchronous machine
general data 9-55
adjust-speed synchronous machines
transistor drop 9-55
analyses
re-solving 6-3
starting 6-1
stopping 6-2
auto-save file 1-5
BH-curve
for permanent magnets 418
brush data
DC motors 9-88, 9-195, 9220
brushless permanent-magnet
DC motors
available circuits 9-54, 9124, 9-148
circuit type 9-54, 9-124, 9148
general data 9-123, 9-125,
9-126, 9-127, 9129, 9-139, 9-140,
9-142, 9-149
rotor pole data 9-70, 9-78,
9-140, 9-172, 9181, 9-205
pole embrace 9-70, 9140
stator data 9-126, 9-151
conductors 9-82, 9129, 9-189, 9Index-1
Maxwell Online Help
213
end length adjustment 9-66, 9-85,
9-136, 9-168, 9-192, 9216, 9-235
stator windings 9-82, 9-129, 9-189,
9-213
winding types 9-131
transistor drop 9-126, 9-150
trigger angle 9-125, 9-149
C
changing motor or generator machine type
2-3
clean stop 6-2
commutator 9-88, 9-195, 9-220
commutator type
cylinder 9-88, 9-195, 9-220
pancake 9-88, 9-195, 9-220
creating a quick report 7-19
creating motor or generator models models
2-2
creating new projects 1-3
cylinder commutator type 9-88, 9-195, 9220
D
data tables
creating 7-10
dataset expressions
using 2-45
dependent variables
definition 2-38
Design Settings in RMxprt 2-5
design variables
See local variables 2-37
designs
in project tree 1-15
setting up 8-1
desktop
menu bar 1-10
overview 1-8
status bar 1-13
toolbars 1-12
display types
of reports 7-8
E
exciter efficiency 9-120
exporting winding data 8-42
expressions
dataset 2-45
defining 2-41
including in functions 2-41
intrinsic functions in 2-42
piecewise linear functions in 2-44
valid operators 2-42
F
file formats
.q3dx 1-7
.q3dxresults 1-7
files
auto-save 1-5
Q3D Extractor 1-7
functions
defining 2-41
reserved names in Q3D Extractor 2-41
selecting for a quantity 7-13
valid operators 2-42
G
generic rotating machine
rotor core data 9-277
rotor data 9-276
stator core data 9-277
stator data 9-276
winding type 9-286
generic rotating machines
core data
Index-2
Maxwell Online Help
inner diameter 9-277

outer diameter 9-277
general data
motor speed 9-299
output power 9-299
rated voltage 9-299
type of load 9-298
winding
end clearance 9-290
winding data
conductor length adjustment 9-290
parallel branches 9-289
wire diameter 9-289
wire gauge 9-289
wire wrap 9-289
I
intrinsic functions 2-42
L
line-start permanent-magnet synchronous
motors 9-159
defining motors 9-161
functionality 9-159
general data 9-162
stator data 9-162
stator data
windings 9-165
stator windings 9-165
local variables
adding 2-37
units in definition 2-37
M
magnetic coercivity
in permanent magnets 4-18
magnetic retentivity
in permanent magnets 4-18
material browser
accessing 4-1
materials
assigning to objects 4-1
mathematical functions
See functions 2-41
menu bar
overview 1-10
menus
shortcut menus 1-11
Message window
about 1-17
displaying 1-17
N
new projects
creating 1-3
notes
saving with project 1-7
O
opening
existing projects 1-4
recent projects 1-4
opening projects in RMxprt 1-3
optimization analysis
choosing variables to optimize 2-45
P
pancake commutator type 9-88, 9-195, 9220
parameterizing
See variables 2-35
parameters
assigning variables to 2-45
permanent magnets
linear vs. nonlinear 4-18
nonlinear 4-18
permanent-magnet DC motors
Index-3
Maxwell Online Help
brush displacement 9-89, 9-196, 9-220

brush voltage drop 9-89, 9-196, 9-221
commutator and brush data 9-88, 9195, 9-220
brush pairs 9-89, 9-196, 9-220
brush width 9-89, 9-196, 9-220
commutator diameter 9-88, 9-195,
9-220
commutator insulation 9-88, 9-195,
9-220
commutator type 9-88, 9-195, 9220
commutatorlength 9-88, 9-195, 9220
mechanical pressure of brushes 989, 9-196, 9-221
general data 9-76, 9-229
rotor data 9-80, 9-238
rotor slots 9-239
piecewise linear functions
dataset expressions in 2-45
using in expressions 2-44
pole embrace (DC motors) 9-70, 9-140
post processing
overview of options 7-1
primary sweep
modifying the variable 7-12
specifying for 2D rectangular plots 7-8
specifying for 3D rectangular plot 7-10
specifying for data tables 7-10
Project Manager window
overview 1-15
showing 1-15
project tree
auto expanding 1-15
showing 1-15
project variables
adding 2-35, 2-37, 2-41, 2-42, 2-44, 245, 2-46, 2-47
naming conventions 2-35, 2-37, 2-41,
2-42, 2-44, 2-45, 2-46, 2-47
units in definition 2-35, 2-37, 2-41, 242, 2-44, 2-45, 2-46, 2-47
projects
creating new 1-3
default names 2-1
managing 2-1
opening existing 1-4
opening recent 1-4
saving 1-4
saving active 1-5
saving automatically 1-5
saving copies 1-5
saving new 1-4
saving notes 1-7
Q
quantities
plotting S-parameter 7-17
quick report 7-19
R
rectangular plots
creating 2D 7-8
creating 3D 7-9
reports
adding traces 7-11
creating 7-7
creating 2D rectangular plots 7-8
creating 3D rectangular plots 7-9
creating data tables 7-10
creating quick reports 7-19
display types 7-8
modifying data in 7-7
overview 7-7
selecting a function 7-13
sweeping variables 7-12
re-solving a problem 6-3
RMxprt
changing the machine type 2-3
general procedure 2-2, 2-3
setting up a model 2-2
RMxprt projects 1-3
Index-4
Maxwell Online Help
rotor pole diagram 9-114
S
saving projects 1-4
active projects 1-5
automatically 1-5
new projects 1-4
saving copies 1-5
secondary sweep
modifying the variable 7-12
specifying for 3D rectangular plot 7-9
selecting a machine type 1-3
sensitivity analysis
choosing variables to include 2-46
SetMachineType 2-3
setting up designs 8-1
setting up projects 8-1
Settings
Design 2-5
setups
solution 5-1
shortcut menus
overview 1-11
simulations
re-solving 6-3
starting 6-1
stopping 6-2
single-phase induction motors
defining the motor 9-25
general data 9-26
rotor data 9-41, 9-44
rotor slots 9-42
stator data 9-28
stator slots 9-29
stator windings 9-31
solution data
viewing 7-2
solution settings
specifying 5-1
solution setups
adding 5-1
solutions
after modifying the model 6-3
re-solving 6-3
starting 6-1
stopping 6-2
solving 6-1
S-parameters
plotting quantities 7-17
statistical analysis
choosing variables to include 2-47
status bar
overview 1-13
stopping an analysis 6-2
sweep variables in reports
modifying values 7-12
switched reluctance motors
defining reluctance motors 9-147
general data 9-148
stator coil data 9-152
T
three-phase induction motors
defining rotor slots 9-18
defining rotor vents 9-19
defining stator conductors 9-8
defining stator windings 9-8
defining the motor 9-4
general data 9-4
friction and wind loss 9-5, 9-26, 954, 9-77, 9-124, 9-148, 9162, 9-179, 9-203, 9-229
motor speed 9-21, 9-45, 9-73, 991, 9-119, 9-143, 9-157, 9175, 9-198, 9-223, 9-241
motor voltage 9-21, 9-45, 9-73, 991, 9-119, 9-143, 9-157, 9175, 9-198, 9-223, 9-241
output power 9-21, 9-45, 9-73, 991, 9-119, 9-143, 9-157, 9175, 9-198, 9-223, 9-241
type of load 9-21, 9-45, 9-73, 9-90,
Index-5
Maxwell Online Help
9-119, 9-143, 9-157, 9175, 9-197, 9-223, 9-241

winding connection 9-22
rotor data 9-16, 9-21, 9-69, 9-72, 9-90,
9-118, 9-139, 9-142, 9-155, 9156, 9-171, 9-174, 9-186, 9197, 9-210, 9-222, 9-240
end ring 9-19, 9-43
stator data 9-5
conductor length adjustment 9-13,
9-36, 9-37, 9-65, 9-85, 9108, 9-135, 9-152, 9-167,
9-192, 9-216, 9-234
conductors 9-8
inner diameter 9-5, 9-17, 9-28, 941, 9-56, 9-69, 9-77, 9-80,
9-97, 9-112, 9-126, 9-139,
9-151, 9-156, 9-163, 9171, 9-180, 9-187, 9-211,
9-230, 9-238
outer diameter 9-5, 9-17, 9-28, 941, 9-56, 9-69, 9-77, 9-80,
9-97, 9-112, 9-126, 9-139,
9-151, 9-156, 9-163, 9171, 9-180, 9-187, 9-203,
9-211, 9-230, 9-238
parallel branches 9-11, 9-64, 9106, 9-134, 9-153, 9-166,
9-184, 9-232
slot type 9-6, 9-16, 9-29, 9-41, 956, 9-80, 9-98, 9-127, 9163, 9-230
slots 9-6, 9-16, 9-29, 9-41, 9-56, 980, 9-98, 9-127, 9-151, 9156, 9-163, 9-230
stator slots 9-7
windings 9-8
wire diameter 9-12, 9-36, 9-38, 964, 9-84, 9-107, 9-134, 9153, 9-166, 9-184, 9-191,
9-215, 9-233
wire gauge 9-12, 9-37, 9-38, 9-65,
9-84, 9-107, 9-135, 9-153,
9-166, 9-184, 9-191, 9215, 9-233

wire wrap 9-11, 9-36, 9-38, 9-64, 983, 9-107, 9-134, 9-153, 9166, 9-184, 9-190, 9-214,
9-233
three-phase inductions motors
stator data
winding type 9-8, 9-32, 9-59, 9-82,
9-101, 9-129, 9-189, 9213, 9-232
three-phase non-salient synchronous generators
general data 9-246
three-phase non-salient synchronous machine
stator data
inner diameter 9-247
outer diameter 9-247
slot type 9-248
slots 9-248
stator slots 9-248
stator skew 9-249
three-phase synchronous generators
exciter efficiency 9-120
friction loss 9-97
general data 9-97
rotor pole
diagram 9-114
rotor pole data 9-114
rotor winding data 9-115
parallel branches 9-116
winding type 9-116
wire wrap 9-116
stator data 9-97
stator slots 9-99
winding types 9-104
stator ducts 9-100, 9-249
stator skew 9-100
stator winding
end clearance 9-13, 9-66, 9-85, 9108, 9-136, 9-167, 9-192,
9-216, 9-234
Index-6
Maxwell Online Help
toolbars
overview 1-12
traces
adding blank 7-12
adding to reports 7-11
removing 7-12
replacing 7-12
Traces dialog box 7-7
tuning
choosing variables to tune 2-46
predefined in Q3D Extractor 2-41

setting default value 2-36
types in Q3D Extractor 2-35
W
winding data
exporting 8-42
U
units
as part of variable definitions 2-35, 237, 2-41, 2-42, 2-44, 2-45, 246, 2-47
universal motors
defining motors 9-178
functionality 9-177
general data 9-179
user interface
overview 1-8
V
validation check 2-8
variables
add array 2-39
adding local variables 2-37
adding project variables 2-35, 2-37, 241, 2-42, 2-44, 2-45, 2-46, 2-47
assigning to parameters 2-45
choosing to optimize 2-45
choosing to tune 2-46
dataset expressions in 2-45
dependent 2-38
including in functions 2-41
including in sensitivity analysis 2-46
including in statistical analysis 2-47
overview 2-35
Index-7

RMXPRT Onlinehelp

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RMXPRT Onlinehelp

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Table of Contents

1. Getting Started with RMxprt

Recovering RMxprt Project Data in an Auto-Save File . . 1-6

RMxprt Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

The RMxprt Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Working with the RMxprt Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Maxwell Online Help

Redoing RMxprt Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Working with the RMxprt Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Working with the RMxprt Project Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Working with the RMxprt Properties Window . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Working with the RMxprt Progress Window . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Quick Start for RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

2. Setting Up RMxprt Projects

Design Settings in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Validating RMxprt Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Maxwell Online Help

Setting RMxprt Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Setting Machine Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Edit AC Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

Working with the Slot Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Editing Slot Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Working with Variables in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

Using Valid Operators for Expressions in RMxprt . . . . . . 2-42

Assigning Variables in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Maxwell Online Help

Choosing a Variable to Tune in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46

3. Wire Specification Libraries

Export/Import Wire Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

4. Working with Materials in RMxprt

Bulk Conductivity for an RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Maxwell Online Help

Mass Density for RMxprt Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17

Permanent Magnet Materials in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

Calculating the Properties for a Non-Linear Permanent Magnet

Curve Fitting of Demagnetization Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28

Conductor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

5. Specifying RMxprt Solution Settings

Creating RMxprt Customized Design Sheet Template . . . 5-5

Maxwell Online Help

6. Running an RMxprt Simulation

7. Post Processing and Generating Reports in

Exporting a Simplorer Model or Customized Design Sheet 7-5

Creating 2D Rectangular Plots in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Working with Traces in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11

Sweeping a Variable in a Report in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12

Creating Quick Reports in RMxprt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

8. Specifying RMxprt Winding Data

Maxwell Online Help

Setting the Number of Winding Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Poly-phase Winding Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Equipotential Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34

Pole Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35

Exporting Winding Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42

9. RMxprt Machine Types

Maxwell Online Help

Defining the General Data for a Three Phase Induction Motor

Setting Up Analysis Parameters for a Three-Phase Induction

Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Maxwell Online Help

General Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . . 9-27

Defining the Stator Data for a Single-Phase Induction Motor 928

Stator Slot Data for Single-Phase Induction Motors . . . . . 9-30